passport guide dvr 3.7 for motorola customer service guideturning parental control off: auto or...

Passport® Guide DVR 3.7 for Motorola

Customer Service Guide

Copyright © 2012 Rovi Corporation.Rovi is a trademark of Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Confidential.

stephen.rowles

Text Box

Please note: The Passport Guide DVR platform and this manual are made specifically for Motorola DVRs. However, you may have an HD only converter using this platform as well. HD Only models include: DCX3400 DCX700 DCT3416 DCX3200 Phase 2 DCT6416 DCX3200 DCT6412 If you have one of these models, but you are not subscribed to DVR service, please understand that any DVR functionality listed in this manual (recording, buffering, shows list, etc.) will not work.

Passport® Guide DVR 3.7 for Motorola Customer Service Guide

Copyright © 2012 Rovi Corporation. All rights reserved.

February 29, 2012

This document, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license and applicable copyright laws. The information in this document is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Rovi Corporation assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document or for any omissions. Except as permitted by such license and applicable copyright laws, no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, transmitted, adapted, translated in any form or by any means without prior written authorization of Rovi Corporation.

This product may be protected by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 6,418,556; 7,100,185; 5,809,204; 6,396,546; 5,940,073; and 6,239,794. Other patents are pending.

Rovi is a trademark and Passport® is a registered trademark of Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries. All other product names mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners.

Rovi Corporation 2830 De La Cruz Boulevard Santa Clara, CA 95050

Contents

15

15

1 Introduction

About Passport Guide DVR

Channel Banner and Info Banner

Program Guide

Quick Settings

Passport QuickMenu™

General Settings menu

Parental Control

Pay-Per-View (PPV) purchasing

Digital Video Recording (DVR) capability

High Definition TV (HDTV) functionality

Dual tuners

Requirements for use of Passport Guide DVR

About the Passport Guide DVR set-top box

Rebooting the set-top box

About the remote control

Remote control keys

About this guide

Conventions

2 Getting Started with Basic Procedures 31

Turning on the TV and set-top box

VCR and AUX devices

Selecting a channel

Keying in channel numbers

Selecting a channel up or down

Selecting a favorite channel

Specifying skipped channels

Selecting a program in the Program Guide

Listening to music

Adjusting or muting the audio volume

15

16

17

17

18

18

19

19

20

20

21

21

21

22

23

26

29

32

32

33

33

34

34

35

36

37

38

Passpor t® Gu ide DVR 3 .7 f o r Mo toro la Cus tomer Se rv i ce Gu ide 3

Conten ts

40

42

43

44

46

47

48

48

Using the Channel Banner and the Info Banner

Channel Banner

Info Banner

Displaying and browsing QuickInfo™

Caller ID Banner

Caller ID application dialog

Voicemail Banner

Exiting the Voicemail Banner

Passport Guide DVR icons

3 Using the Program Guide 53

About the Program Guide

Displaying the Program Guide

Exiting the Program Guide

Displaying information for a few days ahead

Selecting a view from the Program Guide

Views accessible from the Find Shows pop-up menu

Displaying and navigating the Program Guide by time

Selecting and sorting channels in the Time Grid

Time Grid: List channels

List Channels: Setting up custom lists of channel categories 63

List Channels: Using custom groups of channel categories 66

Sort channels

Go to date

Displaying and navigating the Program Guide by theme

List of themes

Selecting channels and sorting programs in Theme view

Theme view: List channels

List Channels: Creating custom channel groups in Theme view

Sorting programs in Theme view

Using Channel List to display upcoming programs on specific channels 83

Displaying the Recorded Shows screen 87

Back to TV

Searching the Program Guide by title

Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By title

Sorting title search results

Searching the Program Guide by keyword

Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By keyword

49

54

55

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

68

70

72

75

76

77

79

82

88

89

93

99

101

105

Passpor t® Gu ide DVR 3 .7 f o r Moto ro l a Cus tomer Se rv i ce Gu ide 4

Conten ts

111

113

115

120

121

124

126

127

Keyboard Spelling Assist

Sorting keyword search results

Creating a keyword series request

Viewing additional information about a program

Creating a keyword series request from a cast member’s name

Selecting a program in the Program Guide

Setting a reminder timer from the Program Guide

Canceling a reminder timer from the Program Guide

Listing upcoming shows from the Program Guide

Banner ads 130

4 Selecting Quick Settings 131

About Quick Settings

Displaying the Quick Settings menu

Exiting the Quick Settings menu

Controlling Parental Control from the Quick Settings menu

Enabling Parental Control by using the Quick Settings menu

Disabling Parental Control by using the Quick Settings menu 135

Making the current channel a favorite 138

Recording the current channel

Activating or deactivating secondary audio

Activating or deactivating the sleep timer

Activating or deactivating closed captions

5 Using Passport QuickMenu™ 147

About the QuickMenu

Displaying and using the QuickMenu

Exiting the QuickMenu

6 Specifying General Settings 151

About the General Settings menu

Displaying and navigating the General Settings menu

Getting help for preferences in General Settings

Exiting the General Settings menu

My Preferences

Adding or deleting favorite channels

Adding favorite channels

Auto Favorites 160

129

132

133

133

134

134

140

142

143

144

148

149

149

152

156

157

157

158

158

158


Conten ts

160

161

163

165

167

169

170

172

Turning Auto Favorites on and off

Deleting favorite channels

Clearing all favorite channels

Specifying skipped channels

Removing channels from the skipped channels list

Clearing all skipped channels

Setting the power-on channel

Forced power-on channels and operator-created portals

Setting the Channel Banner duration

Auto-tuning to high-definition (HDTV) channels

Displaying QuickTips

Enhanced TV Apps

Caller ID application

Caller ID Banner display behavior

Call history 184

Caller ID application information

Sending calls to voicemail

Setting the Caller ID application

Turning the Caller ID application on or off

Setting the Caller ID Banner duration

Reviewing the Caller ID history

Deleting specific calls from the call history

Messages 192

Turning the message notice on and off

Reviewing messages

Setting Parental Control preferences

Timers 197

Activating or deactivating the sleep timer

Setting the power-on timer

Setting the power-off timer

Setting a reminder timer

Modifying a reminder timer

Canceling a reminder timer

Scheduling recordings from a remote location

Setting purchasing preferences

Language 213

Activating and deactivating the Secondary Audio Program (SAP) 213

Setting up and using descriptive video 215

173

175

178

181

183

183

184

185

186

186

187

189

190

193

194

196

197

199

202

204

207

208

210

212


Conten ts

217

221

223

225

225

225

229

Setting the closed captioning option

Specifying the language for user interface display text

Specifying the language for subtitles

Audio/video settings

Setting the video output format

Scanning technique

Format options 225

Setting the audio level

Setting the analog channel audio output

Setting the digital channel audio output

Setting the dynamic range

Accessories 238

Setting AC outlet use

Setting the RF output

Setting set-top clock options

Assigning names to optional client set-top boxes

7 Using Parental Control 247

About Parental Control

Establishing a Parental Control PIN

Changing the PIN

Selecting a locked channel while Parental Control is enabled

Playing a locked recorded show while Parental Control is enabled 254

Turning Parental Control off: Auto or manual relock 254

Selecting Parental Control settings

Locking channels

Unlocking channels

Locking ratings 260

Unlocking ratings

Locking content

Unlocking content advisories

Locking time periods

Canceling locked time periods

Unlocking or modifying locked time periods

Hiding adult titles

Hiding adult titles always

Displaying adult titles

Hiding or displaying adult titles by using the Parental Control Locking Status

231

233

235

238

240

241

245

248

249

251

253

255

255

258

264

267

270

272

275

277

280

282

284

287


Conten ts

290

299

Activating Parental Control

Activating Parental Control from the Quick Settings menu 291

Turning on Parental Control from the General Settings menu 293

Turning off Parental Control 295

Turning off Parental Control until you power off the set-top box 296

Turning off Parental Control temporarily from the Quick Settings menu 297

Turning off Parental Control temporarily from General Settings

Turning off Parental Control until you manually reactivate it

8 Purchasing Pay-Per-View (PPV) Programs 303

About PPV 304

Establishing a Purchase PIN

Enabling and disabling the Purchase PIN

Changing the Purchase PIN

Purchasing PPV programs from the Program Guide

Purchasing PPV programs from QuickInfo

Purchasing PPV programs from PPV channels

Checking the status of PPV programs

Canceling PPV purchases from General Settings

Canceling PPV purchases from the Program Guide

9 Using the Digital Video Recorder (DVR) 331

About the Digital Video Recorder (DVR)

Features of your Digital Video Recorder (DVR)

Channel LOD buffer cache size

Swapping between foreground and background tuners

Info Banner and Mini Info Banner

Rewind and fast forward speeds

Notch skip function

Thirty (30) second skip ahead

Slow motion playback

Frame-by-frame advance and rewind

Delayed video (time-shifting)

Changing the position of the Mini Info Banner

Recording a program

Recording a program while watching the program

Stopping a program while it is being recorded

301

305

308

311

313

318

323

325

327

329

332

333

334

334

335

338

339

339

339

339

340

341

342

342

344


Conten ts

344

350

352

353

355

Automatically extending the recording of a live sporting event and the subsequent program

Recording a current or future program from the Program Guide 346

Recording a future program from QuickInfo 348

Manual recording

Manual recording notes

Recording a series

Canceling a recording from the Program Guide

Using the Recording Options menu

Additional Recording Options menu

Resolving conflicts

Playing back recorded programs

Using the Recorded Shows screen

Sorting and grouping titles on the Recorded Shows screen 369

Deleting a folder and its contents from the Recorded Shows screen 371

Deleting all viewed programs from a folder on the Recorded Shows screen

Playing all programs in a folder sequentially

Playing all unviewed programs in a folder sequentially

Stopping playback while folder sequential playback is in progress 376

Checking hard disk space usage 377

Clearing space on the hard disk

Recorded Shows Options menu

Displaying information about a recorded show

Using the storage priority screen

Erasing a saved program

Using the Scheduled Recordings screen

Scheduled Recording Options menu

Sorting and grouping titles on the Scheduled Recordings screen 387

Using the Series Manager 389

Series Manager Options menu

Sorting the Series Manager by priority or title

Assigning priority to series recordings

Series Recording Options menu

Series Repeat Options menu

Canceling a series recording

Cropping 401

Automatic cropping

357

360

362

364

366

372

374

375

379

380

381

382

383

384

386

391

392

394

396

399

400

402


Conten ts

402

405

406

408

413

Manual cropping

Using Lost & Found to find missing recordings

Grouping titles in the Lost & Found

Deleting a program from the Lost & Found

Finding an upcoming showing of an erased or failed recording 409

Recovering a manually erased show 411

10 Passport Guide DVR Applications

About Passport Guide DVR applications

Playing the Games application

Selecting a game

Klondike Solitaire

Twenty One or Bust

Poker 5 Card Draw

Passport Guide DVR Weather application

Displaying a Weather application report

Specifying a new location for the Weather application

Remote Wizard application

Setting up the Passport Guide DVR remote to operate your DVD player

Setting up the Passport Guide DVR remote to operate your TV 426

Setting up the Passport Guide DVR remote to adjust the audio level 428

Fingerprint application

11 Purchasing Premium Services using the iSubscribe Application 431

About iSubscribe

Purchasing services from a single offer iSubscribe screen

Purchasing services from a multiple offer iSubscribe screen

Purchasing services from the All iSubscribe Offers channel

Selecting an offer that has already been purchased

Selecting unsubscribed channels not associated with any offers

Selecting iSubscribe application channels from the Program Guide

12 About Video Mosaic Channels

Video Mosaic channel features

Entering a Video Mosaic channel

Exiting a Video Mosaic channel

414

414

415

416

417

418

419

420

421

423

424

430

432

433

436

440

445

446

446

447

448

451

451


Conten ts

452

452

453

453

454

456

457

457

Understanding highlight box behaviors

Using the program information panel

INFO key behavior in Video Mosaic channels

About scaled video streams

Navigating scaled video streams

Viewing locked channels in Video Mosaic

Using the Standalone Channel Button List

Accessing the Standalone Channel Button List

Navigating the Standalone Channel Button List

Launching a channel from the Standalone Channel Button List

About interactive video advertisements in Video Mosaic

Audio behavior in Video Mosaic

Using Advanced Mode

Using the More INFO menu

Browsing programs in Advanced Mode

Using the QuickInfo banner in a Video Mosaic channel

Using the record key in Video Mosaic channels

About the Video Mosaic screen saver

Tuning to the “last tuned” channel

Using Mosaic to create and facilitate portals

Guide links functionality in Mosaic

Configurable help text for links

13 Enjoying ShowRunner Video on Demand (VOD)

About ShowRunner Video on Demand (VOD)

About VOD offers

Entering and exiting VOD and SVOD channels

Understanding VOD and PPV

Rental windows and grace periods

Restricting VOD purchases

About VOD Library channels

Head-end configurable features

Hidden MOD channels

Purchasing VOD programs from a VOD library channel

Canceling VOD purchases

Reviewing VOD purchases

Hiding VOD purchases and SVOD views

Playing a hidden VOD purchased program

458

458

459

460

460

461

461

462

463

463

463

464

465

465

467

468

469

469

470

471

471

472

473

477

478

480

482

483

484


Conten ts

485

486

488

490

491

492

492

Understanding VOD and SVOD icons

Controlling VOD and SVOD playback

Understanding playback icons

Progress bar 489

About the On Demand Channel Banner

About the On Demand QuickInfo™ Banner

About the Mini Channel Banner

About VOD Feature channels

About SVOD Library channels

Supercategory Library channels

SVOD blackout 500

Exiting a blocked SVOD service barker

Whole Home VOD (WHVOD) and ShowRunner VOD

Whole Home VOD back office configuration

Limitations and exclusions

Hiding VOD purchases in a Whole Home environment

Playing a hidden VOD purchased program in a Whole Home environment

14 The On Demand Venue Application

About the On Demand Venue library channel

Venue Bread Crumbs

Searching the ShowRunner On Demand programming library

15 Reviewing Your Bill with Bill View

About Bill View 512

Entering and exiting the Bill View channel

Viewing your bill

Bill Reminder 515

Bill Reminder banner duration and frequency

Bill Reminder banner display priority

16 Using Passport on Non-DVR Set-top Boxes517

About Passport non-DVR set-top boxes

Two types of non-DVR set-top box: Standalone and Client

Using Passport Guide DVR on a standalone non-DVR set-top box

495

499

500

501

501

501

502

504

505

506

508

509

511

512

513

516

516

518

519

520


Conten ts

Using Passport Guide DVR on a non-DVR client set-top box connected to a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network 521

Feature comparison chart 525

General information on capabilities of non-DVR set-top boxes 526

Non-DVR set-top boxes cannot control Live TV (Standalones and Clients) 526

QuickInfo™ on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients) 527

Quick Settings on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients) 528

General Settings on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients) 530

Parental Control on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients) 531

Establishing or changing a Parental Control PIN for a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients) 532

Assigning names to Passport Guide DVR Clients and Passport Guide DVR Servers 533

Viewing information about other network clients 536

Recorded Shows screen on a non-DVR Client set-top box 536

Playing back recorded shows on a non-DVR set-top box (Clients only) 537

Recorded Shows Options menu on a non-DVR set-top box (Clients only) 538

Resolving conflicts 541

Index 543


Conten ts


stephen.rowles

Text Box

Please note: The Passport Guide DVR platform and this manual are made specifically for Motorola DVRs. However, you may have an HD only converter using the Passport Guide DVR platform. These models include: DCX3400 DCT3416 DCT6416 DCT6412 If you have one of these models, but you are not subscribed to DVR service, please understand that any DVR functionality listed in this manual (recording, buffering, shows list, etc.) will not work.

1

Passpor t® Gu ide DVR 3

Introduction

This chapter introduces Passport® Guide DVR 3.7 for Motorola, offers an overview of its features, and describes the contents and purpose of this guide.

This chapter includes the following sections:

• “About Passport Guide DVR” on page 15

• “Requirements for use of Passport Guide DVR” on page 21

• “About the Passport Guide DVR set-top box” on page 21

• “About the remote control” on page 22

• “About this guide” on page 26

About Passport Guide DVR

Passport Guide DVR is a system that offers subscribers an easy, interactive way to watch and record TV. Key features of Passport Guide DVR are described below.

Channel Banner and Info Banner

At certain times, Passport Guide DVR will display the Channel Banner and Info Banner in the lower third of your TV screen. These banners provide information about the current program.

For more information about the Channel Banner, see “Channel Banner” on page 42.

For more information about the Info Banner, see “Info Banner” on page 43.

. 7 f o r Mo toro l a Cus tomer Se rv i ce Gu ide 15

Chapte r 1—In t roduc t i on

Program Guide

The Program Guide shows you what’s on TV.

You can use the Program Guide to:

• View listings

• Sort listings by favorite channels, HDTV channels, or customized channel line-ups

• Select programs

• Schedule future recordings

• Search for programs by title or keyword

• Purchase Pay-Per-View (PPV) programs.

• You can sort the Program Guide in various ways. For example, you can sort it to list channels by number, or alphabetically by call letters.

• You can set the Program Guide to list only Favorite, Music, On Demand, or Pay-Per-View channels (or, if enabled by your cable operator, HDTV channels).

• You can also set up to three custom sorts, which you can access at any time by selecting the desired sort when you enter the Program Guide. (For more information about custom sorts, see “List Channels: Creating custom channel groups in Theme view” on page 79.)

• You can also set it to hide Skipped, Locked, Music, On Demand, or Pay-Per-View channels (and if you have an HDTV set-top box, HDTV channels).

Note: If you are using a standard definition television (SD), and depending on your cable operator’s HD-surfing configuration, the HDTV option might not be available on your system.

For more information about the Program Guide, see “Using the Program Guide” on page 53.

16 Passpor t® Gu ide DVR 3 .7 f o r Mo to ro l a Cus tomer Se rv i ce Gu ide


Quick Sett ings

The Quick Settings menu enables you to set certain Passport Guide DVR options quickly and easily.

It enables you to quickly activate Parental Control, designate the current channel as a favorite, start recording the current program, display closed captioning, play secondary audio programs (SAP), or activate the Sleep Timer.

Note: Not all options are visible in the Quick Settings menu illustration below.

For more information about the Quick Settings, see “Selecting Quick Settings” on page 131.

Passport QuickMenu™

Passport QuickMenu enables you to quickly access various Passport Guide DVR functions.

It provides a shortcut to common functions in various categories.

Note: The specific categories may vary and are determined by your cable operator.

For more information about the QuickMenu, see “Using Passport QuickMenu™” on page 147.

Passpor t® Gu ide DVR 3 .7 f o r Mo to ro l a Cus tomer Se rv i ce Gu ide 17


Genera l Set t ings menu

The General Settings menu enables you to set all Passport Guide DVR user-defined preferences, including My Preferences, Parental Control, Timers, Purchasing, Language, Audio/Video, and Accessories preferences.

For more information about the General Settings, see “Specifying General Settings” on page 151.

Parenta l Contro l

Parental Control enables you to restrict the programs your household members can watch based on channels, ratings, content advisories, or time periods.

You can access detailed Parental Control features from the General Settings menu or via the QuickMenu, or turn Parental Control on or off from the Quick Settings.

For more information about Parental Control, see “Using Parental Control” on page 247.



Pay-Per-V iew (PPV) purchas ing

PPV purchasing enables you to purchase and watch Pay-Per-View programs, widening your choice of televised programs.

For more information about Pay-Per-View, see “Purchasing Pay-Per-View (PPV) Programs” on page 303.

Dig i ta l V ideo Record ing (DVR) capabi l i ty

The hard disk drive in a Passport Guide DVR set-top box enables you to use Passport Guide DVR to manage a library of recorded programs, apply VCR-like functionality to TV programming, and time-shift your TV viewing.

The DVR functions also enable you to schedule recordings for all of your favorite programs and series.

For more information about DVR functionality, see “Using the Digital Video Recorder (DVR)” on page 331.

Note: In order to access the DVR-related menus of Passport Guide DVR, you must have a remote control that features a DVR LIST key.



High Def in i t ion TV (HDTV) funct ional i ty

Your Passport Guide DVR digital set-top box may support high definition (HD) broadcasts, enabling you to watch HD programming if you have an HD-capable television.

You can enjoy digital video recorder (DVR) functions such as pause, fast forward, rewind, and recording features with high-definition programs, just as you would with standard definition (SD) shows.

Dual tuners

The Passport Guide DVR set-top box may include two tuners that make it possible to view or record programs in a variety of ways.

The tuner carrying the channel or saved program that you are currently watching is considered the “foreground” tuner; the other tuner, which is not visible, is the “background” tuner.

Swapping Foreground and Background Tuners

This dual tuner configuration enables you to:

• Record one program while watching another program on live TV

• Record two programs at the same time, while also watching a recorded program from the hard disk

For more information about recording programs, see “Using the Digital Video Recorder (DVR)” on page 331.

• Swap back and forth between whatever is showing on the two tuners (for example, to switch between a recorded program and a live TV broadcast).

For more information about swapping tuners, see “Swapping between foreground and background tuners” on page 334.



Requirements for use o f Passport Guide DVR

To use Passport Guide DVR, subscribers require the following:

• A DVR-equipped set-top box and remote control

• A standard-definition (SD) or high-definition (HD) television or monitor

About the Passport Guide DVR set- top box

The Passport Guide DVR set-top box is a low-powered computer that features special hardware to play and record analog and digital video.

Passport Guide DVR resides in the set-top box and is activated when the set-top box is powered on. Virtually all interactivity is accomplished via the remote control, which communicates with Passport Guide DVR.

The front panel of certain set-top box models may feature several buttons. You can use these buttons to change the channel, display the Program Guide, navigate menus, or turn the set-top box on or off without using the remote control.

The front panel may also include an EXIT key and a SELECT key. These keys are used, for example, to invoke the Diagnostics channel. (For more information about the Diagnostics channel, refer to the Diagnostics Guide.)

Passport Guide DVR also enables auxiliary A/V input on the front panel of set-top box models that feature A/V ports on the front panel.

Reboot ing the set- top box

On rare occasions, it may be necessary to reboot the set-top box. To initiate a reboot, hold down the Power button on the front panel for seven (7) seconds.



About the remote contro l

To use the remote control with your TV or other equipment, you may need to first program it using the procedures explained in your remote control documentation.

Note: To access the DVR-related functionality of Passport Guide DVR, you must have a remote control that features a DVR LIST key.

The illustration on the following page describes the keys on the remote control.

For information about setting up your remote control, see “Remote Wizard application” on page 423.

Power on/off DVD

Auxiliary device Displays QuickMenu

(if supported)

Displays Program Guide

Browse left (left arrow) Select

Displays Quick Settings menu

Browse down (down arrow)

Select option A, B or C; (may be configured by MSO to link to

channels or guide links)

Increase or decrease volume

Mute volume

Recorded Shows screen

Instant Replay (skip back 10 secs.)

*Rewind program

*Stop program

*Pause program

Enter channel numbersto select a channel;enter PIN numbers;

enter favorite/locked channel numbers;if so configured, the number keys canbe used to power-on the set-top box

Swap tuners

Television

Set-top box

Displays Info Banner; provides additional information when in the Program Guide and QuickInfo; and in General Settings menu, it shows help

Browse up (up arrow)

Browse right (right arrow)

Page up or down

Exit Channel Banner, Program Guide, Quick Settings menu, General Settings menu, QuickMenu

Change channels up or down

Select the next favorite channel

Return to the channel last viewed

Reserved for future use

Return to live TV *Play program

*Fast forward program

Record program

*Keys marked with an asterisk (*) control LOD buffer video, as well as recorded shows and VOD programs that are being played back.



Remote contro l keys

The following table offers a detailed description of the remote control keys.

Key Funct ion

Turns on the currently-selected device.

Selects the TV as the device the remote will control.

Selects the auxiliary device as the device the remote will control.

Selects the set-top box as the device the remote will control.

Displays the Program Guide Time Grid.

If the Program Guide is already displayed, pressing the GUIDE key again displays a popup menu that enables you to change Program Guide views or exit the Program Guide (Back to TV).

In the Program Guide, while the pop-up menu is displayed, pressing the GUIDE key again dismisses the Program Guide and returns to live TV.

Displays the QuickMenu (if supported); otherwise displays the Quick Settings.

Displays or hides additional information.

If the Info Banner is displayed, displays QuickInfo™.

In the Program Guide, displays more information about a program.

In the General Settings menu, displays helpful information about a setting.

In the Recorded Shows screen, displays group shows options when sorted by Group Titles, and extended information for single shows.

Displays the Pay-Per-View channel with the lowest channel number.

Displays or hides the Quick Settings menu; hides the General Settings menu.

In the Program Guide grid, scrolls the grid down; otherwise, moves the highlight to the next lower item.

In the Program Guide grid, scrolls the grid up; otherwise, moves the highlight to the next higher item.



Key Funct ion

In the Program Guide grid, scrolls the grid from right to left; otherwise, moves the highlight to the right. In Fast Forward mode, skips forward to the next 15-minute increment tick mark in the progress bar. If playback is paused, advances frame-byframe.

In the Program Guide grid, scrolls the grid from left to right; otherwise, moves the highlight to the left. In Reverse mode on a recorded program, skips back to the previous 15-minute increment tick mark in the progress bar. If playback is paused, rewinds frame-by-frame.

Executes a variety of actions. Behavior varies depending on the current menu. In general, accepts a selection or displays a subsequent menu.

Silences (or resumes) the audio.

The LIST key (or DVR LIST key on certain remote controls) navigates to the Recorded Shows screen. If you are already in the Series Manager, Recorded Shows, or Scheduled Recordings screens, pressing this key displays the DVR LIST pop-up menu.

The LIVE key displays the current live broadcast of the selected channel.

Adjusts the volume. Press VOL (+) to increase the volume level; press VOL (-) to decrease the volume level.

Changes the channel. Press CH (+) to channel up; press CH (-) to channel down.

Exits the current display or dialog (Channel Banner, Program Guide, Quick Settings menu, QuickMenu, or General Settings menu). Pressing the EXIT key while a channel application (the Games, Weather, and Remote Wizard applications) is displayed will display full-screen video of the program currently playing in the video inset window).

Turns one page in the Program Guide. Press ‘+’ to page up; press ‘-’ to page down. Also effective in the General Settings menu.

Performs the action indicated on the Passport Guide DVR user interface display.

These buttons can also be configured by your cable operator to link to specific channels, services, features, or specific locations in the Program Guide.

Returns to the previous broadcast channel. If you are watching a pre-recorded program, pressing this key will display the last watched channel on the foreground tuner.



Key Funct ion

Selects the next favorite channel while surfing, or displays the favorite channel list in the Program Guide. Pressing the FAV key for two seconds will mark the current channel as a favorite channel.

Rewinds video. If playback is paused, initiates reverse slow-motion. In the Program Guide, in the Time Grid, jumps back one day.

Plays video.

If the 30-second skip head-end configuration setting is turned off, pressing the PLAY key twice in quick succession initiates slow-motion playback.

If the head-end configurable 30-second skip option setting is turned on, pressing the PLAY key twice in quick succession skips ahead 30 seconds and resumes playback.

In the Program Guide, in the Time Grid, jumps ahead one day (for the convenience of users with remotes that lack DAY +/- keys).

Fast forwards video. If playback is paused, initiates slow-motion (forward). In the Program Guide, in the Time Grid, jumps ahead one day.

Pauses video.

Stops video playback or recording.

In the Program Guide, in the Time Grid, jumps back one day (for the convenience of users with remotes that lack DAY +/- keys).

Records current program to the hard drive, or displays a screen that enables you to schedule the recording of a program.

Swaps between foreground and background tuners.

Displays the currently-airing program on the most-recently displayed channel.

The Instant Replay key skips back and replays five seconds of video.

Skips forward or backward one day in the Program Guide listings. (This key may not be available on all remote controls.)



About th is gu ide

This document, the Passport Guide DVR 3.7 for Motorola Customer Service Guide, provides information about and procedures for using Passport Guide DVR on a Motorola set-top box.

It explains how to use the Program Guide, the Quick Settings and General Settings menus, the QuickMenu, and the Parental Control functions. It also explains how to purchase Pay-Per-View programs, how to operate the digital video recorder that is included in the set-top box, and how to use certain optional applications such as the Weather application and the Games application.

The Passport Guide DVR 3.7 for Motorola Customer Service Guide is intended to help customer service representatives (or other personnel who may answer support calls from customers) to resolve customer questions regarding Passport Guide DVR.

Note: The displays in this document are typical but may vary slightly from the images shown on any particular television system, depending on the configuration of the cable head-end.

The following table describes the contents of each chapter.

Chapter Content

Chapter 1. “Introduction” on page 15 Introduces Passport Guide DVR and provides a brief overview of features.

Chapter 2. “Getting Started with Basic Procedures” on page 31

Explains basic procedures, such as turning on the TV and set-top box, selecting channels, selecting favorite channels, adjusting or muting the audio, and using the Channel Banner, Info Banner, Caller ID Banner, and QuickInfo™.

Chapter 3. “Using the Program Guide” on page 53

Explains how to use the Program Guide, including how to view listings; sort listings by favorite channels, HDTV channels, or multiple customized channel lists that you can create; select programs to watch or record; schedule future recordings; search for programs by title or keyword; search All listings, TV listings only, or On Demand listings only; and purchase Pay-Per-View (PPV) programs.

Chapter 4. “Selecting Quick Settings” on page 131

Explains options in the Quick Settings menu, such as activating Parental Control, recording a channel, making a channel a favorite, playing secondary audio (SAP), displaying closed captions, and activating a Sleep Timer.

Chapter 5. “Using Passport QuickMenu™” on page 147

Explains how to use the QuickMenu, including how to display it and use it as a shortcut to access various functions.



Chapter Content

Chapter 6. “Specifying General Settings” on page 151

Explains how to specify preferences in the General Settings menu, enabling you to control such features as My Preferences; Parental Control; Favorite Channels and Skipped Channels; Caller ID; Messages; Timers to power on and off the set-top box, or to remind you of imminent program events; Descriptive Video, Closed Captioning, language options for user interface text and subtitles, various detailed audio and video settings, Purchasing and Accessories.

Chapter 7. “Using Parental Control” on page 247

Explains how to set up Parental Control for your TV, including setting the locking PIN, specifying the channels, ratings, content advisories, and time periods you want to lock, and activating Parental Control. You can also hide adult titles from display in the guide or in search results.

Chapter 8. “Purchasing Pay-Per-View (PPV) Programs” on page 303

Explains how to purchase PPV programs, including setting or changing the Purchase PIN and canceling pending purchases.

Chapter 9. “Using the Digital Video Recorder (DVR)” on page 331

Explains how to use the digital recording capability of Passport Guide DVR.

Chapter 10. “Using the Digital Video Recorder (DVR)” on page 331

Explains how to use certain optional applications that may be available to you via Passport Guide DVR, such as the Weather application and the Games application.

Chapter 11. “Purchasing Premium Services using the iSubscribe Application” on page 431

Explains how to use the iSubscribe application feature to purchase unsubscribed premium service packages.

Chapter 12. “About Video Mosaic Channels” on page 447

Explains how to use the Video Mosaic feature to watch multiple video streams simultaneously, and how to launch services by highlighting and selecting channel keys. Also describes links to the Program Guide.

Chapter 13. “Enjoying ShowRunner Video on Demand (VOD)” on page 467

Explains how to use ShowRunner Video on Demand channels to purchase programs from a library of available titles and view those programs during a limited period of time. It also explains how to use your remote control to pause, fast forward, and rewind purchased programs.

Chapter 14. “The On Demand Venue Application” on page 505

Explains how to easily locate services by browsing through categories and subcategories of On Demand channels, and then selecting and launching the desired channel. Also includes information about searching On Demand listings by title or keyword.

Chapter 15. “Reviewing Your Bill with Bill View” on page 511

Explains how to use Bill View to display your current cable services bill on your television screen. Also explains billing reminder messages.



Chapter Content

Chapter 16. “Using Passport on Non-DVR Set-top Boxes” on page 517

Explains how to use a non-DVR set-top box as a standalone, or as a client connected to a Passport Guide DVR Server and a home video network.

“Index” on page 543 Helps you locate specific information.



Convent ions

The following table describes the conventions used in this guide.

Ent i ty Convent ion used

Remote control key names

Remote control keys in procedures in this guide appear in capital letters (except for the up, down, left, and right arrow keys).

For example:

1. With a Music Choice channel displayed, press the INFO key.

User interface text in procedures

User interface text in procedures in this guide appears with initial capital letters in an alternative font.

For example:

4. Press the up or down arrow key to highlight the Clear All option.

In this example, the text “Clear All” appears on the TV screen as part of the user interface. In procedures in this guide, such screen text appears with initial capitals in a dedicated font.


2


Getting Started with Basic Procedures

This chapter explains how to get started with basic procedures for using Passport Guide DVR, such as turning on and off the TV or the set-top box, changing channels, and controlling the volume.

This chapter also discusses the Channel Banner and Info Banner and various graphic icons used in Passport Guide DVR.

This chapter includes the following main sections:

• “Turning on the TV and set-top box” on page 32

• “Selecting a channel” on page 33

• “Adjusting or muting the audio volume” on page 38

• “Using the Channel Banner and the Info Banner” on page 40

• “Displaying and browsing QuickInfo™” on page 44

• “Passport Guide DVR icons” on page 49

Note: Unless specifically noted, it is assumed that the remote control is set to operate the set-top box (that is, the CBL key has been pressed).


Chapte r 2—Get t i ng S ta r ted w i th Bas i c P rocedu res

Turn ing on the TV and set- top box

To turn on the TV:

• Press the TV key on the remote, then the POWER key, or

• Press the power key on the TV.

If the TV does not turn on, check to make sure that its AC power cable is plugged into a working electrical outlet. Also, the remote control might need new batteries, or it might not be programmed properly for your TV model. For more information, refer to your remote control instructions. Once you have turned on the TV, you may want to press the CBL key to control the set-top box.

To turn on the set-top box:

• Press the CBL key, then the POWER key, or

• Press any of the number keys (which also selects a channel), or

• Press the power key on the set-top box itself.

If the set-top box does not turn on, check to make sure that its AC power cable is plugged into a working electrical socket. Also, the remote control might need new batteries.

Note: In some cases, it may be necessary to program the remote control before it will function correctly with the set-top box.

VCR and AUX dev ices

The VCR and AUX keys are not required to operate Passport Guide DVR. If you wish to use them, refer to your remote control or device documentation.


Chapte r 2—Get t i ng S ta r ted w i th Bas i c P rocedures

Select ing a channel

Passport Guide DVR enables you to select channels by pressing the following keys on the remote:

• Number keys: Enable you to key in specific channel numbers.

• CH key: Press CH (+) or (-) to navigate channels.

• FAV key: Displays the next favorite channel in sequence (unless you are in the Program Guide, in which case it displays a Favorites Guide, listing only your favorite channels and the channel to which you are currently tuned).

• LAST key: Displays the last channel you watched.

• SELECT key in the Program Guide: Selects the highlighted program (configuration-dependent).

• SELECT key in QuickInfo: Selects the program for which information is displayed.

Note: If you select a channel that is currently on the background tuner, the tuners will swap automatically; the background channel will jump to the foreground. See “Swapping between foreground and background tuners” on page 334 for more information.

Keying in channel numbers

If you know the number of the channel you desire, use the following procedure to display that channel.

You can key in up to four numbers (using the numerical keys) to specify a channel.

If you enter four numbers, the set-top box immediately displays the channel. If your cable system is set up for three-digit channel numbers only, then entering three digits will show the channel immediately.

When you enter the channel number, the Channel Banner uses dashes to represent the number of digits you can enter. For example, if you enter 51, the Channel Banner may show -51 or --51.

To key in a specific channel number:

On the remote, press up to four digits of the channel number you want to select (for example, 7, 13, 101, 1000).

Note: Depending on your cable system, the digits you enter (and the number of digits you enter), the set-top box may delay a few seconds before changing the channel. To avoid this delay, press SELECT immediately after you enter the channel number.



Select ing a channel up or down

Do one of the following to select a channel:

• Press the CH (+) key to select the next channel up in sequence. For example, if the current channel is channel 5, pressing CH (+) displays channel 6.

• Press the CH (-) key to select the next channel down in sequence. For example, if the current channel is channel 5, pressing CH (-) displays channel 4.

• Press and hold CH (+) key or CH (-) key to quickly scroll through the channels. (Passport Guide DVR may wait for key release before tuning to the new channel.)

Select ing a favor i te channel

Passport Guide DVR lets you specify your favorite channels. You can do this in the Quick Settings or General Settings menus. (It may be possible to access the General Settings/Favorite Channel option via the QuickMenu if the cable operator has configured Passport Guide DVR in such a way.)

You can also specify a favorite channel by simply holding down the FAV key for a few seconds. The currently-displayed channel will be added to your favorite channels list.)

Once you specify your favorite channels, you can cycle through them easily using only one remote key. The following procedure describes how to scroll through your favorite channels.

Passport Guide DVR also includes an Auto Favorites feature. When Auto Favorites is turned on, Passport Guide DVR remembers the channels you watch most and automatically adds them to the Favorites list. If you turn off Auto Favorites, Passport Guide DVR will not track or remember which channels you watch. • For information about specifying favorite channels, refer to “Making the

current channel a favorite” on page 138 and “Adding or deleting favorite channels” on page 158.

• For information about configuring the Program Guide to display only favorite channels, refer to “Selecting and sorting channels in the Time Grid” on page 60.

• For information about Auto Favorite channels, refer to “Auto Favorites” on page 160.

To select a favorite channel:

• Press the FAV key to select the next higher favorite channel.

The set-top box displays the favorite channels in ascending order. For example, assume your favorite channels are channels 7, 11, 26, and 30. If you are currently viewing channel 13, when you press the FAV key, the set-top box will select channel 26.

Note: Pressing the FAV key in the Program Guide displays a Favorites Guide, which lists only your Favorite channels, and the channel to which you are currently tuned. (Pressing the FAV key again will revert to the default numerical-order channel sort.)



Spec i fy ing sk ipped channels

Passport enables you to specify channels in which you have no interest. It will then skip those channels when you channel surf using the CH (+) or (-) keys.

You can specify the channels you wish to skip by using the General Settings menu.

You can display a skipped channel by entering the channel number directly using the number keys on the remote control, or by accessing the channel through the Program Guide.

A skipped channel is indicated by a blue check mark (3) next to the channel number in QuickInfo and in the Program Guide.

For more information about specifying skipped channels, refer to “Specifying skipped channels” on page 165.



Select ing a program in the Program Guide

You can review the Program Guide and select a currently-available program of interest. See the procedure below.

For more information, see “Using the Program Guide” on page 53.

To select a channel from the Program Guide:

1. Press the GUIDE key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Program Guide.

2. Press the arrow keys to move the highlight through the grid to select a program.

3. Press SELECT.

One of the following things happens:

— If you select a current program, Passport Guide DVR will (in most cases) display a menu that enables you to record the show, record the series (if the show is an episode in a series) view the channel, or list upcoming shows (of the same title). The option View this channel now will be highlighted by default; pressing SELECT will display the current program. In other words, you can press SELECT twice to display the current program.

— If you select a future (non-Pay-Per-View) program, Passport Guide DVR displays the Record Options menu.

— If you select a future Pay-Per-View program, Passport Guide DVR shows a display that enables you to purchase the PPV event (the PPV “barker” display). For additional information, refer to “Purchasing Pay-Per-View (PPV) Programs” on page 303.

— If you select a ShowRunner Video on Demand channel, Passport Guide DVR displays a menu with the option View this channel now highlighted by default; press SELECT again to display the current program.

— If you select a third-party solution Video on Demand channel, Passport Guide DVR shows a display that enables you to launch the VOD application (the VOD “barker” display).



L isten ing to music

If you wish to listen to music, you can simply select a Music Choice channel.

The procedure is the same as selecting a TV or PPV program. For additional information, refer to “Selecting a channel” on page 33.

When you select a Music Choice channel, a screen similar to the following is displayed:

Note: To view more information about Music Choice, press the INFO key twice when you are on a music channel.



Adjust ing or mut ing the audio vo lume

This section describes how to adjust or mute the audio volume of the set-top box.

The remote control must be programmed to control the audio volume of the set-top box. For more information, refer to the setup instructions for your remote control.

For the best audio quality, set the volume on your set-top box to near its maximum level. (To do so, press the CBL key on the remote control, then press the VOL (+) key to raise the volume.) Then press the TV key on the remote control, and adjust the volume as desired.

To adjust the audio volume:

• To increase the volume, press VOL (+).

• To decrease the volume, press VOL (-).

Passport Guide DVR displays the Volume Banner, featuring bars that indicate the volume level. (The Volume Banner disappears after a few moments.)

To mute the audio:

• To temporarily silence the audio, press the MUTE key.

• To restore the audio, press the MUTE key again. The audio returns to its previous volume level. The Mute Banner is replaced temporarily by the Volume Banner.



To balance the remote control volume key for the set-top box output:

1. On the set-top box, select a channel that you watch frequently.

2. Press the TV key, then lower the TV volume to 0.

3. Press the CBL key, then raise the set-top box volume to the maximum using the VOL+ key.

4. Press the TV key, then raise the volume so that the audio you hear is just a little louder than your ideal preference for listening.

5. Press the CBL key, then lower the set-top box volume a bit so that you are now at normal listening levels. You can now use your set-top box to control the volume.

Note: If the volume level is too low, repeat the procedure, and set the TV volume higher than before.

Note: You cannot use the set-top box to control the audio volume if the set-top box is using an HDMI connection. In this case, you can control the audio volume only by using the TV volume control.

To set up the TV to control the volume:

To set up your system so that the TV controls the audio volume, you will need to access the General Settings menu and adjust the volume output to maximum. (For information on how to do so, see “Setting the audio level” on page 229.) Once you have completed the procedure, you will need to press the TV key when you wish to adjust the volume.

Note: If you program the remote to control the TV volume, you can change the set-top box’s output volume level only by adjusting the Audio Level preference in the General Settings menu, or by pressing the VOL key on the set-top box front panel. For information about the Audio Level preference in the General Settings menu, refer to “Setting the audio level” on page 229.



Using the Channel Banner and the Info Banner

Passport Guide DVR includes a Channel Banner and an Info Banner. These components provide quick access to information about a program’s title, start time and end time.

The Channel Banner and the Info Banner each provide the following information:

• The channel logo, number, and call letters

• The program title, start time, and end time

• The current time

• Program rating information, including content advisories

• Passport Guide DVR icons where appropriate (for example, the star icon for a favorite channel)

The following table describes the elements of the Channel Banner and the Info Banner.

Note: For information on the DVR-related elements featured in the Info Banner, refer to “Info Banner and Mini Info Banner” on page 335.

Program Current Time Program Title

Channel logo Channel call letters and number

Rating Content Advisory

Favorite channel star icon

Air Time

For information about the common elements of the Channel Banner and Info Banner, refer to the table on page 41.

For additional information on the DVR information that appears in the Info Banner, refer to “Info Banner and Mini Info Banner” on page 335.



Banner E lement Descr ipt ion/Informat ion

Current Time Displays the current time if the current program is live. If the program is recorded, displays “Recorded.”

Channel Logo Displays the channel logo of the current channel if the program is live or delayed. If the program is recorded, displays the channel logo of the recording.

Channel Call Letters and Channel Number

Displays the call letters or the channel number of the current channel if the current program is live or delayed. If the program is recorded, displays a Recorded icon (instead of the channel number).

Program Title Displays the title of the current program. Titles that exceed the allotted space are truncated.

Rating Icon Displays the rating information for the current program. (For more information, see “Locking ratings” on page 260.)

Content Advisory Displays content advisory information for the current program

Content Advisory information is expressed by the following abbreviations: “S” for Sexual situations; “L” for Language; “V” for Violence; and “D” for suggestive Dialog. (For more information, see “Hiding adult titles” on page 280.

Program Air Time Displays the current program’s scheduled air time if the current program is live or delayed. If the current program is recorded, displays the recording’s duration.

Recording in Progress Icon

Displays an icon to the left of the title if a recording is in progress.

Message Alert Displays a message notification icon indicating that a message from your cable operator has been received. (For more information, see “Caller ID application” on page 183.)



Channel Banner

Passport Guide DVR displays the Channel Banner for a few seconds when you change channels (unless the Info Banner is already displayed).

The Channel Banner is shown below.

Channel Banner

To display the Channel Banner:

Change the channel (by pressing CH (+) or CH (-) or by keying in channel numbers).

Note: If the Info Banner is already displayed when you change channels, the Info Banner will continue to be displayed.

To exit the Channel Banner:

Press the EXIT key, or wait until the Channel Banner disappears automatically.



Info Banner

Passport Guide DVR displays the Info Banner when you press the INFO key on your remote.

The Info Banner appears similar to the Channel Banner, but also contains additional information about the Digital Video Recorder (DVR).

When you press a DVR function key such as FAST FORWARD or REWIND, or when you switch from delayed video to live video (or make a similar change), a smaller version of the banner, the Mini Info Banner, is displayed. (For more information on the Mini Info Banner banner, refer to “Info Banner and Mini Info Banner” on page 335.)

The following display shows an Info Banner.

Info Banner

To display the Info Banner:

Press the INFO key on the remote.

(Passport Guide DVR displays the Mini Info Banner when you press a DVR/ VCR-type of control key.)

To exit the Info Banner:

Press the EXIT key, or wait until the Info Banner disappears automatically.

Note: The time it takes for the Info Banner to disappear depends on Passport Administrator configurations at the cable operator’s head-end.



Disp lay ing and browsing QuickInfo™

You can use QuickInfo to get information about program titles, ratings, descriptions, content advisories, start times, and end times. You can also use it to watch the current program in a scaled video window (see figure below) while you browse program information about programs on other channels that are being broadcast currently or that will be broadcast in the future.

QuickInfo also enables you to set up recording for programs on other channels. For information on how to set up a recording in QuickInfo, see “Recording a future program from QuickInfo” on page 348.

The following figure shows QuickInfo.

Favorite channel star icon

Channel logo Channel call letters

Channel number

Browse other programs

Current time Program title

Program rating Program description

Start and end times

QuickInfo displays the following information:

• Channel logo, number, and call letters

• Current time

• Program title, rating, description, content advisory, start time, and end time

• Passport Guide DVR icons when appropriate (for example, the star icon for a favorite channel)

• Lock icon (if the program is subject to time, channel, content, or ratings locks)

• Check mark icon (if the program is on a skipped channel)

QuickInfo enables you to continue watching the current program while checking program information for other channels and other times. This activity is often referred to as “browsing.”



The following procedure explains how to display QuickInfo and browse program information in QuickInfo.

To display QuickInfo and browse program information:

1. Press the INFO key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Info Banner.

2. Press the INFO key again.

Passport Guide DVR displays QuickInfo.

3. To display the next page of a program’s description (if available), press the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key.

4. To browse other program titles and times, press the arrow keys to display information as described in the following table.

Key To browse program t i t les in Qu ickInfo fo r :

One channel higher than the current channel

One channel lower than the current channel

The program that preceded the program shown in QuickInfo. (For up to two hours of past programming.)

Programs that follow the program shown in QuickInfo. (For up to 24 hours of future programming.)

5. To select a channel displayed in QuickInfo, press SELECT.

6. To exit browse mode, press the C key.

QuickInfo displays the current program information.

7. To select a channel displayed in QuickInfo, press SELECT.

8. To hide QuickInfo, press the INFO key (or the EXIT key).

QuickInfo disappears.

Note: If you do not press the INFO or EXIT key to hide QuickInfo, it will automatically disappear after several seconds. To enable faster scrolling, hold down any of the arrow keys.



Cal ler ID Banner

Passport Guide DVR can include an optional Caller ID application feature that displays telephone caller identification information in a modified version of the Channel Banner when calls are received on your household’s telephone line(s).

Caller ID information includes the telephone number of the incoming call, the name associated with that telephone number, and the date and time of the call.

The line number (for example, Line 1) on which the call is received may also be displayed, if this additional feature is supported by your cable services company.

Two versions of the Caller ID Banner are illustrated below. In the screen on the left, neither the Line Number Display nor the Send to Voicemail option is supported; in the screen on the right, both are supported.

Caller ID Banner

Line Number display not supported. Line Number display Send to Voicemail option

To exit the Caller ID Banner:

Press the EXIT key, or wait until the Caller ID Banner disappears automatically.

(Alternatively, you can press the MENU, GUIDE, or C key.)

To display the Caller ID Banner again:

Press the INFO key. If the banner duration has not expired, Passport Guide DVR will again display the Caller ID Banner.

For more information about Caller ID, see “Caller ID application” on page 183.

Notes:

• If the Program Guide, Quick Settings, or General Settings menu is displayed, the Caller ID Banner will not be displayed. Instead, Passport Guide DVR will display the Caller ID dialog. See below. (For more information, see “Caller ID application” on page 183.)

• If one of the following interface elements is displayed when you receive a call, Passport Guide DVR will clear the interface and display the Caller ID Banner for the remainder of the specified Caller ID Banner duration: Channel Banner, QuickInfo, Mini Banner, Mute indicator, Volume bar, Reminder Banner, and Upcoming Recording Banner.



• While Passport Guide DVR is displaying the Caller ID Banner, all keys except for the following are disabled: MENU, GUIDE, CH+/-, number keys, LAST, FAV, VOL +/-, MUTE, EXIT, C key, and if Passport Guide DVR is configured for voicemail, the A key.

• Not all cable operators will choose to feature the Caller ID application service.

Cal ler ID appl icat ion d ia log

If Passport Guide DVR displays the Caller ID application dialog when a telephone call is received, you can also press the A key to send the call to voicemail. (For more information, see “Caller ID application” on page 183).



Voicemai l Banner

Passport Guide DVR can display a voicemail banner to inform you that a voicemail has been received on one of your household telephone lines.

The Voicemail Banner includes such information as:

• The household telephone line number that received the voicemail (for example, Line 1)

• The telephone number that received the voicemail (for example, (818) 123-1234)

• The total number of voicemails available for playback (for example, 5)

• The number of new, unplayed voicemails available for playback (for example, 3)

The Voicemail Banner is shown below.

number of new voicemails total number of available voicemails

household telephone line number

Exi t ing the Voicemai l Banner

To close the Voicemail Banner, you can press the C key, or simply wait a few seconds for the banner to disappear automatically. (The duration of display can be configured by the head-end.)

Notes: • If the Program Guide, Quick Settings, or General Settings menu is

displayed, the Voicemail Banner will not be displayed. However, if you exit the Program Guide, Quick Settings, or General Settings during the period of time in which the Voicemail Banner would have otherwise been displayed (that is, a few seconds; the exact duration is configurable by the head-end), the Voicemail Banner will be displayed for the remainder of the set display duration.

• While Passport Guide DVR is displaying the Voicemail Banner, all keys except for the following are disabled: MENU, GUIDE, CH+/-, number keys, LAST, FAV, VOL +/-, MUTE, C key.

• Not all cable operators may choose to support the Voicemail feature, even if they support Caller ID.

For more information about voicemail, see “Caller ID application” on page 183.



Passport Guide DVR icons

Passport Guide DVR features several icons. For example, you can find icons in the Program Guide or Recorded Shows screen, and elsewhere. The following table describes each icon.

Icon Meaning

A program locked by channel, rating, content advisory level, or time period when Parental Control is currently enabled

A program locked by channel, rating, content advisory level, or time period when Parental Control is currently disabled

A favorite channel

An Auto Favorite channel

A Skipped channel

A program that features stereo sound

A program that features closed caption information (subtitles for hearing-impaired viewers)

A program that features a secondary audio tracks. Subscribers can choose to hear an alternate audio track, typically in a different language.

A program that has been purchased

Recording in progress

Program is currently playing.

Program is scheduled to be recorded.

Series is scheduled to be recorded.

Recurring manual recording

Single instance manual recording



Icon Meaning

These programs will be erased first (in less than one day).

These programs will be erased after the first programs are erased (in about one to three days).

These programs will be erased last (in about three to seven days; this icon is displayed only in the program description area of the Recorded Shows screen).

Marks programs you have specified to be saved until you manually erase them.

No record icon. Passport Guide DVR displays this icon if the program is a scheduled recording, but cannot be recorded due to conflicts with other recording requests. This icon can also appear in the Program Guide and Scheduled Recordings screen to indicate a cancelled recording request.

Indicates that the program is broadcast in High Definition (HD) format.

The Reminder Timer icon is displayed in the Program Guide if you selected Remind me about this show in the timer dialog.

The Series Header or Keyword Header icon is displayed in the Program Guide, or in the Recorded Shows screen when programs are grouped by title. It functions like a “folder” that contains individual instances of a series, or individual shows that match a keyword.

The Magnifying Glass icon is displayed next to programs that are associated with keyword searches in the Recorded Shows, Scheduled Recordings, and Series Manager screens.

The Message Notification icon is displayed in the Channel Banner to indicate that a message from your cable operator has been received. (For more information, see “Caller ID application” on page 183.)

The Cropping icons indicate that a program has been manually or automatically cropped. (For more information on Cropping, see “Cropping” on page 401.)



Icon Meaning

The telephone icon appears in a Caller ID Banner that is displayed when your household receives a telephone call if your cable services company supports this feature. (For more information on the Caller ID application, see “Caller ID application” on page 183.)

The Sorted check mark icon indicates that the program listings have been sorted to display only channels included in list sort options Custom 1, Custom 2, or Custom 3. For more information, see “List Channels: Using custom groups of channel categories” on page 66 in the “Using the Program Guide” chapter.

The New! icon appears next to newly-released titles in the scrolling title list, and in the upper-left program information area (yellow background) if the currently-selected show is a new release or episode.

The Ratings icon indicates the content rating for television and movies.

For more information on ratings, see “Locking ratings” on page 260.


3


Using the Program Guide

The Program Guide shows you what is on TV and when it airs.

This chapter explains how to use the Program Guide. It includes the following main sections:

• “About the Program Guide” on page 54

• “Displaying the Program Guide” on page 55

• “Displaying information for a few days ahead” on page 56

• “Selecting a view from the Program Guide” on page 57

• “Displaying and navigating the Program Guide by time” on page 59

• “Displaying and navigating the Program Guide by theme” on page 72

• “List Channels: Creating custom channel groups in Theme view” on page 79

• “Using Channel List to display upcoming programs on specific channels” on page 83

• “Displaying the Recorded Shows screen” on page 87

• “Back to TV” on page 88

• “Searching the Program Guide by title” on page 89

• “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By title” on page 93

• “Searching the Program Guide by keyword” on page 101

• “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By keyword” on page 105

• “Keyboard Spelling Assist” on page 111

• “Creating a keyword series request” on page 115

• “Viewing additional information about a program” on page 120

• “Creating a keyword series request from a cast member’s name” on page 121

• “Selecting a program in the Program Guide” on page 124

• “Setting a reminder timer from the Program Guide” on page 126

• “Listing upcoming shows from the Program Guide” on page 129

• “Banner ads” on page 130


Chapte r 3—Us ing the P rogram Gu ide

About the Program Guide

The Program Guide offers an overview of what is playing on each channel at specific times.

You can use the Program Guide to view listings; sort listings by favorite channels, HDTV channels, or customized channel lists; select programs; schedule future recordings; search for programs by title or keyword; set timers; and purchase Pay-Per-View (PPV) programs.

For information on the recording and playback features of Passport Guide DVR, see “Using the Digital Video Recorder (DVR)” on page 331.

The following figure illustrates various elements of the Program Guide.

Information on the highlighted program

Time Grid display

Video and channel information for the program you are currently watching

Highlighted program

The Program Guide displays the Time Grid by default.

The Program Guide can include the following elements:

• A list of programs (up to seven days of programming information for each channel) that can be sorted by channel number or channel name; or filtered by program theme, or to include only Favorite channels or HD channels, or a custom channel list.

• In the upper-right section, video and channel information (channel number and call letter name) for the program and channel you are currently watching, and the current time

• In the upper-left corner, the following information for the program highlighted in the Time Grid: the channel logo, name and number; the program title, its start and end times, and a brief description including the program’s parental control and critical ratings

• A highlighted cell in the Time Grid indicating the currently-selected program

Note: Icons occasionally appear adjacent to the program title information. For an explanation of these icons, see “Passport Guide DVR icons” on page 49.



Disp lay ing the Program Guide

To display the Program Guide:

• Press the GUIDE key.

The Program Guide displays the Time Grid.

The current program is highlighted in the grid.

Exi t ing the Program Guide

To exit the Program Guide:

• Press any of the following keys on the remote control to exit the Program Guide:

— EXIT

— CH +/- (for example, to change channels)

— MENU (will exit the Program Guide and display the QuickMenu)

— SETTINGS (will exit the Program Guide and display Quick Settings, or the QuickMenu if it is installed)

— You can also press the GUIDE key to display the Find Shows pop-up menu, and then select the Back to TV option.

— You can also press the GUIDE key to display the Find Shows pop-up menu, and then press the GUIDE key again.

Note: Alternatively, the Program Guide will disappear automatically if you press no keys for a short period of time.



Disp lay ing in format ion for a few days ahead

You can display programming information in the Program Guide for up to one week ahead.

The following procedure describes how to quickly display information for a specific day (instead of scrolling through the Program Guide in half-hour increments).

To display information for one or a few days ahead:

In the Program Guide:

• Press a number key (for example, “3” for three days from the present) and then press the right arrow within two seconds.

• Press the DAY+ key to skip forward one day.

• Press the DAY- key to skip backward one day.

Note: Certain remote controls may not feature DAY+/- keys. You can also press the FAST FORWARD key or the PLAY key to skip forward one day, or the REWIND key or the STOP key to skip back one day.

• If you want to see what programs are available a few days ahead on a specific channel, you can display the Channel List view. To display this view, press the GUIDE key again to display the Find Shows pop-up menu, and select Channel List.

You can also use the Go to Date feature. To do so, press the A key to display the Options menu. Press the down arrow to highlight the Go to Date option, then press SELECT or the right arrow to move the highlight to the right pane. Then highlight and select the desired date.

Note: If the information is not in memory, Passport Guide DVR may display the message “Loading new data, please wait.”

To redisplay the information for the current day, you can do one of the following:

• Press the A key to display the Options menu. Press the down arrow to highlight the Go to Date option, then press the right arrow to move the highlight to the right pane. Then highlight and select the Now option.

• Press the number key you pressed previously (for example, 3), then press the left arrow within two seconds.

• Press the GUIDE key, then select Back to TV from the Find Shows pop-up menu to exit the Program Guide. Then press the GUIDE key again to re-display the Program Guide, if you wish.

• Repeatedly press the left arrow until the current information is again displayed (half-hour increment with each press).



Select ing a v iew from the Program Guide

When the Program Guide is displayed, you can use the Find Shows pop-up menu to select from several Program Guide views (or a list of recorded shows), each of which displays, or enables you to search, the program content in the Program Guide in a different way.

Program Guide views include:

• Themes

• Channel List

• Time Grid

• Title Search

• Keyword Search

• Recorded Shows

Each of these methods is discussed in the following sections.

Find Shows pop-up menu



Views access ib le f rom the F ind Shows pop-up menu

Time Grid Themes

Recorded Shows Channel List

Title Search Keyword Search



Disp lay ing and nav igat ing the Program Guide by t ime

When you first display the Program Guide, the information is arranged in a Time Grid.

To display and navigate the Program Guide by time:


Passport Guide DVR displays the Time Grid.

(If you are already using the Program Guide but displaying the Theme, Channel List or Search views, press the GUIDE key again to display the Find Shows pop-up menu. The Time Grid menu option will be highlighted by default. Then press SELECT to display the Time Grid.)

2. Press the up or down arrow to browse programs, or key in a channel number directly by pressing number keys on the remote.

— For future programs, press the right arrow. You can view listings for up to seven days of future programming.

— For past programs, press the left arrow. You can view listings for up to two hours of past programming.

3. To exit from the Program Guide, you can do one of the following:

— Press the EXIT key

— Press the GUIDE key to display the Find Shows pop-up menu, then press the GUIDE key again

— Press the GUIDE key to display the Find Shows pop-up menu, then highlight Back to TV and press SELECT

— Simply wait for Passport Guide DVR to close the Program Guide automatically



Select ing and sort ing channels in the T ime Gr id

When the Program Guide displays the Time Grid, you can use the Sort Options menu to select a group of channel categories that you want to list in the guide.

You can also sort the listings numerically (by channel number) or alphabetically (by channel name or call letters).

This section explains how to display the following information in the Program Guide Time Grid using the Sort Options menu.

• List Channels List only subsets or categories of channels

• Sort Channels Sort numerically by channel number, or alphabetically by name (call letters)

• Go To Date Jump directly to display specific days (for example, Wed., 3/25) or time periods (Prime Time)



Time Gr id : L is t channels

This section explains how to list only a subset of channels, or a specific category of channels, in the Time Grid.

To list a subset or category of channels in the Time Grid:

1. Press the A key (Sort).

Passport Guide DVR displays the Sort Options menu.

2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight List Channels, then press SELECT or the right arrow.

Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right column and displays several options:



— Favorites lists your favorite channels. (For more information on specifying favorite channels, see “Adding or deleting favorite channels” on page 158.)

— HD lists high-definition (HDTV) channels.

— All lists all available channels.

— Custom 1, Custom 2, and Custom 3 display customized groups of channel types. For example, you might like to occasionally list Music channels and PPV channels in the Program Guide. The Custom function lets you create a group (for example, Custom 1) that will list only those categories or types of channels. You can also configure a Custom sort option to display every time you open the Program Guide, or only until you close the Program Guide (at which point it resets to the default All channels).(For more information on how you can create Custom channel lists, see “List Channels: Creating custom channel groups in Theme view” on page 79.)

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight an option, then press SELECT

Note: If you wish to cancel your selection, press the C key. Passport Guide DVR will close the Sort Options menu.

Once you select an option, the Time Grid will display only listings in that category (for example, All, HD, Favorites, or Custom 1, 2 or 3).

In the screen example below, the viewer chose to list her Favorites. (These particular Favorite channels happen to include PBS, The Animal Channel, the Food Channel, etc.).

Note: A check mark icon will appear next to the “A” sort icon to indicate that the Program Guide is currently displayed in a Custom sort (and consequently not all channels may be listed). This check mark will be displayed for Custom 1, 2 or 3, as well as sorts for HD or Favorites.



List Channels: Setting up custom lists of channel categories

In the Time Grid, the Sort Options menu enables you to create a customized group of channel categories to be listed in the Program Guide.

Note: The Sort Options feature can be configured by the cable operator. Depending on the configuration, certain parts of this functionality may be unavailable.

To specify a custom sort option:

1. With the Time Grid displayed, press the A key (Sort).



The highlight moves right. Passport Guide DVR displays several options, including Custom 1, Custom 2 and Custom 3.

You can create a list of your preferred categories of programs (for example, Music channels, PPV channels) for each of these three custom slots.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight your choice of Custom 1, Custom 2 or Custom 3.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow.

Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right and displays the options Use Always, Use Now and Set up. (As an example, this procedure will describe how to select categories for Custom 1.)

5. Press the down arrow to highlight Set up..., then press SELECT.



Passport Guide DVR displays an Options menu, which enables you to display or hide groups of channels (such as Favorite channels or Music channels).

6. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the desired option (Display or Hide), then press the right arrow.

Passport Guide DVR moves to the right column to enable you to select channel categories that you want to display (or hide).

7. Press the up or down arrow to highlight an option (for example, List Favorite Channels), then press SELECT.

You can highlight and select additional options in most cases (for example, List Favorite Channels and List Music Channels). To do so, press the up or down arrow to highlight the desired option, then press SELECT again. A dot will appear to the left of each option you select to indicate whether it is included (or excluded) from the Custom Channel List.

Refer to the table on page 65 for an explanation of each setting.

8. Do one of the following:

— A key/Accept: Press the A key to accept the options settings and save your custom channel list. (Note: The setting will reset to All the next time you close and re-open the Program Guide.)

— B key/Reset to Defaults: Press the B key to reset to the default setting (List All Channels).

— C key/Cancel: Press the C key to cancel your changes to the settings and return to the Program Guide.

Note: Repeat this procedure to define Custom 2 and Custom 3 channel groups, if you wish.

Note: Custom sort options can be configured by the cable operator. Not all options listed below may be available to all viewers.

Note: You can access your custom sorts any time after you open the Program Guide.



Custom Sort Opt ions

Display List All Channels Displays all available channels in the Program Guide.

List Favorite Channels Displays favorite channels in the customized Program Guide line up.

List Music Channels Displays Music channels in the customized Program Guide line up.

List On Demand Channels Displays On Demand channels in the customized Program Guide line up.

List Pay-Per-View Channels Displays Pay-Per-View channels in the customized Program Guide line up.

List HDTV Channels Displays high-definition channels in the customized Program Guide line up.

Hide Hide Skipped Channels Excludes skipped channels from the customized Program Guide line up.

Hide Locked Channels Excludes locked channels from the customized Program Guide line up.

Hide Music Channels Excludes Music channels from the customized Program Guide line up.

Hide On Demand Channels Excludes On Demand channels from the customized Program Guide line up.

Hide Pay-Per-View Channels Excludes Pay-Per-View channels from the customized Program Guide line up.

Hide HDTV Channels Excludes high-definition channels from the customized Program Guide line up.



List Channels: Using custom groups of channel categories

In the Time Grid, the Custom Sort Options menu enables you to create a custom group of channels that you can then display in the Program Guide.

You might be interested in music channels, for example, and wish to create a custom sort comprised of only music channels to help you find musical programs more quickly.

This section explains how to use and display customized channel groups.

Once you set up a custom group of channels, you can choose to display only that custom group in the Program Guide--but only to the extent described below:

• If you selected Use Always, your custom group will continue to be displayed whenever you access the Program Guide, even if you exit the Program Guide and return, or if you change the Program Guide view (for example, change from the Time Grid to Theme view). The custom group will persist until you change the setting to Use Now (and then exit the Program Guide or change the view).

• If you selected Use Now, the custom group will be cancelled when you exit the Program Guide or when you change the Program Guide view. The next time you open the Program Guide, the default setting of All will be in effect.

The ability to display your Custom channel group every time you open the Program Guide (by using the Use Always setting) is available only for sorts Custom 1, Custom 2, and Custom 3. It is not available for the Favorites or HD sort option.

To display your Custom 1, Custom 2, or Custom 3 channel group in the Program Guide:




The highlight moves right, to the middle column. Passport Guide DVR displays several options, including Custom 1, Custom 2 and Custom 3.



3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Custom Channel List you wish to use: Custom 1, Custom 2, or Custom 3.


Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right and displays the options Use Always, Use Now, and Set up. (As an example, this procedure will describe how to activate the Custom 1 channel group.)


— To display your custom group of channels until you change the program Guide view or exit the Program Guide, press the up or down arrow to highlight Use Now, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR will display the selected Custom group of channels until you change the Program Guide view or exit the Program Guide. (The next time you open the Program Guide, it will revert to the default All channels setting.)

— To display your custom group of channels until you change the Sort option setting to Use Now, press the up or down arrow to highlight Use Always, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR will display the selected Custom group of channels each time you open the Program Guide until you change the Sort option setting.

Note: A check mark icon will appear next to the “A” sort icon to indicate that the Program Guide is currently displayed in a Custom sort (and so not all channels may be listed). This check mark will be displayed for Custom 1, 2 or 3, as well as for List Channels/HD or List Channels/Favorites.



Sort channels

This section explains how to sort channel listings in the Time Grid numerically by channel number, or alphabetically by channel name (call letters).

To sort channel listings by channel number or name in the Time Grid:



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Sort Channels.


Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right and displays two Sort Channels options:

— 1,2,3 sorts the channel numbers in numerical order (for example, 02, 03, 04, etc.)

— A,B,C sorts the channel names (call letters) in alphabetical order (for example, KCBS, KCET, etc.)

Note: 1,2,3 is the default setting. Passport Guide DVR will reset to this option when you close and re-open the Program Guide, unless the cable operator chooses to configure its IPG server with “sticky settings.”



4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight an option (1,2, 3 or A,B,C) then press SELECT.

The Time Grid now displays the listings by channel in numerical order, or by channel name in alphabetical order.

5. To cancel your selection, press the C key.

Passport Guide DVR closes the Sort Options menu.



Go to date

This section explains how to jump directly to program listings for specific days (for example, Wed., 3/25) or time periods (Prime Time).

To jump directly to listings for a specific day or time period:



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Go To Date.


Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right and displays several Go To Date options:

— NowJumps to listings for currently airing programs.

— Prime TimeJumps to listings for 8:00pm today.

— Thu 4/10 Jumps to the listings for the specified day (seven days available) at the same time period as the currently-highlighted program).

Note: This setting will reset to Now whenever you close and re-open the Program Guide.



4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight an option, then press SELECT.

The Time Grid displays the listings for the specified date or time.

5. To cancel your selection, press the C key.

Passport Guide DVR closes the Sort Options menu.



Disp lay ing and nav igat ing the Program Guide by theme

You can display the Program Guide with listings arranged by program themes.

The left column of the Themes view shows various theme categories, subcategories, and icons.

The themes include Movies, Sports, Lifestyle, News, Family, Series and more.

To display and navigate the Program Guide by theme:

1. Press the GUIDE key to display the Program Guide.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Time Grid view.

2. Press the GUIDE key again.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Find Shows pop-up menu.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Themes menu option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Theme view.

Theme categories are listed in the left pane; programs are listed in the right pane.

For more information on available theme categories and subcategories, see “List of themes” on page 75.

Note: If you do not subscribe to an optional Video-on-Demand service, VOD items will not be displayed in program lists such as this.



4. Press the up or down arrow to scroll through and the list of themes and highlight the desired Theme category. Then press SELECT or the right arrow to expand the Theme category.

Passport Guide DVR displays the associated Theme subcategories. For example, for the Movies theme category, the subcategories would include: All Movies, Star Rankings, Pay-Per-View, etc.

5. Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the theme subcategories.

As each theme subcategory is highlighted, the Program Guide lists associated program titles for the subcategory in the Program pane to the right.

6. To scroll through the list of programs, press the right arrow to move the highlight into the list of programs, then press the up or down arrow.

Currently-airing programs are marked by a “NOW” indicator.

The “DVR” indicator means a program that matches the Theme has already been recorded and is available for viewing.

Note: For faster scrolling, press the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN keys.



7. If you want to view a program, you can highlight the program listing, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Options menu. The menu options vary depending on whether the program is airing currently or in the future, or of it is part of a series.

Options can include:

— Record this show

— Record entire series (if an episode in a series)

— View this channel now

— Remind me about this show (if a future show)

— List upcoming shows

8. If you want to purchase a PPV program, you can highlight the program listing, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the purchasing options menu. For more information on how to purchase PPV programs, see “Purchasing Pay-Per-View (PPV) Programs” on page 303.



L is t o f themes

The following table lists all available themes. The information that will be displayed by Passport Guide DVR depends on the availability of relevant metadata from companies that provide Program Guide data.

Prog ra m Gu ide Th em es

News

All News Saved (Recorded) Shows News Magazine Series Weather Interviews Public Affairs

Family

All Family Saved (Recorded) Shows Family Cartoons Children’s Family Movies Family Series

Other

Saved (Recorded) Shows Product Info Shopping Classroom

Enhanced Subtitled Letterbox HDTV SAP Captions Stereo

Ratings

Rated TV-Y Rated G Rated TV-G Rated PG Rated TV-PG Rated PG-13 Rated TV-14 Rated R Rated TV-MA Rated MC-17 Not Rated

Lifestyle

All Lifestyle Saved (Recorded) Shows Instructional

Series/Spec

All Series/Spec Saved (Recorded) Shows Premiere Adult Adventure Cartoon Children’s Comedy Cmdy-Drama Crime Drama Documentary Drama Educational Entertainment Fantasy Game Show Horror Mini Series Music Mystery Reality Religious Sci/Nature Sci-Fi Seasonal Sitcom Soap Opera Suspense Talk Show Technology Variety Western Other Series

Movies

All Movies Saved (Recorded) Shows Star Rankings New Release Pay-Per-View Action-Adv. Adult Biography Comedy Cmdy-Drama Crime Drama Documentary Drama Fantasy Horror Musical Mystery Romance Sci-Fi Suspense Western In French In Spanish Other Movies

Sports

All Sports Saved (Recorded) Shows Live Sports Baseball Basketball Boxing Equestrian Football Golf Hockey Olympics Outdoors Racing Soccer Tennis Water Sports Winter Sports Wrestling Other Sports Sports Misc.



Select ing channels and sort ing programs in Theme v iew

When the Program Guide is displayed in Theme view, you can use the Sort Options menu to select a subset or category of channels that will air programs that match a desired Theme.

Only programs that are included in the selected channel group--and that also that match the selected Theme or Theme subcategory--will be listed in the Program Guide Theme view.

You can also sort the program listings by airtime, or alphabetically by program title.

This section explains how to display the following information in the Program Guide Theme view using the Sort Options menu.

• List Channels: Lists only channels that belong to certain categories (Favorites, HD, Custom Channel Lists, etc.).

• Sort Programs: Sort program listings by airtime (Airtime) or alphabetically by program title (Title).



Theme v iew: L is t channels

This section explains how to list only programs that match a desired Theme or Theme subcategory and that will air on a subset of channels, such as your Favorite channels, HD channels, or a custom channel list.

To list programs that match a selected Theme and that air only on Favorite channels, HD channels, or in a specific Custom channel list:

1. Press the A key (Sort) at any time while in Theme view.

Passport Guide DVR displays an Options pop-up menu, which includes the following options:

— List Channels

— Sort Programs

2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight List Channels.


Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right and displays several options, as defined on the next page:



— Favorites lists all of the programs in the Theme category or Theme subcategory that you highlighted that will air on your specified Favorite channels. (For information on specifying Favorite channels, see “Adding or deleting favorite channels” on page 158.)

— HD lists all of the programs in the Theme or Theme subcategory that you highlighted that will air on high-definition (HDTV) channels.

— All lists all of the programs in the Theme or Theme subcategory that you highlighted that will air on any channel.

— Custom 1, Custom 2, and Custom 3 list all of the programs in the Theme or Theme subcategory that you highlighted that will air on a channel in the selected Custom group of channels.

4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight an option (Favorites, HD, All), then press SELECT.

The Theme view will display only those listings that match the selected Theme or Theme subcategory and the selected channel option (Favorite, HD, or All channels).

5. If you would like to display listings for Theme matches that will air on channels that belong to a specific Custom group, press the up or down arrow to highlight Custom 1, Custom 2, or Custom 3, then press SELECT.

The Theme view will display only those listings that match the selected Theme or Theme subcategory and the selected Custom channel list.



List Channels: Creating custom channel groups in Theme view

The Sort Options menu enables you to create a custom group or set of channel categories to be listed in the Theme view of the Program Guide.

Note: The Sort Options feature can be configured by the cable operator. Depending on the configuration, certain parts of this functionality may be unavailable.

To specify a Custom channel list in Theme view:

1. With Theme view displayed, press the A key (Sort).

Passport Guide DVR displays a Sort Options menu, which includes the following options:

— List Channels

— Sort Programs


The highlight moves right, to the middle column. Passport Guide DVR displays several options, including Custom 1, Custom 2 and Custom 3.

You can create a list of your preferred categories of programs (for example, Music channels, PPV channels) and save them in each of these three Custom slots.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight your choice of Custom 1, Custom 2 or Custom 3.




Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right and displays the options Use Now, Use Always, and Set up. (This procedure explains how to select categories for Custom 1.)

5. Press the down arrow to highlight Set up, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays an Options menu, which enables you to display or hide groups of channels (such as Favorite channels or Music channels).

6. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Display (or Hide), then press SELECT or the right arrow.

Passport Guide DVR moves to the right column to enable you to selectchannel categories that you want to display (or hide).

7. Press the up or down arrow to highlight an option (for example, List Favorite Channels) and then press SELECT.

You can highlight and select additional options in most cases (for example, List Favorite Channels and List Music Channels, etc.). To do so, press the up or down arrow to highlight the desired option, then press SELECT again. A dot appears to the left of each option you select.

Refer to the table on page 65 for an explanation of each setting.


— A key/Accept Press the A key to accept the options settings and save your custom channel list. (Note: The setting will reset to All the next time you close and re-open the Program Guide.)

— B key/Reset to Defaults Press the B key to reset to the default setting (List All Channels).



— C key/Cancel Press the C key to cancel your changes to the settings and return to the Program Guide.

Note: You can repeat this procedure to define Custom 2 and Custom 3 channel groups, if you desire.

To access your Custom sorts:

You can easily access your custom sorts any time you open the Program Guide. To do so:

1. With Theme view displayed, press the A key (Sort).

Passport Guide DVR displays an Options menu.


Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the middle column.

3. Press the down arrow to highlight a custom sort (Custom 1, Custom 2, or Custom 3), then press SELECT or the right arrow.

Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right column.

4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Use Now.

Passport Guide DVR activates the custom sort you selected and returns to the Theme view.

For a more details, see “List Channels: Using custom groups of channel categories” on page 66.



Sort ing programs in Theme v iew

You can sort program listings in the Theme view alphabetically by program title or by airtime.

To sort programs in Theme view alphabetically by title or by airtime:

1. Press the A key at any time while in Theme view to display the Sort Options menu.

The Sort Options menu includes the following options:

— List Channels

— Sort Programs

2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Sort Programs.


Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right column and displays two options:

— Airtime

— Title

4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Airtime or Title.

— Airtime: Sorts the program listings in numerical order by airtime.

— Title: Sorts the program listings in alphabetical order by program title.

Passport Guide DVR closes the Options panel and displays the Theme view.

5. If you wish to cancel your selection, press the C key.

Passport Guide DVR closes the Options panel and displays the Theme view.



Using Channel L is t to d isp lay upcoming programs on spec i f i c channels

In addition to the Time Grid and Theme views, the Program Guide enables you to display program information in a Channel List view that lets you to see and scroll through a list of upcoming programs that will air on a specific channel and a specific day.

In Channel List view, you can view a list of the titles of upcoming programs on a specific channel as well as their start times. You can view this information for programs that have already been recorded by the DVR, or for programs scheduled to air on a specific day of the week (for example, Tuesday).

Note: The first day of the week in the list will vary depending on the current day of the week. For example, if you display this list on a Thursday, the first day of the week listed will be Saturday.

Day option Programs listed

Saved Shows All recorded programs that aired on the specified channel.

Today All programs that air today on the specified channel.

Tomorrow All programs that air tomorrow on the specified channel.

Saturday All programs that air Saturday on the specified channel.

Sunday All programs that air Sunday on the specified channel.

Monday All programs that air Monday on the specified channel.

Tuesday All programs that air Tuesday on the specified channel.

Wednesday All programs that air Wednesday on the specified channel.

Thursday All programs that air Thursday on the specified channel.

Friday All programs that air Friday on the specified channel.



To use the Channel List view to display upcoming programs that will air on a specific channel:


Passport Guide DVR displays the Time Grid.



3. Press the up or down arrows to highlight the Channel List option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Channel List view.



4. Press the up or down arrows to highlight the desired channel (for example, FOOD 73).

Passport Guide DVR displays the titles and start times of programs airing today on the selected channel.

5. To view a list of programs that will air on other days of the upcoming week, press SELECT or the right arrow.

Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the Day column and displays the following options:

— Saved Shows

— Today

— Tomorrow

— Saturday

— Sunday

— Monday

— Tuesday

— Wednesday

— Thursday

— Friday

Note: The first day of the week in the list will vary depending on the current day of the week. For example, if you display this list on a Thursday, the first day of the week listed will be Saturday.

6. Press the up or down arrows to highlight an option (for example, Today), then press SELECT or the right arrow.



Passport Guide DVR displays the titles and start times of programs airing on the specified channel on the specified day.

Note that you can also select the Saved Shows option in the Day column. Passport Guide DVR will display all shows recorded and currently available on the DVR that aired on the specified channel.

If there are currently no Saved Shows available that aired on the specified channel, Passport Guide DVR will display “No entries found” in the Programs list.

7. To scroll the list of displayed program titles, press the right arrow to move the highlight into the Programs column. Then press the up or down arrows to scroll the list.

— If you want to record a program or set up a reminder to view the program, press SELECT to display the Recording Options menu.

— For more information on recording a program, see “Recording a program” on page 342.

— For more information on setting up a reminder to view the program, see “Setting a reminder timer from the Program Guide” on page 126.



Display ing the Recorded Shows screen

From the Program Guide, you can easily access the Recorded Shows screen to view a list of programs recorded on the hard disk that are available for viewing.

To access Recorded Shows from the Program Guide:



2. Press the up or down arrows to highlight Recorded Shows, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Recorded Shows screen.

For more information on viewing recorded shows, see “Using the Recorded Shows screen” on page 366.



Back to TV

You can return directly from the Program Guide to live TV viewing directly at any time.

To return from the Program Guide to live TV viewing:



2. Do one of the following to exit the Program Guide:

— Press the GUIDE key again.

— Press the up or down arrows to highlight Back to TV, then press SELECT.

— Press the EXIT key.

Passport Guide DVR displays live TV.



Search ing the Program Guide by t i t le

You can search the Program Guide by title.

You can search seven days of Program Guide information for a program title you enter.

Note: You may be able to use the Hide Adult Titles feature to omit adult-oriented titles from appearing in search results. For more information, see “Hiding adult titles” on page 280.

Note: Your cable operator can configure Passport Guide DVR to include an optional Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search feature that enables you to search All listings, TV listings only, or On Demand listings only. For more information, see “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By title” on page 93.

You can also search the Program Guide by keyword. For more information, see “Searching the Program Guide by keyword” on page 101.

To search the Program Guide by title:

1. Press the GUIDE key to display the Program Guide Time Grid.



3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Title Search option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a virtual keyboard and enters Title Search mode.

Note: You can confirm that Passport Guide DVR is in Title Search mode by making sure the text “Search by Title” is displayed in the upper-left corner and a magnifying glass and the text “Title Search” are displayed above the virtual keyboard.



4. Press the arrow keys to highlight the first letter of the program title you seek, then press SELECT.

The letter you selected appears on the Title line, next to the magnifying glass.

Only letters that are viable options for the second letter in the desired title remain selectable. The other letters fade to grey.

5. Press the arrow keys to highlight the second letter of the program title, and then press SELECT.

The second letter appears on the Title line.

Passport Guide DVR filters the list to exclude titles that do not meet the search criteria. You may need to enter only a few letters to locate the desired title.



6. Repeat for the subsequent letters until the desired program title is displayed in the right window.

— To clear all letters from the Title line or to start a new search, press the arrow keys to highlight NEW and then press SELECT.

— To back up one space and erase a letter, press the arrow keys to highlight the BACK option and then press SELECT.

7. To access the list of displayed programs, press the right arrow key repeatedly to move the highlight to the right window (program list).

(Alternatively, you could press the FAST FORWARD key to move the highlight to the right window, and the REWIND key to move the highlight back to the keyboard.)

Passport Guide DVR highlights the first program in the list.

8. To scroll through the list, press the up or down arrow keys. (You can also use the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN keys to turn pages of listings.)

Notes:

— Programs that are currently playing are marked by a “NOW” indicator.

— If there are several instances of a program (suggesting a series), the Series Header icon is displayed to the left of the item. To display all the individual instances of the program (expand the list), highlight the Series Header item and press the SELECT or the right arrow key. To hide (or collapse) the list, press the left arrow key or highlight the Series Header item and again press SELECT.

— To return to the virtual keyboard, press the left arrow key.

9. When you have highlighted the desired program in the program list, press SELECT.

— If you selected a future program, Passport Guide DVR displays some menu options, including: • Record this show • Record entire series (displayed only if show is an episode in a series) • Remind me about this show • View this channel now • List upcoming shows (or episodes)



— If you selected a current program, Passport Guide DVR displays a similar menu (without the reminder option) and with the View this channel now option highlighted. You can press SELECT again to display the current program.

• For information about recording the show (Record this show), see “Recording a program” on page 342.

• For information about recording an entire series (Record entire series), see “Recording a series” on page 353.

• For information about setting up a Reminder Timer (Remind me about this show), see “Setting a reminder timer” on page 204.

• To display the channel that will eventually air the program, select View this channel now.

• For information about listing upcoming episodes (List upcoming episodes), see “Listing upcoming shows from the Program Guide” on page 129.

• To cancel and close the future show options menu, press C.

— If you selected a Pay-Per-View program, Passport Guide DVR displays the PPV graphic. For more information, see “Purchasing Pay-Per-View (PPV) Programs” on page 303.



Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By t i t le

Your cable operator can configure Passport Guide DVR to include the Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search feature.

The Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search feature enables you to search for titles in All listings, TV listings only, or On Demand listings only (assuming you subscribe to the optional ShowRunner VOD service feature).


Note: Your cable operator might not make this feature available. In that case, you can still use the local Search by Title function. For more information, see “Searching the Program Guide by title” on page 89.

Passport Guide DVR will search through seven days of Program Guide information, and the local ShowRunner VOD catalog, in the target listing category you specify, for the program title you enter.

Note: In order for Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search to function, ShowRunner must be the VOD product.

You can also search the Program Guide by keyword. For more information about local keyword search, see “Searching the Program Guide by keyword” on page 101. For more information about Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search by Keyword, see “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By keyword” on page 105.

To run a Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search by title:


Passport Guide DVR displays the Program Guide Time Grid.



3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Title Search option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a virtual keyboard and enters Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search by Title mode.



Note: You can confirm that you are in Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search (PGIS) by Title mode by checking the following:

— If the filter column is displayed (including All, TV Listings, or On Demand filtering options), it indicates that you are in Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search mode.

— If the word “TITLE” is displayed at the top of the filter column, and a magnifying glass and the text “Search” are displayed above the virtual keyboard, it indicates that you are in Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search by Title mode (as opposed to Search by Keyword mode).

4. Press the arrow keys to highlight the first letter of the program title you seek, then press SELECT.

The letter you selected appears on the TITLE line.

Only letters that are viable options for the second letter in the desired title remain selectable. The other letters fade to grey.

5. Press the arrow keys to highlight the second letter of the program title, and then press SELECT.

The second letter appears on the TITLE line.

Passport Guide DVR filters the list to exclude titles that do not meet the search criteria. You may need to enter only a few letters to locate your desired title.

6. Repeat for the subsequent letters until the desired program title is displayed in the right window.



Note: To clear all letters from the TITLE line or to start a new search, press the arrow keys to highlight NEW, and then press SELECT. To back up one space and erase a letter, press the arrow keys to highlight the BACK option, and then press SELECT.

7. To choose a search category, press the right arrow key repeatedly to move the highlight to the second column. Then press the up or down arrow to highlight the category of listings that you wish to search: All, TV Listings, or On Demand. Then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the heading of the selected category vertically next to the virtual keyboard (for example, All, TV Listings, or On Demand).

Note: To skip over the search category column (column 2) and access the program listings directly, press the FAST FORWARD key. You can then press the REWIND key to skip back to the keyboard.

Only programs that match the criteria (selected letters) and that are in the selected listing category remain in the program list. (In other words, if you select either the TV Listings or On Demand categories, Passport Guide DVR will display only matching programs in those categories.)

8. To access the list of displayed programs, press the right arrow key to move the highlight to the right pane (that is, the program list).

(Alternatively, you could press the FAST FORWARD key to move the highlight to the right pane, and the REWIND key to move the highlight back to the keyboard.)

Passport Guide DVR highlights a program in the list.

9. To scroll through the list, press the up or down arrow keys. (You can also use the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN keys to turn pages of listings.)



Note: If there are several instances of a program (for example, a series), the Series Header icon is displayed to the left of the item. To display all the individual instances of the program (expand the list), highlight the Series Header item and press the SELECT or the right arrow key. To hide (or collapse) the list, press the left arrow key or highlight the Series Header item and again press SELECT.

Note: Programs that are currently playing are marked by a “NOW” indicator.

Note: To return to the category list or the virtual keyboard, press the left arrow.

10.When you have highlighted the desired program in the program list, press SELECT.

— If you selected a future program from the TV listings, Passport Guide DVR displays some menu options, including:

• Record this show

• Record entire series (displayed only if the show is an episode in a series)

• Remind me about this show

• View this channel now

• List upcoming shows (or episodes)



— If you selected a current program from the TV listings, Passport Guide DVR displays a similar menu (without the reminder option) and with the View this channel now option highlighted. You can press SELECT again to display the current program.

— If you selected an On Demand program, Passport Guide DVR displays one of the following screens, depending on whether you are currently subscribed to the relevant On Demand service:

• If you are not currently subscribed to the On Demand service that is offering the program you selected, Passport Guide DVR may display a screen like the following “please subscribe” barker screen. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe.

• If you are currently subscribed to the On Demand provider that is offering the program you selected, Passport Guide DVR displays a cover screen for the program.

Press SELECT to view the On Demand program.

On the On Demand program cover screen, you can also press the Info or C key.

• Press the C key to view additional On Demand program listings.

• Press the INFO key to display additional information about the selected On Demand program.



Once the Title Search has helped you to find a particular program, you may wish to take one of the following actions to record or view the show.

— For information about recording the show (Record this show), see “Recording a program” on page 342.

— For information about recording an entire series (Record entire series), see “Recording a series” on page 353.

— For information about setting up a Reminder Timer (Remind me about this show), see “Setting a reminder timer” on page 204.

— To display the channel that will eventually air the program, select View this channel now.

— To cancel and close the future show Options menu, press C.




Sort ing t i t le search resu l ts

You can filter program listings in the Title Search results by using the Title Search Sort Options menu. The List Channels option enables you to list only search results that will air on specific groups of channels (for example, Favorite channels, HD channels, or Custom groups).

For information on how to run a title search, see “Searching the Program Guide by title” on page 89 and “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By title” on page 93.

To sort Title Search results:

1. After you complete a search for a program, you can press the A key to display the Title Search Sort Options menu.

Note: An example of a title search results screen appears on page 91.

The Title Search Sort Options menu includes the List Channels option, which is highlighted by default.


Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right and displays several options, as defined below:

— Favorites

Note: The Favorites option is not included when you are sorting title search results from a Passport Guide Integrated Title Search. (See menu on the right, above.) However, the Favorites option is included when you are sorting title search results from a standard Title Search. (See menu on the left, above.)

— HD

— All

— Custom 1

— Custom 2

— Custom 3



— Favorites lists all the programs in the Title Search results that will air on your specified Favorite channels. (For more information on specifying Favorite channels, see “Adding or deleting favorite channels” on page 158.)

— HD lists all the programs in the Title Search results that will air on high-definition (HDTV) channels.

— All lists all the programs in the in the Title Search results that will air on any channel.

— Custom 1, Custom 2 and Custom 3 lists all the programs in the Title Search results that will air on a channel in the specified Custom group of channels.


The Title Search results window will display only those listings that match the selected option (Favorite channels, HD channels, or custom channel list).

4. If you would like to display only those Title Search results that air on channels that belong to a specific Custom group, press the up or down arrow to highlight Custom 1, Custom 2, or Custom 3, then press SELECT.

For information on how to set up and use custom channel lists, see:

— “List Channels: Setting up custom lists of channel categories” on page 63.

— “List Channels: Using custom groups of channel categories” on page 66.



Search ing the Program Guide by keyword

You can search the Program Guide by keyword.

Keywords can refer to subject matter or names of actors or directors.

You can search seven days of Program Guide information for program titles and descriptions that include the keyword you enter.


Note: Your cable operator can configure Passport Guide DVR to include an optional Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search feature that enables you to search All listings, TV listings only, or On Demand listings only. For more information, see “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By keyword” on page 105.

You can also search the Program Guide by title. For more information, see “Displaying the Recorded Shows screen” on page 87.

To search the Program Guide by keyword:


Passport Guide DVR displays the Program Guide Time Grid.



3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Keyword Search option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR enters Keyword Search mode.

Note: You can confirm that Passport Guide DVR is in Keyword Search mode by making sure “Search by Keyword” is displayed in the upper-left corner and a magnifying glass and “Keyword Search” are displayed above the virtual keyboard.



4. Press the arrow keys to highlight the first letter of your keyword, then press SELECT.

The letter you selected appears on the Keyword line.

— If there are 200 or fewer matches for your keyword, Passport Guide DVR displays them in a list.

— If there are more than 200 matches, Passport Guide DVR displays the following message in the Keyword line: too many matches followed by Please narrow your search by entering more letters in the Program window.

5. Press the arrow keys to highlight the second letter of the keyword (if necessary), then press SELECT.

The second letter appears on the Keyword line.

Each time you enter an additional letter, Passport Guide DVR filters the list further.

6. Repeat for the subsequent letters until the there are fewer than 200 matches.

— Passport Guide DVR displays the matching program titles in the right pane.



— To clear all letters from the Keyword line or to start a new search, press the arrow keys to highlight NEW and then press SELECT.

— To back up one space, press the arrow keys to highlight the BACK option and then press SELECT.

7. To scroll through the list of displayed programs and names, press the right arrow key repeatedly to move the highlight to the right pane.

Passport Guide DVR highlights the first item in the list.

8. To scroll through the list, press the up or down arrow keys. (You can also use the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key to page up or down.)

Note: If there are several instances of a matching name or subject, the Keyword Header icon is displayed to the left of the item. To display all the individual instances of the name or subject (expand the list), highlight the item and press the SELECT or the right arrow key. To hide (or collapse) the list, press the left arrow key.

Note: To return to the keyword search, press the left arrow.

9. When you have highlighted the desired program in the program list, press SELECT.



— If you selected a future program, Passport Guide DVR displays some menu options, including:


• Record entire series

Note: This option is displayed only if the show is an episode in a series.









— If you selected a Pay-Per-View program, Passport Guide DVR displays a PPV graphic. For more information, see “Purchasing Pay-Per-View (PPV) Programs” on page 303.

10. To exit, press the EXIT key.



Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By keyword

Your cable operator can configure Passport Guide DVR to include the Passport Guide DVR Integrated Keyword Search feature.

The Passport Guide DVR Integrated Keyword Search feature enables you to search program information for matching keywords. Keywords can refer to subject matter or names of actors or directors.

If you wish to start a keyword search for an actor (for example, Robert Downey Jr.) you can begin by entering characters (R, o, b...up to “Robert”). Passport Guide DVR will then focus its search on the names of actors. However, as soon as you enter a blank space (R, o, b, e, r, t, [space]), the search automatically turns into a general keyword search (that is, one not focused exclusively on actors’ names).

Just as in standard Keyword Search mode, the Program Guide displays a virtual keyboard interface that enables you to enter text.

In addition, Passport Guide DVR Integrated Keyword Search enables you to focus your search on All listings, TV listings only, or On Demand listings only (assuming you subscribe to the optional ShowRunner VOD service feature).

Passport Guide DVR will search through seven days of Program Guide information, and the local ShowRunner VOD catalog, in the target listing category you specify, for program titles associated with the keywords you enter.

Note: In order for Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search to function, ShowRunner must be the VOD product.

Note: Your cable operator might not make this feature available. In that case, you can still use the standard Search by Keyword function. For more information, see “Searching the Program Guide by keyword” on page 101.

Note: You can also search the Program Guide by title. For more information, see “Searching the Program Guide by title” on page 89. For more information about Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search by Title, see “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By title” on page 93.




To run a Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search by keyword:

1. Press the GUIDE key to display the Program Guide Time Grid.



3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Keyword Search option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a virtual keyboard and enters Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search by Keyword mode.

Note: You can confirm that you are in Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search (PGIS) by Keyword mode by checking the following:

— If the filter column is displayed (including All, TV Listings, or On Demand filtering options), it indicates that you are in Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search mode.

— If the word “KEYWORD” is displayed at the top of the filter column, and a magnifying glass and the text “Search” are displayed above the virtual keyboard, it indicates that you are in Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search by Keyword mode (as opposed to Search by Title).



4. Press the arrow keys to highlight the first letter of your keyword, then press SELECT.

The letter you selected appears on the KEYWORD line.

If the Keyboard Spelling Assist function is turned on (page 111), only letters that are viable options for the second letter in the keyword remain selectable. The other letters fade to grey.

For more information on the Keyboard Spelling Assist feature, see “Keyboard Spelling Assist” on page 111.

If the Keyboard Assist feature is disabled, no letters will fade to grey. All letters will remain selectable, enabling you to enter any text you like, without restriction.

5. Press the arrow keys to highlight the second letter of the keyword, and then press SELECT.

The second letter appears on the KEYWORD line.

Passport Guide DVR filters the list to exclude titles that do not meet the search criteria. You may need to enter only a few letters to locate the desired information.

6. Repeat for the subsequent letters until the desired information is displayed in the right window.

Note: To clear all letters from the KEYWORD line or to start a new search, press the arrow keys to highlight NEW, and then press SELECT. To back up one space and erase a letter, press the arrow keys to highlight the BACK option, and then press SELECT.

7. To choose a search category, press the right arrow key repeatedly to move the highlight to the second column. Then press the up or down arrow to highlight the category of listings that you wish to search: All, TV Listings, or On Demand. Then press SELECT.


Note: To skip over the search category column (column 2) and access the program listings directly, press the FAST FORWARD key. You can then press the REWIND key to skip back to the keyboard.



Only information from the selected category that matches the criteria (selected letters) will remain in the list. (In other words, if you select either the TV Listings or On Demand categories, Passport Guide DVR will display matching information from within those categories.)

8. To access the list, press the right arrow to move the highlight to the right pane (that is, the list).

(Alternatively, you could press the FAST FORWARD key to move the highlight to the right pane, and the REWIND key to move the highlight back to the keyboard.)


Passport Guide DVR highlights an item in the list.

9. To scroll through the list, press the up or down arrow keys. (You can also use the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN keys to turn pages.)

Note: If there are multiple programs in the highlighted folder, a header icon is displayed to the left of the item.

To display all instances of the associated programs (expand the list), highlight the header and press the SELECT or the right arrow.



To hide (or collapse) the list and return to the search categories, press the left arrow, or highlight the header item and again press SELECT

Note: Programs that are currently playing are marked by a “NOW” indicator.

Note: To return to the category list or the virtual keyboard, press the left arrow.

Note: You can also search for upcoming episodes of a particular program by highlighting the program in the Program Guide, pressing the SEL or REC key, and then selecting “List upcoming episodes” from the future show Options menu. For more information, see “Listing upcoming shows from the Program Guide” on page 129.

10.When you have highlighted the desired program in the list, press SELECT.

— If you selected a future program, Passport Guide DVR displays some menu options, including:


• Record entire series (displays only if the show is an episode in a series)



• List upcoming shows (or episodes)



Keyboard Spe l l ing Ass is t

Passport Guide DVR features a Keyboard Spelling Assist function for Passport Guide Integrated Searches that you can enable or disable during keyword searches.

If the Spelling Assist function is enabled, when you select a letter on the keyboard map to begin spelling the desired word, only letters that are viable options for the second letter in the word remain selectable. The other letters fade to grey and are not selectable.

For more information about Passport Guide Integrated Searches by Keyword, see “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By keyword” on page 105.

keyboard map

If you disable this feature, Passport Guide DVR will not dim the characters excluded by the search algorithm, which allows you to enter the full keyword you are searching for, even if there are currently no matches in the guide data.



To enable or disable Keyboard Spelling Assist:

1. With the Keyword Search screen displayed, press the A key (Sort).

Passport Guide DVR displays an Options menu.

2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Keyboard, then press SELECT or the right arrow.

The highlight moves to the right column.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight one of the following options, then press SELECT

— Spelling Assist On

— Spelling Assist Off

Passport Guide DVR will enable or disable the Keyboard Spelling Assist function accordingly.

4. If desired, you can press the C key to cancel your changes to the settings and return to the Program Guide.



Sort ing keyword search resu l ts

You can filter program listings in the Keyword Search results by using the Keyword Search Sort Options menu.

The List Channels option enables you to list only search results that will air on specific groups of channels (for example, Favorite channels, HD channels or Custom groups).

For information on how to run a keyword search, see “Searching the Program Guide by keyword” on page 101 and “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By keyword” on page 105.

To sort keyword search results:

1. After you complete a search for a program, you can press the A key to display the Keyword Search Sort Options menu.

Note: An example of a title search results screen appears after Step 4 on page 90.

The Keyword Search Sort Options menu includes the List Channels option, which is highlighted by default.


Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the right and displays several options, as defined below:

— Favorites

Note: This option is not included when you are sorting title search results from a Passport Guide Integrated Keyword Search. (See menu on the right, above.) However, the Favorites option is included when you are sorting title search results from a standard Keyword Search. (See menu on the left, above.)

— HD

— All

— Custom 1

— Custom 2

— Custom 3



— Favorites lists all of the programs in the Keyword Search results that will air on your specified Favorite channels. (For more information on specifying Favorite channels, see “Adding or deleting favorite channels” on page 158.)

— HD lists all of the programs in the Keyword Search results that will air on high-definition (HDTV) channels.

— All lists all of the programs in the Keyword Search results that will air on any channel.

— Custom 1, Custom 2, and Custom 3 lists all of the programs in the Keyword Search results that will air on a channel in the specified custom group of channels.


The Keyword Search results window will display only those listings that match the selected option (Favorite channels, HD channels, or Custom group of channels).

4. If you would like to display only those Keyword Search results that air on channels that belong to a specific Custom group, press the up or down arrow to highlight Custom 1, Custom 2, or Custom 3, then press SELECT.

For information on how to set up and use custom channel lists, see “List Channels: Setting up custom lists of channel categories” on page 63.



Creat ing a keyword ser ies request

If you would like Passport Guide DVR to locate and record all programs related to a particular topic of interest, you can create a keyword series request.

Keywords can refer to a particular subject matter, or to the names of actors or directors, etc.

For example, if you are interested in the guitar, you could create a keyword series for “guitar.” Passport Guide DVR will then continuously scan the Program Guide data to locate programs for which the description or title includes the word “guitar.” Passport Guide DVR will then automatically record each qualifying program.

The keywords you specify may refer to an extremely large number of programs. In this case, your keyword series requests may cause Passport Guide DVR to record an extremely large number of programs, which could quickly consume the available space on the hard disk, making it impossible to record additional programs. Create your keyword series with caution, and check frequently to make sure that your keyword series requests have not filled too much hard disk space.

To check the estimated amount of hard disk space that is currently available for new recordings, you can:

• Check the hard disk usage info gauge at the top of the Recorded Shows screen.

(To display the Recorded Shows screen, press the DVR LIST key.)

• For more detailed information, you can display the Recorded Shows Information screen.

(To do so, with the Recorded Shows screen already displayed, press the A key to display the Sort menu. Press the up or down arrow to highlight View Disk Info..., then press SELECT. For more information, see “Checking hard disk space usage” on page 377.)

Hard Disk Usage Gauge



Note: If a keyword search yields more than 50 matches, Passport Guide DVR will not allow you to schedule a series recording.

You can create a keyword series request whether or not a search of the Program Guide yields any matching programs. Refer to the following two procedures.

In the first procedure, the search of the Program Guide yields a number of matching programs. In the second procedure, no matches are found. In each procedure, Passport Guide DVR creates a keyword series request.

To create a keyword series request:

1. Follow the procedure for searching the Program Guide by keyword as described in “Searching the Program Guide by keyword” on page 101. However, key in the word or name for which you want to create a keyword series request.

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of keyword headers and icons.

Note: Keyword headers always appear in capital letters.

Each Keyword Header contains the keyword you entered, but in many cases it will also contain additional words or variations of the word you entered. A sub-list of programs is contained within each keyword header (folder).

2. Press the right arrow key repeatedly, or press the FAST FORWARD key, to move the highlight to the right window. If necessary, press the up or down arrow to move the highlight to the desired keyword header.

Passport Guide DVR highlights the keyword header.

Note: You can press SELECT to expand the keyword header folder to view the program titles it contains to make sure that you want to record them all. Press the left arrow to collapse the keyword header list.

3. Press the REC key.

Passport Guide DVR displays a dialog that asks whether you want to record all shows associated with the keyword, or only movies.



4.

5.

Note: If you select Record all matching movies, Passport Guide DVR will not record regular (non-movie) television programs.

Press the up or down arrow to highlight one of the following options, then press SELECT.

— Record all matching shows

— Record all matching movies

Passport Guide DVR displays the Series Options menu.

Use the Series Options menu to specify your preferences about which Episodes to Record, Channels, Air Times, etc.

Press the A key to confirm your selections.

For more information, see “Recording a program” on page 342.

Note: The Series Manager will display the keyword series title with a magnifying glass next to it.

For more information about the Series Manager, see “Using the Series Manager” on page 389.



You can also create a keyword series request even if your search of the Program Guide does not generate any matches. If matching programs come along in the future, Passport Guide DVR will record them automatically.

To create a keyword series request if your search yields no matches:

1. Follow the procedure for searching the Program Guide by keyword as described in “Searching the Program Guide by keyword” on page 101. However, key in the word or name for which you want to create a keyword series request.

Be certain to spell the keyword correctly.

(In the example below, the keyword is “GUITAR.”)


Passport Guide DVR displays a dialog that asks if you want to record all programs associated with the keyword, or only movies.


3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight one of the following options, then press SELECT.






4. Use the Series Options menu to specify your preferences about which Shows to Record, Types of Shows, Channels, Air Times, etc.

5. Press the A key to confirm your selections.

For more information, see “Recording a program” on page 342.



Viewing addi t iona l in format ion about a program

You can use the Program Guide to get additional information about a program, including plot summary and cast and credit information.

The following display shows an example of additional information in the Program Guide.

Note: You can view this additional information from any of the Program Guide displays: Time Grid, Theme view, Channel List view, or Title or Keyword Search modes.

To view more information about a program:

1. In the Program Guide, press the arrow keys to highlight the program for which you want more information.


Passport Guide DVR displays an extended description of the selected program.

3. Press the up or down arrow to select Plot Summary or Cast & Credits.

If the Plot Summary is lengthy, you can press the right arrow to move the highlight into the right pane, then press the down arrow to scroll the plot summary.

If you select Cast & Credits, you can press the right arrow to move the highlight into the cast list on the right pane, then press the up or down arrows to scroll through the cast list.

4. To again display the Program Guide, press the C key (or the INFO key again).



Creating a keyword series request from a cast member’s name

You can quickly create a keyword series request for any actor listed in the Cast & Credits section of the program information (More Info). This enables you to check upcoming programs that feature the actor.

Note: You can also record a show or check upcoming shows while viewing a plot summary.

To create a keyword series request for your favorite actor:

1. Follow the procedure described in “Viewing additional information about a program” on page 120.

2. Select Cast & Credits, then highlight the name of an actor in the cast list in the right pane.

3. Press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a dialog that asks whether you want to record all shows or movies that feature the actor, or list upcoming shows that feature the actor.








5. Use the Series Options menu to specify Shows to Record, Channels, Air Times, etc.

6. Press the A key to confirm your selections.

— For more information about recording a program, see “Recording a program” on page 342.

— For more information about the Series Manager, see “Using the Series Manager” on page 389.



To record a program or view upcoming episodes while viewing the plot summary:

1. Follow the procedure described in “Viewing additional information about a program” on page 120 to display the plot summary.

2. Press SELECT to select Plot Summary.

3. Press SELECT again.

Passport Guide DVR displays a menu with options to record the program, set up the remind timer, view the channel, or check the upcoming episodes or showings of the program.

4. Press the up or down arrow to select an option, then press SELECT.

— For information about recording a program, see “Recording a program” on page 342.


— Selecting List upcoming shows will display a list of all upcoming episodes of the program that are currently listed in the program guide data. The result is the same listing you would get if you executed a Search by Title in the Program Guide.



Select ing a program in the Program Guide

While browsing the Program Guide, you can select a program to watch.

The following procedure applies to all non-PPV programs. The procedure is similar for PPV programs, but you will need to purchase the selected program before you can view it. For additional information, see “Purchasing PPV programs from the Program Guide” on page 313.

To select a program from the Program Guide:



— For information about viewing the Program Guide by time, see “Displaying and navigating the Program Guide by time” on page 59.

— For information about viewing the Program Guide by theme, see “Displaying and navigating the Program Guide by theme” on page 72.

— For information about searching the Program Guide by title, see “Selecting channels and sorting programs in Theme view” on page 76.

— For information about searching the Program Guide by keyword, see “Searching the Program Guide by keyword” on page 101.

2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight a program.

3. Press SELECT to select the program.

— If you selected a current program, Passport Guide DVR displays a menu. View this channel now is highlighted by default. Press SELECT to display the program.

— If you selected a future program, Passport Guide DVR displays the menu below, which indicates that the desired program will air in the future (and not presently). Press the up or down arrow to select an option, then press SELECT.

For more information on recording, see:

— “Recording a program” on page 342

— “Manual recording” on page 350

— “Recording a series” on page 353




— You can also choose to List upcoming episodes (although this option does not appear in the example of the future show menu on page 124). Selecting List upcoming episodes will display a list of all upcoming episodes of the program that are currently listed in the program guide data. The result is the same listing you would get if you executed a Search by Title in the Program Guide. (For more information, see “Displaying the Recorded Shows screen” on page 87.)

— If you selected a PPV channel, Passport Guide DVR displays a Pay-Per-View “barker” graphic. For additional information, see “Purchasing PPV programs from the Program Guide” on page 313.

— If you selected a ShowRunner Video on Demand channel, Passport Guide DVR displays a menu with View this channel now as the only option.

— If you selected a third-party solution Video on Demand program, Passport Guide DVR displays a Video on Demand graphic. For more information, see the Video on Demand information provided by your cable operator.



Set t ing a reminder t imer f rom the Program Guide

From the Program Guide, you can set a reminder timer that will alert you one minute before a desired program is about to air.

(For information about setting a reminder timer (Remind me about this show) from the General Settings menu, see “Setting a reminder timer” on page 204.)

To set a Reminder Timer from the Program Guide:



For information about viewing the Program Guide by time, see “Displaying and navigating the Program Guide by time” on page 59.

2. Press the arrow keys to highlight a future program, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following menu.

3. Press the down arrow key to highlight [Remind me about this show], then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR will display a reminder timer icon in the relevant

cell in the Program Guide. The cell color will turn red.



One minute before the program airs, Passport Guide DVR will display an alert banner, similar to the one shown below.

4. Press SELECT to tune to the designated channel.

Cancel ing a reminder t imer f rom the Program Guide

You can cancel a reminder timer from the Program Guide. Programs for which you have set a reminder timer will display the reminder timer icon in the program guide cell.

To cancel a Reminder Timer from the Program Guide:



(For information about viewing the Program Guide by time, see “Displaying and navigating the Program Guide by time” on page 59.)

2. Press the arrow keys to highlight the future program for which you want to cancel a reminder timer.

Note: The Program Guide cell will be highlighted in red and will display a timer icon.

3. Press SELECT.



Passport Guide DVR displays the following menu. (This example uses a program entitled “Meeting Mary.”)

4. Press the arrow keys to highlight Cancel this reminder, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR cancels the reminder timer and removes the timer icon from the Program Guide cell.



L is t ing upcoming shows f rom the Program Guide

From the Program Guide, you can list all upcoming shows or episodes of a specified program that are currently contained in the program guide data. The result is the same listing you would get if you executed a Search by Title in the Program Guide. (For more information, see “Selecting channels and sorting programs in Theme view” on page 76.)

To list upcoming shows from the Program Guide:



2. Press the arrow keys to highlight a program, then press the REC or SELECT key.

Passport Guide DVR displays a menu similar to the one below.

3. Press the up or down arrow key to highlight List upcoming shows or List upcoming episodes*, then press SELECT.

Note: *This menu may include options to List upcoming shows or List upcoming episodes. If the program is a movie, the menu will refer to “shows.” If the program is from a series, the menu will refer to “episodes.”

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of all upcoming episodes or showings of the specified program that are contained in the current program data.

Note: You can also list upcoming shows by pressing the REC key while live TV is playing. Passport Guide DVR will list upcoming showings or episodes of the currently-airing program.



Banner ads

The Program Guide enables you to display advertisements for various programming and product offerings when they are advertised in a banner ad in the Program Guide.

The following example shows a banner ad for an upcoming television program.

You can press the B key any time a banner ad is displayed. Passport Guide DVR will then display an advertisement for the program or product. These ads can include their own navigational schemes to enable you to display detailed information about a show, its cast, episode plot summaries, etc. In some cases, you may be able to schedule a recording of the show, find upcoming episodes, play a trailer, etc.


4


Selecting Quick Settings

This chapter describes how to specify Quick Settings in Passport Guide DVR.

It includes the following sections:

• “About Quick Settings” on page 132

• “Displaying the Quick Settings menu” on page 133

• “Exiting the Quick Settings menu” on page 133

• “Controlling Parental Control from the Quick Settings menu” on page 134

• “Making the current channel a favorite” on page 138

• “Recording the current channel” on page 140

• “Activating or deactivating secondary audio” on page 142

• “Activating or deactivating the sleep timer” on page 143

• “Activating or deactivating closed captions” on page 144


Chap te r 4—Se lec t i ng Qu i ck Se t t ings

About Quick Sett ings

Passport Guide DVR features a Quick Settings menu that enables you to do the following things very easily and quickly:

• Activate Parental Control

• Make a channel a Favorite

• Record the current channel

• Play secondary audio

• Activate the Sleep Timer

• Display closed captions

The following figure shows an example of the Quick Settings menu.

Note: The Quick Settings menu may not be available to all viewers. The Quick Settings feature can be configured on the IPG Server by your cable operator.


Chapte r 4—Se lec t i ng Qu i ck Se t t ings

Disp lay ing the Quick Sett ings menu

To display the Quick Settings menu:

1. Press the SETTINGS key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Quick Settings menu.

2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight an option.

3. To toggle the setting for an option from Yes to No or vice versa, press SELECT.

(You can also use the right or left arrow to specify a Yes or No option.)

In some cases, additional steps may be required. Refer to the following sections for specific information.

Exi t ing the Quick Sett ings menu

To exit the Quick Settings menu, do one of the following:

• Press the C key

• Press the SETTINGS key (again)

• Press the EXIT key

• Select a channel (For information, refer to “Selecting a channel” on page 33.)



Control l ing Parental Control from the Quick Sett ings menu

Parental Control enables you to restrict household access to specific channels, ratings, content advisory levels, and times.

The following procedure explains how to turn Parental Control on and off from the Quick Settings menu. It does not explain how to configure Parental Control options.

If you are setting up Parental Control for the first time, please review “Using Parental Control” on page 247 to learn how to configure Parental Control options. Once the options are configured, you can then enable or disable Parental Control from the Quick Settings menu.

You can also enable Parental Control from the General Settings menu. For more information, refer to “Turning on Parental Control from the General Settings menu” on page 293.

Enabling Parental Control by using the Quick Settings menu

To enable Parental Control by using the Quick Settings menu:



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Activate Parental Control option.

A dot in the No column indicates that Parental Control is disabled.

Dot in “No” column

3. Press SELECT or the left arrow key to change the Parental Control setting to Yes.

Passport Guide DVR requests your Parental Control PIN.



4. Key in your Parental Control PIN.

Passport Guide DVR displays a message indicating that:

All Channel, Time, and Rating, and Content Blocks are now active.

5. Press the A key to acknowledge the message.

The Quick Settings menu disappears and the current channel is displayed.

Parental Control is now enabled, and all your settings for locking channels, time periods, ratings, and titles are active.

Disabling Parental Control by using the Quick Settings menu

You can disable Parental Control by using the Quick Settings menu.

When you disable Parental Control, household members have unrestricted access to all channels, time periods, and ratings until you turn off the set-top box, or the remote control is idle for five hours. Disabling Parental Control does not delete the settings you specified to lock channels, ratings, content advisory levels, or time periods. It merely disables them until you re-activate them or turn off the set-top box, or allow the remote control to remain idle for five hours.

The locking settings are activated when you again turn on the set-top box, and Parental Control is automatically enabled.

(To disable Parental Control permanently so that it does not enable automatically when the set-top box is turned off and on, refer to “Turning off Parental Control until you manually reactivate it” on page 301.)

You can also disable Parental Control through the General Settings menu. For more information, refer to “Turning off Parental Control” on page 295.

To disable Parental Control by using the Quick Settings menu:




A dot appears in the Yes column, indicating that Parental Control is enabled.



Dot in “Yes” column

3. Press SELECT or the right arrow to change the Parental Control setting to No.

Passport Guide DVR asks you to clarify whether you want to disable Parental Control for:

(A) This (the current) channel, or

(B) All channels and all recordings.

4. To disable Parental Control, press the A or B key.

(If you wish to cancel your request, press the C key.)


5. Key in your Parental Control PIN.

Passport Guide DVR displays the message:

All Channel, Time, and Rating, and Content Blocks are now disabled.Blocking will be enabled again after five hours of inactivity or by turning off your set-top box.




The message disappears and the current channel programming is displayed.

— Parental Control is now disabled and all channels, ratings, titles and time periods are available for viewing.

— Passport Guide DVR retains your locking settings so that you can reactivate them later.

— When you turn your set-top box off and then on, or if the remote control sits idle for five hours, Parental Control is automatically reactivated.



Making the current channel a favor i te

You can use the Quick Settings menu to designate the currently selected channel as a favorite channel.

Note: You can also assign favorite channel status to the current channel (or remove favorite channel status from the current channel) by pressing the FAV key for a few seconds.

Once you designate a channel as a favorite, you can press the FAV key to jump directly to it. If you have specified multiple channels as favorite channels, pressing the FAV key jumps from one favorite channel to the next.

You can also use the General Settings menu to specify or delete favorite channels. The General Settings menu is convenient if you want to make changes to multiple favorite channels simultaneously. For information, refer to “Adding or deleting favorite channels” on page 158.

To make the current channel a favorite channel:

1. Tune to a channel that you wish to make a favorite.



3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Make this Channel a Favorite option.

A dot appears in the No column, indicating that the selected channel is not currently a favorite.

Dot in “No” column

4. Press SELECT or the left arrow key to make the channel a favorite.

The dot moves to the Yes column.

5. To exit the Quick Settings menu, press the C key.



To make a channel a Favorite no longer:

1. Tune to a Favorite channel that you no longer want to be a Favorite.



3. Press the up or down arrow key to highlight the Make this Channel a Favorite option.

A dot appears in the Yes column, indicating that the channel is a Favorite.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow key to move the dot to the No column.

The channel is no longer a Favorite.

5. To exit the Quick Settings menu, press the C key.



Record ing the current channel

You can use the Quick Settings menu to start recording the currently selected channel.

To record the current channel by using the Quick Settings menu:



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Record this Channel option.

3. Press SELECT or the left arrow to move the dot to the Yes column.

Passport Guide DVR displays a menu.

4. Highlight one of the following options:

— Record entire series (displayed only if show is episode in series)


— Create a manual recording...

— List upcoming shows/episodes

Note: This menu may include options to List upcoming shows or List upcoming episodes. If the program is a movie, the menu will refer to “shows.” If the program is from a series, the menu will refer to “episodes.”



5. Press SELECT.

— If you selected Record entire series, for more information see “Recording a series” on page 353.

— If you selected Record this show, recording starts.

— If you selected Create a manual recording, you must completeadditional information. See “Manual recording” on page 350.

— If you selected List upcoming shows/episodes, for more information see “Listing upcoming shows from the Program Guide” on page 129.

6. To exit the Quick Settings display, press the EXIT or C key.

Note: If there are any recording conflicts, Passport Guide DVR displays a dialog to help resolve the conflict. For more information, refer to “Resolving conflicts” on page 362. You must resolve conflicts before you can proceed.

To stop a recording by using the Quick Settings menu:



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Record this Channel option.

3. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move the dot to the No column.

Passport Guide DVR displays the menu below, asking if you would like to stop the recording.

4. Press the up arrow (if necessary) to highlight the Stop now option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR stops the recording.

Note: You can also stop a recording by pressing the STOP key. Passport Guide DVR will display a dialog. Highlight the Stop now option, then press SELECT.



Act ivat ing or deact ivat ing secondary audio

Activating the Secondary Audio option in the Quick Settings menu enables you to listen to an alternative audio program, such as a different language track or a director’s narration, for programs that feature secondary audio programming (SAP).

Note: When SAP is available, the program description in the Program Guide

includes the SAP icon . Programs featuring SAP are listed in the Theme view of the Program Guide under the heading “Other.”

You can also activate the Secondary Audio Program option by using the General Settings menu. For more information, refer to “Activating and deactivating the Secondary Audio Program (SAP)” on page 213.

To enable secondary audio:



2. Press the up or down arrow key to highlight the Play Secondary Audio option.

A dot is in the No column, indicating that SAP is currently not playing.

3. Press SELECT or the left arrow to change the setting to Yes.

SAP begins to play immediately for the current program (if a secondary audio program is available).

4. Press the C key to exit the Quick Settings menu and return to the current channel.

To disable secondary audio:



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Play Secondary Audio option.

3. Press SELECT or the right arrow to change the setting from Yes to No.

The audio selection changes back to the primary language.

4. Press the C key to exit the Quick Settings menu and return to the currently-selected channel.



Act ivat ing or deact ivat ing the s leep t imer

Passport Guide DVR features a sleep timer.

The Sleep Timer turns off the set-top box after a specified number of minutes.

You can also use the General Settings menu to set the Sleep Timer asdescribed in “Activating or deactivating the sleep timer” on page 197.

To activate the sleep timer:



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Activate Sleep Timer option.

3. Press SELECT or the left arrow key to change the setting to Yes.

Passport Guide DVR displays a number in parentheses after the Activate Sleep Timer option that indicates the number of minutes until the set-top box turns off.

4. To change the number of minutes, press the left arrow key repeatedly until the desired number of minutes is displayed. You can specify 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, or 90 minutes.

5. Press the C key to exit the Quick Settings menu and return to the currently selected channel.

To deactivate the sleep timer:



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Activate Sleep Timer option.

The number after the Activate Sleep Timer option is the number of minutes set by the previous sleep timer.

3. Press SELECT or the right arrow key to change the setting to No.

4. Press the C key to exit the Quick Settings menu and return to the channel.



Act ivat ing or deact ivat ing c losed capt ions

Closed captions display text for the dialog and other non-visual events (such as sound effects) during a program.

Note: This procedure explains how to turn the closed caption option on or off. To configure the closed caption option, refer to “Setting the closed captioning option” on page 217.

To display closed captions:



2. -Press the up or down arrow key to highlight the Display Closed Captions option.


Closed captions will be displayed (if available).

Note: To configure closed captioning options (for example, font and display), refer to “Setting the closed captioning option” on page 217.

4. Press the C key to exit the Quick Settings menu and return to the currently selected channel.



To deactivate closed captions:



2. Press the up or down arrow key to highlight the Display Closed Captions option.

3. Press the right arrow key to change the setting to No.

Closed captions are turned off and will not be displayed.

4. Press the C key to exit the Quick Settings menu and return to the channel.


5


Using Passport QuickMenu™

This chapter explains how to use the Passport QuickMenu™.

It includes the following main sections:

• “About the QuickMenu” on page 148

• “Displaying and using the QuickMenu” on page 149

• “Exiting the QuickMenu” on page 149


Chapte r 5—Us ing Passpor t Qu i ckMenu™

About the QuickMenu

The QuickMenu is an optional feature that may be available in certain areas. It enables viewers to browse through lists of services or shortcuts to various Passport Guide DVR functions.

The services or shortcuts can be organized into multiple categories as determined by your cable operator. The categories are listed in the menu’s horizontal title bar.

Services may vary depending on your cable provider. For example, they may include links such as Back to TV, DVR Recordings, Series Manager, or guide links to specific locations in the Program Guide.

QuickMenu functions are controlled by IPG server console settings that are not accessible to the viewer.

The QuickMenu can also include a link to the Power-On Channel option in General Settings. For more information, see “Setting the power-on channel” on page 170.

The figure below is merely an example of the QuickMenu. Menu category and option names are determined by your cable operator.)

Horizontal menu bar



Disp lay ing and us ing the QuickMenu

To display the QuickMenu:

1. Press the MENU or SETTINGS key (depending on the type of remote control you are using).

Passport Guide DVR displays the QuickMenu.

Note: Whether you need to press the MENU or SETTINGS key to display the QuickMenu depends on the remote control that you are using. (Certain remote controls send the Menu command when you press the SETTINGS key.) Also, if the Quick Settings menu is not enabled by your cable operator, pressing the SETTINGS key will display the QuickMenu.

2. Press the left or right arrow to select a menu category.

Note: Menu categories may vary by location. If only one category is available, QuickMenu does not feature horizontal category menu arrows.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight a menu option, then press SELECT.

Note: Menu options may vary by location.

Exi t ing the QuickMenu

To exit the QuickMenu, do one of the following:

• Press the EXIT key.

• Select a channel. (For information about this, refer to “Selecting a channel” on page 33.)

• To return to live TV, select Back to TV from the QuickMenu:

— If the QuickMenu is displayed over live video, the QuickMenu will disappear.

— If a channel application is currently displayed, Passport Guide DVR will display in full screen mode the source currently displayed in the video inset window.


6


Specifying General Settings

The General Settings menu offers numerous options for tailoring Passport Guide DVR to your requirements. This chapter explains how to use the General Settings menu. It includes the following main sections:

• “About the General Settings menu” on page 152

• “Displaying and navigating the General Settings menu” on page 156

• “Getting help for preferences in General Settings” on page 157

• “Exiting the General Settings menu” on page 157

• “My Preferences” on page 158

• “Adding or deleting favorite channels” on page 158

• “Specifying skipped channels” on page 165

• “Setting the power-on channel” on page 170

• “Forced power-on channels and operator-created portals” on page 172

• “Setting the Channel Banner duration” on page 173

• “Auto-tuning to high-definition (HDTV) channels” on page 175

• “Displaying QuickTips” on page 178

• “Enhanced TV Apps” on page 181

• “Caller ID application” on page 183

• “Messages” on page 192

• “Setting Parental Control preferences” on page 196

• “Timers” on page 197

• “Scheduling recordings from a remote location” on page 210

• “Setting purchasing preferences” on page 212

• “Language” on page 213

• “Audio/video settings” on page 225

• “Accessories” on page 238


Chapte r 6—Spec i f y i ng Gene ra l Se t t i ngs

About the General Set t ings menu

The General Settings menu enables you to tailor Passport Guide DVR to suit your preferences.

The following display is an example of the General Settings menu:

The following table describes each Preference in the General Settings menu. The availability of specific preference options depends on your cable operator.)

Preference Funct ion Refer to

My Preferences page 158

Favorite Channels Specify channels that you like as favorite channels. Configure Auto Favorites functionality.

page 158

Skipped Channels Specify channels that you do not wish to display. Passport Guide DVR will automatically skip over specified channels when you change channels using the CH (+) or (-) keys.

page 165

Power-On Channel Specify the channel that the cable set-top box will display when you turn on the set-top box.

page 170

Banner Duration Specify how long the Channel Banner remains displayed when you change channels.

page 173

Auto-tune to HD

Specify whether you want Passport Guide DVR to tune automatically to the HDTV version (if available) of any channel you select. (This feature is head-end configurable and may not be available on all set-top boxes.)

page 175

Quick Tips Display helpful hints while you browse or search the Program Guide for shows, set up future show recordings, etc.

page 178

Enhanced TV Apps

Enable or disable any Enhanced TV Apps that may be installed on your set-top box. (Enhanced TV Apps can include such things as a weather information application, or a voting application for a TV game show.)

page 181


Chapte r 6—Spec i fy ing Genera l Se t t ings

Pref ere n ce Funct ion Refer to

Caller ID Caller ID application functionality may not be deployed by all cable operators. In such cases, the following Caller ID preferences will not be displayed.

page 183

Call History Review the call history. page 189

Caller ID Status Enable or disable the Caller ID application. page 186

Banner Duration Specify the Caller ID Banner duration. page 187

Messages

Message Notice Specify whether or not you want Passport Guide DVR to display a notice in the Channel Banner when you receive a message.

page 192

Parental Control See Parental Control chapter. page 290

Locking Status Enable or disable Parental Control. page 290

Change PIN Enable, disable, and change the Parental Control PIN. page 251

Locked Channels Specify the channels you want to lock when Parental Control is activated.

page 255

Locked Ratings Specify the program ratings you want to lock when Parental Control is activated.

page 260

Locked Content Specify the Content Advisory program categories you want to lock when Parental Control is activated.

page 280

Locked Time Specify the time periods you want to lock when Parental Control is activated.

page 272

Hide Adult Titles

Hides (does not display) adult-oriented program titles and descriptions in the Program Guide, title or keyword search results, Channel Banner, General Settings menu, or PPV channel and Passport Guide DVR menus.

page 280

Timers

Sleep Timer Activate the Sleep Timer so that Passport Guide DVR automatically turns off the cable set-top box after a specified number of minutes.

page 197

Power-On Timer Specify the channel, day(s), and time you want the cable set-top box to automatically turn on.

page 199

Power-Off Timer Specify the day(s) and time you want the cable set-top box to automatically turn off.

page 202

Reminder Timer Set a timer to remind you when a program is going to air. page 204



Pref ere n ce Funct ion Refer to

Remote Recording

Remote Recording Enable or disable the Remote Recording feature. (Viewers can schedule recordings of programs from a remote location by using an Internet web interface.)

page 210

Purchasing

Locking Status This feature enables or disables the requirement to enter a PIN to purchase PPV programs.

page 305

Change PIN Change the PIN you use for purchasing PPV programs. page 311

PPV Purchases Review or cancel PPV purchases. page 327

Language

Audio Turn secondary audio programming (SAP) on or off. page 213

Descriptive Video Turn descriptive video on or off. (This feature is head-end configurable and may not be available on all set-top boxes.)

page 215

Closed Captioning Specify whether or not closed captions are enabled. Select detailed parameters for Analog and Digital Services and text and background options.

page 217

Display Select English, Spanish, or French as the language for the text in menus and screens in the Passport Guide DVR user interface.

page 221

Subtitles Select the language to use for subtitles. Display options include On (display with video) or Off. Language options include English, Spanish, Portuguese, or French.

page 223

Audio/Video

Video Output Format

Specify output format parameters to optimize your television viewing.

page 225

Audio Settings Specify settings for Volume Level, Analog Output, Digital Output, and Dynamic Range (see below).

page 229

Volume Level Customize audio preferences to optimize your set-top’s performance with your TV and audio system.

page 229

Analog Output Specify the desired option for analog audio: Mono, Stereo, or Surround Sound.

page 231

Digital Output Specify the desired option for digital audio: Pulse Code Modulated or Dolby Digital (AC3).

page 233

Dynamic Range Select the desired option to balance the digital channels output with the analog output.

page 235



Preference Funct ion Refer to

Accessories

AC Outlet Use Specify how to use the cable set-top box’s AC outlet. page 238

RF Output Specify channel 3 or 4 to output RF (audio and video) from your set-top.

page 240

Set-top Clock Specify the display and illumination options for the set-top box LED display (see below).

page 241

Display Specify display options for the set-top box LED display. page 241

Illumination Specify illumination options for the set-top box LED display. page 241

Settop Box Name

Specify a name for an optional client set-top box (located in bedroom, kitchen, etc.)

(Note: This feature is available only on Passport Guide DVR Server home video networks.)

page 245



Disp lay ing and nav igat ing the Genera l Set t ings menu

Use the following procedure to display and navigate the General Settings menu.

To display and navigate the General Settings menu:

1. Press the SETTINGS key, then press the A key.

Note: If your set-top box supports the QuickMenu feature, you could alternatively press the MENU key twice.

Passport Guide DVR displays the General Settings menu (example below).

2. Press the up or down arrows (or the PAGE + and PAGE - keys) to scroll the list of Preference categories.

When a Preference category is highlighted, the right side of the screen displays a summary of the Preference settings.

3. Press SELECT or the right arrow to expand the highlighted Preference category and display various Preference items.

For example, expanding the Timers preference category displays items for Sleep Timer, Power-On Timer, etc. Passport Guide DVR will scroll the first item in the Preferences category into the highlight.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to display various Preference options.

In general, use the up or down arrow to highlight a Preference option, then press SELECT to accept it.



For more information, refer to the section in this chapter regarding the specific Preference item you wish to set. The table on page 152 can help you locate the relevant information.

Gett ing he lp for preferences in Genera l Set t ings

Passport Guide DVR displays helpful information in the upper-left section of the General Settings menu.

In some cases, the help information continues on a second page. Press the INFO key to display subsequent pages.

Exi t ing the Genera l Set t ings menu

To exit the General Settings menu, press the EXIT or SETTINGS or MENU key.

The General Settings menu disappears. The program airing on the currently-selected channel is displayed.

Note: The following key sequences will also exit General Settings (and open other features):

• Pressing the DVR LIST key will exit General Settings and display the Recorded Shows list.

• Pressing the GUIDE key will exit General Settings and display the Program Guide.

• Pressing a CH+/- key or a number key will exit General Settings and display the selected channel.

• Pressing the MENU key will exit General Settings (and, if the QuickMenu feature is so configured, may display a QuickMenu).



My Preferences

Passport Guide DVR enables you to set several preferences to customize your viewing experience.

These preferences are located under the My Preferences category and include Favorite Channels, Skipped Channels, Power-On Channel, Banner Duration, Auto-tune to HD, QuickTips, and Enhanced TV Apps (some preferences are optional depending on system configuration).

Adding or de let ing favor i te channels

You can use the General Settings menu to specify your favorite channels.

You can also assign favorite channel status to the current channel (or remove favorite channel status from the current channel) by pressing the FAV key for three (3) seconds.

Once you designate a channel as a favorite, you can press the FAV key to jump to it quickly. If you have set up multiple favorite channels, repeatedly pressing the FAV key jumps from one favorite channel to the next.

You can also use the Quick Settings to specify the channel you are currently watching as a favorite channel. For more information, refer to “Making the current channel a favorite” on page 138.

Adding favor i te channels

To add favorite channels:



Passport Guide DVR displays the General Settings menu.

2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the My Preferences category.

The right side of the screen displays a summary of the current My Preferences settings.

If favorite channels have already been specified, the current count of favorite channels (for example, 5 Channels) and the channel numbers themselves (for example, 2, 4, 5, 8, 11) are listed on the right side of the display. Otherwise, the preference displays NO ENTRIES.

— If the My Preferences category is not expanded, press SELECT. The My Preferences category will expand to display various preference items.



3. If necessary, press the down arrow key to highlight the Favorite Channels preference.

4. Press the right arrow or SELECT to move to the Channels column.

5. Press the up or down arrow or the number key(s) to highlight a channel that you want to make a favorite.

Note: Alternatively, you could specify the desired channel by pressing the number keys on the remote control.

6. Press SELECT.

— A star icon is displayed to the right of the channel in the Channels column.

— The channel number is added to the CURRENT FAVORITES list.

7. To add another channel as a favorite, repeat steps 5 and 6.

8. When you are finished, press the left arrow.

Passport Guide DVR returns to the Preferences list.

9. To exit the General Settings menu, press the EXIT key.



Auto Favor i tes

Passport Guide DVR features an Auto Favorites function that remembers the channels you watch most and automatically adds them to the Favorites list.

Auto Favorite channels are indicated in the Program Guide by the following icon:

Turn ing Auto Favor i tes on and o f f

Auto Favorites may be turned on by default; however, you can turn this feature on or off as you desire.

Note: If you turn off Auto Favorites, Passport Guide DVR no longer tracks or retains viewing behavior information.

To turn Auto Favorites off or on:

1. Highlight the Favorite Channels preference.

2. Press the A key to disable or enable the Auto Favorites function.

(The preference will switch to the opposite setting when you press the A key.)

The right side of the screen displays the status: Auto Favorites: Off (or On).

Press the A key to enable or disable Auto Favorites



Delet ing favor i te channels

The following procedure explains how to delete a single channel by using the Favorite Channels preference in the General Settings menu. This function also enables you to clear all your favorite channels at once. For more information, refer to “Clearing all favorite channels” on page 163.

To delete favorite channels:







3. If necessary, press the down arrow to highlight the Favorite Channels preference.

If you have already specified one or more favorite channels, the current count of favorite channels (for example, 5 Channels) and the channel numbers themselves (for example, 2, 4, 5, 8, 11) are listed on the right side of the display. Otherwise, the preference displays NO ENTRIES.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Channels column.

5. Press the up or down arrow or the number key(s) to highlight a channel you want to remove from the CURRENT FAVORITES. (Favorite channels are marked by a star icon.)




6. Press SELECT.

The star icon next to the channel disappears from the Channels column.

The channel number disappears from the CURRENT FAVORITES list.

If you wish to re-select the channel after pressing SELECT, press SELECT again. The star icon re-appears in the Channels column, and the channel number re-appears in the CURRENT FAVORITES list.

7. To remove additional channels from the CURRENT FAVORITES list, repeat steps 4, 5 and 6.






Clear ing a l l favor i te channels

The following procedure describes how to clear all favorite channels at once from the CURRENT FAVORITES list.

This procedure utilizes the Favorite Channels preference in the General Settings menu. You can also use this preference to delete channels one by one from the CURRENT FAVORITES list. For more information, refer to “Deleting favorite channels” on page 161.

To clear all favorite channels:







3. If necessary, press the down arrow key to highlight the Favorite Channels preference.

If you have already specified favorite channels, the current count of favorite channels (for example, 5 Channels) and the channel numbers themselves (for example, 2, 4, 5, 8, 11) will be listed on the right side of the display. Otherwise, the preference displays NO ENTRIES.


(Favorite channels are also marked by a star icon.)

5. Press the up or down arrow repeatedly to highlight the Clear All option.



Note: The Clear All option is located at the top of the Channels column (that is, above Channel 1). As a shortcut, you can press the number “2” key on your remote control, then press the up arrow once or twice to quickly access the Clear All option. You can also scroll the Channels column quickly by pressing the PAGE - or + key.

6. Press SELECT to clear all the channels from the CURRENT FAVORITES list.

The CURRENT FAVORITES list is now empty. No star icons appear in the + column.

7. Press the left arrow.

Passport Guide DVR returns to the Preferences list. The right side displays the text: NO ENTRIES.




Spec i fy ing sk ipped channels

You can use the General Settings menu to specify the channels you want Passport Guide DVR to skip over when you change channels using the CH (+) or (-) keys.

The program content carried by the designated skipped channel will not be displayed on your TV screen. Instead, Passport Guide DVR will skip over that channel and display the program carried by the channel with the next higher or lower number.

A skipped channel is indicated by a blue check mark (3) next to the channel number in the QuickInfo and in the Program Guide.

Note: You can still view a skipped channel by entering its channel number directly using the number keys or by selecting the channel in the Program Guide.

A Custom Channel List in the Program Guide enables you to omit Skipped Channels from display in the Program Guide. For more information, see “Selecting and sorting channels in the Time Grid” on page 60.

To specify a skipped channel:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Skipped Channels preference.

If you have already specified skipped channels, Passport Guide DVR displays the current count of skipped channels (for example, 1 Channel) and the CURRENT SKIPPED channel numbers (for example, 37) on the right side of the display.



If no skipped channels are currently specified, Passport Guide DVR displays NO ENTRIES.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Channels column.

5. Press up or down arrow to highlight a channel you want to skip.


6. Press SELECT.

— A check mark is displayed to the right of the channel in the Channels column (see display above).

— The channel number is added to the CURRENT SKIPPED list.

— If you wish to de-select the channel after pressing SELECT, press SELECT again to toggle the channel. The check mark disappears from the Channels column, and the channel number disappears from the CURRENT SKIPPED list.

7. To add another skipped channel, repeat steps 5 and 6.






Removing channels f rom the sk ipped channels l i s t

The following procedure explains how to remove a channel from the skipped channels list by using the Skipped Channels preference in the General Settings menu.

This function also enables you to clear all of your skipped channels at once. For more information, refer to “Clearing all skipped channels” on page 169.

To delete skipped channels:








If you have already specified skipped channels, Passport Guide DVR displays the current count of skipped channels (for example, 2 Channels) and the CURRENT SKIPPED channel numbers (for example, 4, 37) on the right side of the display.

If no skipped channels are currently specified, Passport Guide DVR displays NO ENTRIES.




5. Press up or down arrow to highlight the channel you want to delete from the CURRENT SKIPPED list.


(Skipped channels are marked by a check mark.)

6. Press SELECT.

— The check mark next to the channel call letters disappears from the Channels column.

— The channel number disappears from the CURRENT SKIPPED list.

7. To delete more channels from the CURRENT SKIPPED list, repeat steps 5 and 6.






Clear ing a l l sk ipped channels

The following procedure describes how to clear all skipped channels simultaneously from the skipped channels list.

This procedure uses the Skipped Channels preference in the General Settings menu. You can also use this preference to delete a single channel from the skipped channels list. For more information, refer to “Removing channels from the skipped channels list” on page 167.

To clear all skipped channels simultaneously:








The right side of the screen displays the current count of skipped channels (for example, 3 Channels) and the CURRENT SKIPPED channel numbers (for example, 23, 34, 47) on the right side.


Passport Guide DVR displays the Channels column.

(Skipped channels are marked by a check mark.)

5. Press the up or down arrow repeatedly to highlight the Clear All option.

The Clear All option is located at the top of the Channels column (that is, above Channel 1). As a shortcut, you can press the number “2” key on your remote control, then press the up arrow once or twice to quickly access the Clear All option. You can also scroll the Channels column quickly by pressing the PAGE - or + key.

6. Press SELECT to clear all the channels from the CURRENT SKIPPED list.

The CURRENT SKIPPED list is now empty. No check marks appear in the Channels column.

7. Press the left arrow.

Passport Guide DVR returns to the Preferences list. The right side displays the text: NO ENTRIES.




Sett ing the power-on channel

You can specify the channel that you want the set-top box to display each time you turn it on. This channel is called the “power-on channel.”

To specify the power-on channel, use the Power-On Channel preference in the General Settings menu.

Notes:

• The MSO head-end can configure a default power-on channel that will override the viewer-specified Power-On Channel. In such cases, the Power-On Channel preference might be removed or rendered unavailable in the General Settings menu. For more information, refer to “Forced power-on channels and operator-created portals” on page 172.

• If a PPV purchase is airing when you turn on the set-top box and TV, Passport Guide DVR will display the PPV channel instead of the power-on channel.

• If two recordings are in progress when you power-on the set-top box and the TV, Passport Guide DVR will override the power-on channel and instead display the channel that first started recording.

• If you set a Power-On Timer, the channel specified for the Power-On Timer will override the channel you selected for the Power-On Channel. For more information about the Power-On Timer, refer to “Setting the power-on timer” on page 199.

To set the power-on channel:









3. Press the down arrow repeatedly to highlight the Power-On Channel preference.

The right side of the screen displays the channel number and call letters of the current power-on channel (or Default Channel).


Passport Guide DVR displays the Channels column.

5. Press up or down arrow or the appropriate number key(s) to highlight the channel you want your television to display when you power on the set-top box.

Passport Guide DVR displays a dot to the left of the channel listing.

Note: If you want the set-top box to display the channel you were watching when the set-top was powered off, highlight the Last Channel option (located above Channel 1). As a shortcut, you can press the number 1 or 2 key on your remote control, then press the up arrow as needed to quickly access the Last Channel option. You can also scroll the Channels column quickly by pressing the PAGE - or + key.

6. Press SELECT key to accept.





Forced power-on channels and operator-created porta ls

The cable head-end may configure set-top boxes to power-on to a specific default channel.

Note: In such cases, the Power-On Channel user preference may not appear in the General Settings, and consequently the viewer may be unable to specify a power-on channel.

A pre-determined, fixed power-on channel can be a convenient way for a cable operator to advertise and promote their services.

For example, the screen below is a mock-up of a service portal that could be created by a cable operator and configured by the head-end to serve as a forced power-on channel. It is designed to promote the cable operator’s services and features.

The cable head-end may also configure a forced channel selection to the power-on channel after a period of five hours transpires without user interactivity (for example, without changing channels, or adjusting the volume).

The head-end can also configure specific set-top boxes (or groups of set-top boxes) to ignore the forced power-on channel. For example, institutions such as hotels or airports, in the case of system resets after power outages, may wish for the set-top box to reset to a locally-specified power-on channel (for example, perhaps a cable news channel).

For more information, see the Passport Guide DVR Server Operation and Maintenance Guide.



Set t ing the Channel Banner durat ion

The Channel Banner displays information about the currently selected channel.

You can specify how long the Channel Banner remains displayed by using the Banner Duration preference in the General Settings menu. For more information about the Channel Banner, refer to “Using the Channel Banner and the Info Banner” on page 40.

To change the duration of the Channel Banner display:






— If the My Preferences category is not expanded, press SELECT. The My Preferences category will expand to display various preference settings.

3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Banner Duration preference.

The right side of the screen displays the current setting (for example, Long).



4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Duration column.

A dot to the left of an option indicates the current setting.

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight one of the three banner durations: — Long — Medium — Short

6. Press SELECT to accept the setting.





Auto-tuning to h igh-def in i t ion (HDTV) channels

You can set up Passport Guide DVR to tune automatically to a high-definition (HD) version of a selected Standard Definition (SD) channel if an HD version of the channel is available.

Note: Not all cable operators may choose to deploy the Auto Tune to HD feature. If the feature is deployed, the cable operator will determine which SD channels will be mapped to HD counterparts.

With this setting, if you select an SD channel, and there is an alternative HD version of that same channel available, Passport Guide DVR will tune automatically to the HD source.

Many viewers will want to activate this feature to make sure they watch programs in high-definition, if and when they are available. However, viewers should remain aware that recording a program on a high-definition channel will consume substantially more hard disk space than recording the same program on a standard-definition channel.

If you are setting up a recording from the Program Guide, a “Record in Standard Definition” menu option will be available during the recording initiation process if the Auto-tune to HD preference is turned on, and if the feature has tuned automatically to an HD channel version of the SD channel that you selected. This menu option enables you to record high-definition (HD) programs at standard definition (SD) settings to save hard disk space. (For more information, see “Recording a current or future program from the Program Guide” on page 346.)

Record in Standard Definition

You can specify whether Passport Guide DVR will tune automatically to a high-definition (HD) version of a selected channel, if an HD version is available, by using the Auto-tune to HD preference in the General Settings menu.

To set up Passport Guide DVR to tune automatically to an HD version of a channel, if one is available:








— If the My Preferences category is not expanded, press SELECT. The My Preferences category will expand to display various preference settings.

3.

4.

Press the down arrow to highlight the Auto-tune to HD preference.

The right side of the screen displays the current setting (for example, On).

Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Status column.

Passport Guide DVR displays two options: — On — Off




5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight your selection (On or Off).






Disp lay ing QuickT ips

The QuickTips preference enables you to display helpful hints while you browse or search the Program Guide for shows, set up future show recordings, etc.

To change the QuickTips setting:




2. If necessary, press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the My Preferences category.



3. Press the down arrow to highlight the QuickTips preference.

The right side of the screen displays the current QuickTips setting (Off).



4. Press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays three options in the Status column:

— Off

— On

— View Now





— If you selected Off, Passport Guide DVR will never display a QuickTips panel.

— If you selected On, Passport Guide DVR will display a QuickTips panel once a day when you enter the Program Guide or DVR List screens.

— If you selected View Now, Passport Guide DVR will display the QuickTips panel immediately.

• Press the left or right arrows to turn through the pages of QuickTip information.

• Press the A key to preclude future display of the QuickTips panel.

• Press the C key to close the QuickTips panel.



Enhanced TV Apps

The Enhanced TV Apps preference enables you to turn on or off any Enhanced TV Apps that may be available on your system.

Enhanced TV Apps are lightweight software applications that conform to the Enhanced TV Binary Interchange Format (EBIF). Your cable operator may choose to make certain such applications available. For example, your cable operator may offer a weather information application, or a voting application for a TV game show.

The Enhanced TV Apps preference enables you to enable or disable such applications.

To enable the Enhanced TV Apps:




2. If necessary, press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the My Preferences category.



3. Press the up or down arrow key to highlight the Enhanced TV Apps preference.



Passport Guide displays the current setting (for example, Disabled).


Passport Guide DVR displays two options in the Status column:

— Enabled

— Disabled

A dot indicates the current setting.


— If you select Disabled, Passport Guide DVR will not display any EBIF-compatible Enhanced TV apps that your MSO may make available.

— If you select Enabled, Passport Guide DVR will display any EBIF-compatible Enhanced TV apps that your MSO may make available.






Cal ler ID appl icat ion

Passport Guide DVR can feature, if the cable operator chooses to support it, an optional Caller ID application that displays telephone caller identification information in a modified version of the Channel Banner when calls are received on your household’s telephone line(s).

Note: Not all cable operators may choose to deploy the Caller ID application. If it is not supported by your cable operator, no Caller ID menu options will be displayed in the General Settings.

The Caller ID application can support up to four (4) incoming telephone lines.

Caller ID information includes the telephone number of the incoming call, the name associated with that telephone number, and the date and time of the call.

Cable services companies may choose to also display the following additional features:

• The line number (for example, Line 1) on which the call is received

• The count of voicemail messages that have been received

If the call is coming from an unrecognized number, Passport Guide DVR will display “New Voicemail: Unknown Caller.”

Cal ler ID Banner d isp lay behavior

The Caller ID Banner will be displayed when a telephone call is received. The Caller ID Banner can be displayed over full-screen video, Live TV, or any full-screen graphical user interface, except for those listed below.

Caller ID information

Voicemail message count

in modified Channel Banner

The Caller ID Banner will not be displayed over the:

• General Settings menu

• Program Guide

• Recorded Shows screens, or the



• Microsite (that is, a full screen ad displayed if the viewer presses the B key adjacent to the Banner Ad in the Program Guide)

If one of these interface elements is displayed, Passport Guide DVR will instead display the Caller ID application dialog when a telephone call is received.

Cal l h is tory

The Caller ID application also enables you to display a Call History (up to 40 calls maximum) by using the General Settings menu.

You can also delete specific calls from the Call History. (For more information on the Call History, see “Reviewing the Caller ID history” on page 189.)

Cal ler ID appl icat ion in format ion

The cable operator can configure the Caller ID application to display various amounts of information when the Caller ID application preference is highlighted. The following screen represents one possible configuration.



Sending ca l ls to vo icemai l

Depending on the options configured by the cable operator, when a telephone call is received, the viewer may be able to send the call to voicemail to record a message.

• If this feature is available, the viewer can press the A key when the Caller ID application banner is displayed to redirect the call to voicemail recording.

• If the feature is not available, the Send to Voicemail option will not be displayed in the Caller ID Banner.

Send to Voicemail not available Send to Voicemail

• If Passport Guide DVR displays the Caller ID dialog when a telephone call is received (see “Caller ID application” on page 183), the viewer can also press the A key to send the call to voicemail.



Sett ing the Ca l ler ID appl icat ion

The Caller ID preference enables you to:

• Turn Caller ID on or off.

More precisely: Specify whether or not Passport Guide DVR will display the Caller ID Banner when one of the telephone land lines in your home receives a call (Caller ID Status: see page 186.)

• Specify the display duration of the Caller ID Banner (Banner Duration: see page 187.)

• Review a list of Caller ID information associated with previously-logged telephone calls (Call History: see page 189.)

• Delete specific calls from the Call History (Call History: see page 190.)

Turn ing the Ca l ler ID appl icat ion on or o f f

To turn the Caller ID application on or off:


Note: If your set-top box supports the QuickMenu feature, as an alternative you could press the MENU key twice.


2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Caller ID category.

The right side of the screen displays the Call History (the number of calls currently listed in the Call History); Caller ID Status (Off, On); Banner Duration (Short, Medium, Long); and Voicemail X (Y new).

Note: The cable operator may configure the Caller ID application to display additional information. See “Caller ID application information” on page 184 for details.

— If the Caller ID category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Caller ID category will expand to display a few preference items, and the Call History preference will be highlighted.



3. Press the down arrow if necessary to select the Caller ID Status preference, then press select or the right arrow.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Status column and highlights the current setting (On or Off).

4. To change the Caller ID Status setting, press the up or down arrow to highlight the desired option: On or Off.




Sett ing the Ca l ler ID Banner durat ion

You can set the display duration of the Caller ID Channel Banner to Short (15 seconds), Medium (30 seconds) or Long (60 seconds).

Note: The default setting is Medium.

To set the Caller ID Banner duration:






— If the Caller ID category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Caller ID category will expand to display a few preference items. The Call History preference is highlighted.



3. Press the down arrow to select the Banner Duration preference, then press SELECT or the right arrow.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Status column and highlights the current setting (Long, Medium or Short).

4. To change the Caller ID Banner Duration setting, press the up or down arrow to highlight the desired option:

— Long

— Medium

— Short






Reviewing the Ca l ler ID h is tory

Passport Guide DVR enables you to review a Caller ID history, which displays detailed information on up to 40 incoming calls listed in reverse chronological order.

To review the Caller ID history:








Passport Guide DVR displays the Call History column and highlights the first entry in the Call History.

Passport Guide DVR also displays in the right column detailed information about the call, including the caller’s telephone number, name, the household line number on which the call was received, and the date and time at which the call was received.



4. Press the down arrow repeatedly to review other Call History entries.

5. Press the left arrow twice to return to the Preferences list.

Delet ing spec i f i c ca l l s f rom the ca l l h is tory

Passport Guide DVR enables you to delete specific calls from the call history.

To delete specific telephone calls from the call history:








Passport Guide DVR displays the Call History column and highlights the first entry in the Call History.

Passport Guide DVR also displays in the right column detailed information about the call, including the caller’s telephone number, name, the household line number on which the call was received, and the date and time at which the call was received.



4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Call History entry that you wish to delete, then press the C button (Erase Message) to delete it.

Passport Guide DVR deletes the Call History entry.

5. Press the left arrow to return to the Preferences list.



Messages

Passport Guide DVR enables you to receive messages from your cable operator. Passport Guide DVR displays the messages on your television screen. You can review and delete these messages.

Note: Not all cable companies may support Messaging functionality.

If you wish, Passport Guide DVR will display a notification of receipt of a message in the Channel Banner. You can specify whether or not you want Passport Guide DVR to display this notification by setting the Message Notice preference.

Message notification icon



Turn ing the message not ice on and of f

The Message Notice preference enables you to specify whether or not Passport Guide DVR will notify you upon receipt of a message from your cable operator.

If Passport Guide DVR is set to display the message notification, it will be displayed in the Channel Banner.

To display or block the message notification:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Messages category.

The right side of the screen displays a summary of the current Messages settings.

— If the Messages category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Messages category will expand to display the Message Notice preference item.

3. If necessary, press the down arrow to highlight the Message Notice preference.

The right side of the screen displays the current Message Notice setting (for example, Block).


Passport Guide DVR displays the Options column and highlights the current setting.



5. To change the Messages Notice setting, press the up or down arrow to highlight the desired option: Block or Display.





Reviewing messages

You can review your messages directly in the Message Notice preference.

To review your messages:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Messages category.

The right side of the screen displays a summary of the current Messages settings.

— If the Messages category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Messages category will expand to display the Message Notice preference item.

3. If necessary, press the down arrow to highlight the Message Notice preference.

The right side of the screen displays the current Message Notice setting (for example, Block).

If any messages are available, Passport Guide DVR will display them, itemized by date, directly beneath the Messages preference.

4. Press the down arrow to highlight a message date and heading, then press SELECT.



Passport Guide DVR displays the message content in the right pane.

5. Press the down arrow to display and review subsequent messages.

6. If you wish to delete a message, press the C key.

Passport Guide DVR requests a confirmation. Press SELECT again to confirm delete.




Set t ing Parenta l Contro l preferences

Parental Control preferences are discussed in detail in “Using Parental Control” on page 247.

The following table lists Parental Control preferences and includes references to additional information.

Parenta l Contro l Preference

References

Locking Status — “Turning on Parental Control from the General Settings menu” on page 293

— “Turning off Parental Control until you power off the set-top box” on page 296

Change PIN — “Establishing a Parental Control PIN” on page 249

— “Changing the PIN” on page 251

— “Turning off Parental Control until you manually reactivate it” on page 301

Locked Channels — “Locking channels” on page 255

— “Unlocking channels” on page 258

Locked Ratings — “Locking ratings” on page 260

— “Unlocking ratings” on page 264

Locked Content — “Hiding adult titles” on page 280

Locked Time — “Locking time periods” on page 272

— “Canceling locked time periods” on page 275

Hide Adult Titles — “Hiding adult titles” on page 280

— “Displaying adult titles” on page 284

— “Hiding or displaying adult titles by using the Parental Control Locking Status” on page 287



Timers

Passport Guide DVR enables you set various timer preferences, including a sleep timer, power-on timer, power-off timer, and a reminder timer.

Act ivat ing or deact ivat ing the s leep t imer

Passport Guide DVR lets you set a sleep timer. The sleep timer turns off the set-top box after a specified number of minutes.

You can also use the Quick Settings to set the sleep timer as described in “Activating or deactivating the sleep timer” on page 143.

To set the sleep timer:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Timers category.

The right side of the screen displays a summary of the current Timers settings.

— If the Timers category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Timers category will expand to display various preference items (Sleep Timer, Power-On Timer, Power-Off Timer, and Reminder Timer).

3. If necessary, press the down arrow to highlight the Sleep Timer preference.

The right side of the screen displays the current setting (for example, Off).



4. To change the current sleep timer setting, press SELECT to display the Status column.


— To activate the sleep timer, press the down arrow to highlight On.

— The right side of the screen displays the current setting, which indicates the number of minutes until the set-top box turns off (if the sleep timer is activated).

— To de-activate the sleep timer, press the down arrow to highlight Off, then press SELECT.

6. To modify the duration of the sleep timer, set its Status to On, then press the right arrow to display the Minutes column. Press the up or down arrow to select the desired number of minutes (5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, or 90).



7. Press SELECT to accept the settings.



Sett ing the power-on t imer

The power-on timer enables you to set a time of day when the set-top box will turn on automatically. For example, some people like to use this feature to make their house appear lived-in for security reasons while they are on vacation.

The power-on timer turns on the power to the set-top box each day at a time you specify.

To set the power-on timer, use the Power-On Timer preference in the General Settings menu as described in the following procedure. (For information about the power-off timer, refer to “Setting the power-off timer” on page 202.)

Note: The Power-On Timer preference overrides the power-on channel. When the set-top box turns on, it will display the channel specified for the power-on timer. If two recordings are in progress when you power-on the set-top box and the TV, Passport Guide DVR will override the power-on timer channel and instead display the channel that first started recording.

To set the Power-On Timer:






— If the Timers category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Timers category will expand to display various preference items (for example, Sleep Timer, Power-On Timer, etc.).



3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Power-On Timer preference.


4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Status column.

5. Press the down arrow to select On.

6. Press the right arrow to display the Channels column.

7. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the channel you want your television to display when you turn on the set-top box.



8. Press the right arrow to move to the Day column.

9. Press the up or down arrow to select the day you want the set-top box to turn on.

You can specify a date, a recurring weekday such as Tuesdays, a recurring sequence of days such as weekdays or weekends, or Every day.

10. Press the right arrow to move to the Time column.

Passport Guide DVR highlights the hour digit indicating when you want the set-top box to turn on.

11. Press the up or down arrow or the number key(s) to select the hour.

12. Press the right arrow to move to the next digit.

Passport Guide DVR highlights the first minute digit.

13. Press the up or down arrow or a number key to select the first minute digit.


Passport Guide DVR highlights the second minute digit.

15. Press the up or down arrow or a number key to select the second minute digit.

16. Press the right arrow.

Passport Guide DVR highlights the ‘a’ or ‘p,’ indicating whether you want the set-top box to turn on in the AM or PM.



17.To select PM, press the down arrow to highlight ‘p.’ To select AM, press the up arrow to highlight ‘a.’

18. Press SELECT to accept.


Sett ing the power-of f t imer

The power-off timer works in conjunction with the power-on timer.

The power-on timer enables you to set a time of day for the set-top box to turn on automatically.

The power-off timer enables you to set a time of day when the set-top box will turn off automatically.

Note: Scheduled recordings are unaffected when the power timer turns off the set-top box.

To set the power-off timer, use the Power-Off Timer preference in the General Settings menu as described in the following procedure. (For more information about the power-on timer, refer to “Setting the power-on timer” on page 199.)

To set the power-off timer:









3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Power-Off Timer preference.


4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Status column.

5. Press the down arrow to highlight On.

6. Press the right arrow to display the Day column.

7. Press the up or down arrow to select the day you want the set-top box to turn off.

You can specify a date, a recurring week day such as Tuesdays, a recurring sequence of days such as weekdays or weekends, or Every day.


Passport Guide DVR highlights the hour digit indicating when you want the set-top box to turn off.

9. Press the up or down arrow or the number key(s) to select the hour.










Passport Guide DVR highlights the ‘a’ or ‘p,’ indicating whether you want the set-top box to turn off in the AM or PM.

15. To select PM, press the down arrow to highlight ‘p.’ To select AM, press the up arrow to highlight ‘a.’



Set t ing a reminder t imer

A reminder timer enables you to set a timer to remind you when a particular program is going to air. It has no affect on recording.

You can set up to eight Reminder Timers.

One minute before the program begins, Passport Guide DVR will display a reminder alert banner, as shown below.

To set a reminder timer:









3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Press the down arrow to highlight the Reminder Timer preference.

The right side of the screen displays the current setting (for example, New...).

Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Channels column.

Press the up or down arrow or number key(s) to highlight the channel on which the program is broadcast.

Press the right arrow to move to the Day column.

Press the up or down arrow to highlight the day(s) on which the program is broadcast.

You can specify a date, a recurring weekday such as Tuesdays, a recurring sequence of days such as weekdays or weekends, or Every day.




Passport Guide DVR highlights the hour digit indicating when the program is broadcast.

9. Press the up or down arrow or number key(s) to select the hour.








Passport Guide DVR highlights the ‘a’ or ‘p,’ indicating whether the desired program is broadcast in the AM or PM.

15. To select PM, press down arrow to highlight ‘p.’ To select AM, press the up arrow to highlight ‘a.’

16. Press SELECT to accept the time you set for the program reminder.





Modi fy ing a reminder t imer

You can modify a reminder timer by using the Reminder Timer preference.

To modify a reminder timer from the General Settings menu:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Reminder Timer you wish to modify (for example, Reminder Timer 1, Reminder Timer 2, etc.).

The right side of the screen displays the channel number, call letters, day, date and time for the reminder timer you highlighted.




5. Press the right arrow to move to the column you want to modify, then press the up or down arrow to change the setting.

6. Press SELECT to accept the modified setting.



Cancel ing a reminder t imer

You can cancel a reminder timer by using the Reminder Timers preference.

You can also cancel a reminder timer from the Program Guide. For more information, see “Canceling a reminder timer from the Program Guide” on page 127.

To cancel a reminder timer from the General Settings menu:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Reminder Timer you wish to cancel (for example, Reminder Timer 1, Reminder Timer 2, etc.).

The right side of the screen displays the channel number, call letters, day, date and time for the reminder timer you highlighted.



4. Press the C key.

Passport Guide DVR cancels the specified reminder timer.




Schedul ing record ings f rom a remote locat ion

Passport Guide DVR allows viewers to schedule recordings of programs from a remote location using an Internet web interface.

The Remote Recording preference in the General Settings enables viewers to enable or disable this Passport Guide DVR feature.

To enable or disable remote recording:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Remote Recording category.

— If the Remote Recording category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Remote Recording category will expand to display and highlight its only preference item (for example, Remote Recording).

The right side of the screen displays the current Remote Recording setting (for example, Disabled).

3. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move the highlight to the Options column.

4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight one of the following options:

— Enable

— Disable



— If you wish to enable remote recording, select Enable.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following screen, indicating that Remote Recording is pending.

• Press SELECT to view the registration key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Enable Remote Record dialog, which lists the registration key that you will need to enable remote recording. Follow the instructions on the Enable Remote Record dialog.

— If you wish to disable remote recording, select Disable.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following confirmation screen.

• Press the A key to confirm the request and disable Remote Recording,

-or

• Press the C key to cancel the request.



Sett ing purchas ing preferences

The Purchasing preference category includes preferences for Pay-Per-View (PPV) purchases.

The following table lists Purchasing preferences and includes references to additional information.

Purchasing preferences are discussed in detail in “Purchasing Pay-Per-View (PPV) Programs” on page 303.

Purchas ing Preference References

Locking Status — “Establishing a Purchase PIN” on page 305

Change PIN — “Changing the Purchase PIN” on page 311

PPV Purchases — “Canceling PPV purchases from General Settings” on page 327, or

— “Checking the status of PPV programs” on page 325



Language

Passport Guide DVR enables you to set preferences for language features, including Secondary Audio Program, Descriptive Video, Closed Captioning, Display text (user interface text), and Subtitles.

Depending on your cable operator, options may include English, Spanish, French and Portuguese.

Consequently, you may see the Language preference listed as for example, Language/Idioma (if the second language is Spanish) or Language/Langue (if the second language is French), depending on the secondary language.

Similarly, the Display preference may appear as Display/Mostrar. (For more information, see “Specifying the language for user interface display text” on page 221.)

Activating and deactivating the Secondary Audio Program (SAP)

The Audio preference in the General Settings menu enables you to listen to an alternative audio track (such as a different language or a director’s narration) for programs that feature a secondary audio program (SAP).

Note: SAP is available only if it is broadcast for a program. When SAP is available, the program description in the Program Guide displays the SAP icon

You can also activate or disable secondary audio programming using the Quick Settings. For more information, refer to “Activating or deactivating secondary audio” on page 142.

To activate secondary audio:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Language category.

The right side of the screen displays a summary of the current Language settings.

— If the Language category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Language category will expand to display various preference items (for example, Audio, Descriptive Video, Closed Captioning, Display and Subtitles).

.



3.

4.

If necessary, press the down arrow to highlight Audio.

The right side of the screen displays the current Audio setting (for example, Alternate [SAP]).

Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Options column.

Passport Guide DVR displays two options:

— Primary

— Alternate [SAP]

5. To activate the secondary audio program, press the down arrow to highlight Alternate [SAP].

To deactivate the secondary audio program and utilize the Primary audio program, press the up arrow to highlight Primary.






Set t ing up and us ing descr ipt ive v ideo

Descriptive Video enables you to hear descriptions of important visual elements that are relevant to understanding the plot or action of a television program. The descriptions are typically heard during pauses in speech and scripted dialogue.

Descriptive Video is intended to make television programs more accessible to blind and other visually-impaired persons.

Note: This feature is head-end configurable and may not be available on all set-top boxes.

To set the Descriptive Video option:









3. Press the down arrow to highlight Descriptive Video.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Options column.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following options. A dot indicates the current setting.

— Off

— On when available

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight On when available.

Note: If you set the Descriptive Video preference to On when available, Passport Guide DVR will use a Descriptive Video track, regardless of other language preference settings.


Descriptive Video will now be activated during television programs that support this feature.




Set t ing the c losed capt ion ing opt ion

Closed Captioning enables you to view text for the dialog and other audio events (such as sound effects).

To set the closed captioning option:









3. Press the down arrow to highlight Closed Captioning.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Options column.

Press the up or down arrow to highlight On/Off.

Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the State column.

To enable Closed Captioning, highlight On, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR returns to the Options column.

Do one of the following:

— If you wish to configure Analog Service, proceed to the next step.

— If you wish to configure only Digital Service (and skip Analog Service), proceed to step 12.

— If you wish to exit, proceed to step 19.



9. To configure Analog Service, press the down arrow to highlight Analog Service.

10. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the State column. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the type of service desired. The options include CC 1, CC 2, CC 3, CC 4, Text 1, Text 2, Text 3, or Text 4).

11. Press SELECT to accept your configuration.


— If you wish to configure Digital Services, proceed to the next step.

— If you wish to exit, press the EXIT key.

12. To configure Digital Service, if necessary return to the Options column by pressing the left arrow.


13. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Digital Service option.

14. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the State column. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the type of service desired. The options include Automatic, Primary, Secondary, DTV CC 3, DTV CC 4, DTV CC 5 and DTV CC 6.





16.Do one of the following:

— To configure the Text or Background options (for your Digital Service), proceed to the next step.

— To exit (and use the Text or Background defaults), press the EXIT key.

17. Press the up or down arrow to highlight one of the following Text or Background options, then press SELECT or the right arrow.

Note: These options are for Digital Service only. The table following this procedure provides additional information on these options.

— Text Style: Standard, Plain, Plain (set-width), Formal, Formal (setwidth), Casual, Cursive, Small Caps

— Text Size: Standard, Small, Medium, Large

— Text Color: Standard, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta

— Text Opacity: Standard, Solid, Translucent, Transparent, Flashing

— Background Color: Standard, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta

— Background Opacity: Standard, Solid, Translucent, Transparent, Flashing



— To configure another Digital Service Text or Background option, return to step 17. Repeat until all desired options are configured.


Opt ion E f fect

Text Style The style (font type) of the displayed text.

The options marked as “set width” use monospaced fonts.

Text Size The font size of the displayed text.

Text Color The color of the displayed text.

Be sure to set the text color and background color to different colors.

Text Opacity The opacity of the displayed text (opacity versus transparency).

Background Color The color of the background of the caption box.

Be sure to set the text color and background color to different colors.

Background Opacity The opacity of the background (visibility of the image displayed behind the caption box).



Spec i fy ing the language for user inter face d isp lay text

You can use the General Settings menu to specify the language for the text that appears in menus and screens in the Passport Guide DVR user interface.

You can choose from English, Spanish (Español), French (Francaise) or Portuguese (Português) -- depending on the options made available by your cable operator.

Consequently, you may see the Display preference listed as, for example, Display/Mostrar (if the second language is Spanish).

To specify the language for the user interface text:






— If the Language/Idioma category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Language category will expand to display various preference items (for example, Audio, Descriptive Video, Closed Captioning, Display and Subtitles).

3. Press the down arrow repeatedly to highlight the Display option.



4.

5.

6.

7.

Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Language column.

Press the up or down arrow to highlight the desired language (for example, Spanish/Español).

Press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the user interface text in the specifiedlanguage and returns to the Preference column.

Note: The change to a new user interface display language may take a few minutes to take effect.

To exit the General Settings menu, press the EXIT key.



Spec i fy ing the language for subt i t les

You can use the General Settings menu to specify the language for the text that appears in subtitles.

You may be able to choose between English, Spanish, Portuguese, or French, depending on options that may be made available by your cable operator.

To specify the subtitle language:







3. Press the down arrow repeatedly to highlight Subtitles.



4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Options column.

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the desired setting from the following options:

— On (Subtitles will be displayed with video.)

— Off (No subtitles will be displayed.)

6. If you select On, press the right arrow to move to the Language column.

7. Press the down arrow to highlight the language you want to use for subtitles (English, Spanish, Portuguese, or French).

8. Press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR will now display subtitles in the selected language. Passport Guide DVR returns to the Preferences column.




Audio/v ideo set t ings

Passport Guide DVR enables you to set various preferences related to audio and video output, including Video Output Format and Audio Settings. (The Audio Settings preference includes Volume Level, Analog Output, Digital Output and Dynamic Range).

Sett ing the v ideo output format

Regardless of the original format of a video stream, Passport Guide DVR can send digital video from the HD Output port of the set-top box to your television in one of five Output Formats using a variety of format options. Refer to the table below.

Output Format

Reso lut ion (width) Scanning Aspect

Rat io Format Opt ions

1080i Wide 1080 interlaced Wide (16:9) Sidebar 4:3 Pic

Stretch 4:3 Pic

Preserve 4:3 Pic - 480p

Preserve 4:3 Pic - 480i

720p Wide 720 progressive Wide (16:9)

480p Wide 480 progressive Wide (16:9)

480p Standard 480 progressive Standard (4:3) Zoom 16:9 Pic

Letterbox 16:9 Pic 480i Standard 480 interlaced Standard (4:3)

The composite port on the set-top box always outputs video in 480i format.

Scanning technique

Progressive (p) scanning produces a picture signal with twice as many scan lines as conventional interlaced (i) video.

Format opt ions

Because a source video stream can have an aspect ratio for wide screens (16:9) or standard screens (4:3) that may not conform to the aspect ratio of the Output Format you select, you can choose from a set of format options that define how non-conforming video will be output from the set-top box (see Available Format Options, above).

For example, if a 480i source video stream (which has a 4:3 aspect ratio) is received by your set-top box, and you have set the Output Format to 1080i (which has a 16:9 aspect ratio), you can choose to:

• Sidebar or Stretch the video stream to fit into the 16:9 aspect ratio and output the video at 1080i, or

• Preserve the 4:3 aspect ratio by outputting it in 480p or 480i formats (which have 4:3 aspect ratios).

To optimize viewing, you must select an output format and option that are appropriate for your set-top box and television.



Refer to your television’s owner’s manual to determine the formats supported by your television.

To set the video output format:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Audio/Video category.

The right side of the screen displays a summary of the current Audio/Video settings.

— If the Audio/Video category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Audio/ Video category will expand to display Video Output and Audio Settings preferences.

3. If necessary, press the down arrow to highlight Video Output Format.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Format column.




5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight an output formats:

— 1080i Wide

— 720p Wide

— 480p Wide

— 480p Standard

— 480i Standard

Note: Refer to your television’s owner’s manual and the table above to determine the appropriate formats. (The standard 4:3 setting is 480i.)


Passport Guide DVR displays a dot next to the format you selected, and displays the options available for that format.

7. Press the up or down arrow to select a format option:

— Sidebar 4:3 Pic

— Stretch 4:3 Pic

— Preserve 4:3 Pic - 480p

— Preserve 4:3 Pic - 480i

— Zoom 16:9 Pic

— Letterbox 16:9 Pic

Note: Passport Guide DVR may display a subset of the above settings, depending on your format selection. Refer to your television’s owner’s manual and the table above to determine the appropriate options.



8. Press SELECT to request a change to the new format and option.

Passport Guide DVR displays a message (similar to the screen below) warning of the change.

9. Press SELECT to change to the new format and option.

Passport Guide DVR may display a timer (below).

Passport Guide DVR will revert to the previous format if you do not press the A key within 15 seconds.

Note: If the new format or option is not supported by your television, video and menus may not be visible on your TV. (Therefore, if you selected a format that is not supported by your television, this message graphic will not be visible.)

10. Press the A key within 15 seconds to confirm the change to the new format or option.

Note: If you do not want to change to the new format or option, press the C key to cancel.

Passport Guide DVR then returns to the Preferences list.




Sett ing the audio leve l

You can set the audio output via Passport Guide DVR to Fixed or Variable.

• Fixed: Select this option to set the audio to a high level that is appropriate for output to a stereo audio receiver. (Note: If you set this option to Fixed, it will be overridden and changed to Variable when you adjust the volume level on the remote control.)

• Variable: Select this option if you want to control the audio volume level using the remote control for the set-top box.

Certain set-top boxes feature a fixed audio output port. These set-top boxes are not affected by the audio volume setting described below.

To set the audio volume:






— If the Audio/Video category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Audio/ Video category will expand to display various preference items.

3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Audio Settings preference.

The right side of the screen displays the current Audio Settings.



4. Press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the various types of audio settings in the Settings column. Volume Level is highlighted.

5. To change the Volume Level setting, press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays two options in the Options column:

— Fixed

— Variable


6. Press the up or down arrow to highlight one of the options.






Sett ing the analog channel audio output

You can choose among Mono, Stereo or Surround Sound for your analog channels.

To specify mono, stereo, or surround sound:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Audio Settings preference.

The right side of the screen displays the current Audio Settings (for example, Variable, Mono, Pulse Code Modulated, Medium).



4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Settings column.

Passport Guide DVR displays four types of audio settings: Volume Level, Analog Output, Digital Output, and Dynamic Range.

5. Press the down arrow to highlight Analog Output, then press SELECT or the right arrow.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Options column.

6. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the desired option:

— Mono

— Stereo

— Surround Sound


Passport Guide DVR returns to the Settings column.


Alternatively, you could press the left arrow to return to the Preferences list.



Sett ing the d ig i ta l channel audio output

You can select the following options for your digital channel audio. Refer to your television’s owner’s manual to determine the correct setting.

Dig i ta l Audio opt ion Funct ion

Pulse Code Modulated PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) is the native/default format for digital output.

Dolby Digital Use this option if you have a unit that can receive and decode Dolby Digital output.

To specify the digital channel audio:







3. If necessary, press the down arrow to highlight Audio Settings.

The right side of the screen displays the current Audio Settings (for example, Variable, Mono, Pulse Code Modulated and Wide).



4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Settings column.

Passport Guide DVR displays four types of audio settings:

— Volume Level

— Analog Output

— Digital Output

— Dynamic Range

5. Press the down arrow to highlight Digital Output, then press SELECT or the right arrow.



— Pulse Code Modulated

— Dolby Digital (AC3)







Sett ing the dynamic range

If your television receives both analog and digital channels, you may notice volume variances when you switch between these two types of channels. The Dynamic Range preference lets you specify compression for digital channels to avoid these volume variances. Audio compression limits the highs and lows while boosting the volume slightly or dramatically. You can choose Wide, Medium or Narrow.

Dynam ic rang e op t ion Funct i on

Wide Plays the entire audio dynamic range (low and high volume).

Medium Slightly boosts quieter audio.

Narrow Dramatically boosts quieter audio while limiting high volume audio

Note: Whether or not you can change this option depends on your cable operator. This option may not be visible on your television system.

To specify the dynamic range for your digital channels:









3.

4.

5.

If necessary, press the down arrow to highlight Audio Settings.

The right side of the screen displays the current Audio Settings (for example, Variable, Mono, Pulse Code Modulated and Medium).

Press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Settings column.

Passport Guide DVR displays four types of audio settings: Volume Level, Analog Output, Digital Output, and Dynamic Range.

Press the down arrow to highlight Dynamic Range, then press SELECT or the right arrow.





— Wide

— Medium

— Narrow







Accessor ies

Passport Guide DVR enables you to control preferences for various accessories including AC Outlet Use, RF Output, Set-top Clock and Settop Box Name.

Sett ing AC out let use

Certain set-top boxes feature an AC outlet on the rear panel.

If you plug the TV power cable into this outlet, you can turn the TV and the set-top box off as a unit. (However, depending on your model of TV, when you turn the set-top box back on, you may need to turn on the TV using its remote control or its manual On button.)

You can also set Passport Guide DVR so that the AC outlet is always off, always on, or turns on with the set-top box. To do so, adjust the AC Outlet Use preference in the General Settings menu.

Note: Some TV models may take a long time to warm up if they are plugged into the set-top box’s AC outlet. In such cases, it is better to set the AC Outlet Use preference so that the outlet is always on and turn the TV off manually with the remote. You can also plug the TV into a wall outlet. To use the remote to control the TV, the remote must be programmed for the specific TV model. For more information, refer to the instructions for your remote control.

You can select one of the following options for the AC outlet on the set-top box.

Note: Certain set-top boxes that feature an AC outlet are not switchable. These set-top boxes are not affected by the settings described below.

AC Out let Use opt ion Funct ion

Always On The AC outlet power stays on when the set-top box is off.

Always Off The AC outlet power stays off regardless of whether the set-top box is on or off. For safety reasons, this option is recommended when you do not use the AC outlet.

On with Settop The AC outlet power turns on when you turn on the set-top box; the AC outlet power turns off when you turn off the set-top box.

To set the AC outlet use:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Accessories category.



The right side of the screen displays a summary of the current Accessories settings.

— If the Accessories category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Accessories category will expand to display various preference items (for example, AC Outlet Use, RF Output and Set-top Clock).

3. If necessary, press the down arrow to highlight AC Outlet Use.

The right side of the screen displays the current setting for the AC Outlet Use preferences (for example, Always On).

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Modes column.


5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the desired AC Outlet Use option:

— Always Off

— Always On

— On with Settop

6. Press SELECT to accept the selection.





Sett ing the RF output

You can output RF (Radio Frequency) from Passport Guide DVR on a selected channel (either Channel 3 or 4), then set your TV to that channel.

To set the RF output:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Accessories category.


— If the Accessories category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Accessories category will expand to display various preference items (for example, AC Outlet Use, RF Output and Set-top Clock).

3. Press the down arrow to highlight RF Output.

The right side of the screen displays the current RF output channel (for example, Channel 4).

4. To change the RF Channel, press SELECT or the right arrow to display the RF Channel column.



5. Press the up or down arrow to select a channel: Channel 3 or Channel 4.

6. Press SELECT to accept the channel setting.



Note: Until you set an RF Output channel, Passport Guide DVR will use the default setting from the Application Server.

Sett ing set- top c lock opt ions

You can use Passport Guide DVR to configure whether the front panel LED of the set-top box displays the time of day when the set-top box is turned off.

Alternatively, you can configure the set-top box so that the LED display remains off when the set-top box is off.

You can choose from three display options (Show Time Always, Show Channel Always, or Show Channel When Tuning) for when the set-top box is on.

To do so, choose from the following options in the General Settings menu.

Clock opt ion Funct ion

Display Specifies a display option for when the set-top box is on:

— Show Time Always

— Show Channel Always

— Show Channel When Tuning

Illumination Specifies whether the front panel LEDs remain visible when the set-top box is turned off.

To set the set-top clock options:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Accessories category.


— If the Accessories category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Accessories category will expand to display various preferences (for example, AC Outlet Use, RF Output and Set-top Clock).



3. Press the down arrow to highlight Set-top Clock.

The right side of the screen displays the current setting (for example, Show Channel Always, Always On).

4. Press the right arrow to move to the Options column.

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight a clock option (Display or Illumination).

— If you select Illumination, proceed to step 10.

— If you select Display, proceed to the next step.


Passport Guide DVR moves to the State column.




— Show Time Always

— Show Channel Always

— Show Channel when Tuning: The set-top box LED displays the channel number when you change channels. Otherwise, it displays the time of day.

8. Press SELECT to accept the highlighted option.

Passport Guide DVR returns to the Options column. The front panel LED of the set-top box reflects your selection.

9. Choose one of the following:

— To exit, press the EXIT key.

— To change the Illumination options, press the down arrow to highlight Illumination.


Passport Guide DVR moves to the State column.



11. Press the up or down arrow to highlight one of the following options:

— Always On: The set-top box LEDs will be displayed even when the box is powered off.

— On/Off with Set-top: The set-top box LEDs will be displayed only when the set-top box is powered on.

12. Press SELECT to accept the highlighted option.



Alternatively, press the left arrow to return to the Preferences list.



Ass ign ing names to opt iona l c l ient set- top boxes

In a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom DVR application home video network, you can use additional “Client” non-DVR set-top boxes with your Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box.

For example, you may wish to place a Client set-top box in your kitchen or bedroom so that you can watch recorded shows from those locations in your home.

Client set-top boxes enable you to watch all of the programs available from your cable operator on Live TV, just as you would with your Passport Guide DVR set-top box. You can also watch (and pause, rewind, fast forward, etc.) programs that have been recorded to your digital video recorder’s (DVR) hard disk.

For more information on assigning names to set-top boxes in a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network, please see “Assigning names to Passport Guide DVR Clients and Passport Guide DVR Servers” on page 533.


7


Using Parental Control

This chapter explains how to use the Passport Guide DVR Parental Control features. This chapter includes the following main sections:

• “About Parental Control” on page 248

• “Establishing a Parental Control PIN” on page 249

• “Changing the PIN” on page 251

• “Selecting a locked channel while Parental Control is enabled” on page 253

• “Playing a locked recorded show while Parental Control is enabled” on page 254

• “Turning Parental Control off: Auto or manual relock” on page 254

• “Selecting Parental Control settings” on page 255

• “Locking channels” on page 255

• “Locking ratings” on page 260

• “Locking content” on page 267

• “Locking time periods” on page 272

• “Hiding adult titles” on page 280

• “Activating Parental Control” on page 290

• “Turning off Parental Control” on page 295


Chapte r 7—Us ing Paren ta l Con t ro l

About Parenta l Contro l

Passport Guide DVR Parental Control enables you to restrict the viewing of certain channels, ratings, content and time periods. For example, you can use Parental Control if you do not want your children to watch certain channels or programs that are intended for mature audiences, or if you want to restrict TV viewing at certain times, such as late in the evening.

You can also use the Parental Control Hide Adult Titles preference to block or omit program titles and descriptions of adult-oriented programs from appearing in several places in the user interface, including the Program Guide Time Grid, Theme view, or Channel List view; on the Recorded Shows, Scheduled Recordings, or Series Manager screens; in the Info Banner or Channel Banner; or on Pay-Per-View channels.

You can also omit adult titles from results returned by either title or keyword search requests.

In addition, on ShowRunner VOD channels, Passport Guide DVR will block from display any poster art for shows that are subject to Parental Control restrictions.

Note: For more information on hiding titles, see “Hiding adult titles” on page 280.

Note: If Parental Control is enabled, recorded programs that have been locked will be accessible only after you key in a PIN to disable Parental Control.

There are two ways to use the Parental Control feature:

• If you have not yet established a Parental Control PIN, you can do so before you make any Parental Control settings by using the Change PIN option. (For more information, see “Establishing a Parental Control PIN” on page 249.) After you have established a PIN, you can set locks for certain channels, ratings, content advisories, or time periods, and decide whether to hide adult-oriented program titles and descriptions as well. Then, you can turn on the Parental Control Locking Status to activate all of your lock settings.

• You can first specify lock settings (for the channels, ratings, content advisories, or time periods that you want to lock) and specify whether you want to lock adult-oriented program titles and descriptions. You can then turn on Parental Control. At that point, Passport Guide DVR will request your Parental Control PIN.

When Parental Control is turned on, all the channels, ratings, content advisories, and time periods you specified are locked. You must enter a PIN to view locked programs and channels.



Establ ish ing a Parenta l Contro l PIN

When Parental Control is turned on, you must enter your Parental Control PIN to view locked items.

The first time you attempt to turn on (enable) Parental Control from the General Settings or Quick Settings menus, Passport Guide DVR will request that you establish a PIN.

You can change your Parental Control PIN by using the Change PIN preference in the General Settings menu. For more information, see “Changing the PIN” on page 251.

To establish a Parental Control PIN for the first time:

1. Try to turn on Parental Control from the General Settings or Quick Settings menus.

For more information, see “Activating Parental Control from the Quick Settings menu” on page 291 or “Turning on Parental Control from the General Settings menu” on page 293.

Passport Guide DVR displays an initial PIN set up dialog.

2. Press the A key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the PIN Entry dialog.

3. Key in the four digits that you want to establish as your Parental Control PIN.

Passport Guide DVR displays a second PIN Entry dialog that requests that you key in the PIN again to confirm it.



4.

5.

Key in the four digits of your new PIN again.

— If you began this procedure from the Quick Settings, Passport Guide DVR displays a PIN Entry message stating that: All Channel, Time, Rating, and Content Blocks are now active.

— If you began this procedure from the General Settings menu, Passport Guide DVR displays a PIN Entry message stating that: Parental Control is now Enabled. PIN entry is now required to disable Parental Control or to change your settings.

Press the A key to confirm.

Your Parental Control PIN is now established.



Changing the PIN

When Parental Control is turned on, you must enter your Parental Control PIN to view locked items.

You can change your Parental Control PIN by using the Change PIN preference in the General Settings menu.

Note: It is advisable to change your locking PIN from time to time to prevent unauthorized viewers from learning your PIN.

To change the Parental Control PIN:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Parental Control category.

The screen displays the current Parental Control settings.

— If the Parental Control category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Parental Control category will expand to display various preference items.



3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Change PIN preference, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR requests your current Parental Control PIN.

4. Key in the four digits of your current Parental Control PIN.

Passport Guide DVR requests your new Parental Control PIN.

5. Key in the four digits of your new Parental Control PIN.

Passport Guide DVR requests that you key in the new PIN again to confirm it.

6. Key in the four digits of your new Parental Control PIN again.

A message confirms that a new Parental Control PIN has been set.

7. Press the A key to confirm.

The new Parental Control PIN is now set.




Selecting a locked channel while Parental Control is enabled

If you select a program that is broadcast on a locked channel, Passport Guide DVR displays a message indicating that the channel is locked.

type of block

The message panel includes a top line that indicates why the program is locked (that is, the type of block engaged) by highlighting the text and lock icon for Time, Rating, Channel, or Content.

To select a locked channel while Parental Control is enabled:

1. If you wish to disable Parental Control, press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR will display a dialog asking if want to unlock only the current program’s channel, or all channels.

2. Specify your preference by pressing the A or B key.

Passport Guide DVR requests your Parental Control PIN:

3. Enter your four-digit Parental Control PIN.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following dialog and unlocks the channel(s).



Play ing a locked recorded show whi le Parenta l Contro l i s enabled

If you attempt to play back a recorded program (Recorded Show), and its rating exceeds (that is, is “worse” than) the criteria you established by using the Locked Ratings preference in the General Setting menu, or if the recorded show is blocked by a Locked Channel or a content advisory, Passport Guide DVR will display a dialog asking if you want to unlock only the current recorded show, or all channels (see figure below). Specify your preference by pressing the A or B key. Passport Guide DVR will unlock the program(s) or channel(s).

Note: Please note that the option A: This recording ... enables you to unlock only one show at a time. If you attempt to unlock a second show, the first show will be locked automatically.

Turning Parenta l Contro l o f f : Auto or manual re lock

When you use the General Settings to turn off Parental Control, you can choose to have it turned off until you re-activate it manually, or to have it automatically relock when you turn the set-top box off and back on. For more information, see “Turning off Parental Control” on page 295.

The following sections describe how to specify locking settings, turn Parental Control on or off, and change the Parental Control PIN.



Select ing Parenta l Contro l set t ings

To set up Parental Control, you need to specify the channels, ratings, content advisories and time periods you want to lock, and whether you want to block adult-oriented program titles. Once you have specified the locking settings, you can then activate Parental Control.

While Parental Control is activated, you may be required to first disable Parental Control before you can view locked titles, programs, or channels.

Lock ing channels

Passport Guide DVR enables you to lock channels to prevent other household members from viewing the programs that are broadcast on those channels.

If a program is broadcast on a locked channel and you disable Parental Control, Passport Guide DVR offers you the option of unlocking only the channel that carries the program, or all channels.

You can lock channels by using the Locked Channels preference in the General Settings menu as described below.

You can also lock ratings, content advisory levels and time periods by using the General Settings menu. Once you have specified the locking settings, you must activate Parental Control for the channels, ratings, content advisory levels, and time periods to be locked from viewing. For a detailed overview of Parental Control, refer to “Selecting Parental Control settings” on page 255.

To lock channels:









3.

4.

Press the down arrow to highlight the Locked Channels preference.

Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Channels column.

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of locked channels.

Note: Channels that are currently locked are marked by either a closed lock or open lock icon.

The closed lock icon indicates that this The open lock icon

indicates that this channel is locked, but channel is locked and Parental Control is Parental Control is currently disabled. currently enabled.

5. Press the up or down arrow or the number key(s) to highlight the channel number and call letters of the channel you want to lock.




6. To lock the highlighted channel, press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR adds the channel to the list of LOCKED CHANNELS and displays a lock icon in the Channels column.

(If you want to remove the channel from the LOCKED CHANNELS list, press SELECT again.)

7. To lock additional channels, repeat steps 5 and 6.


Note: For information on activating Parental Control, refer to page 290.



Unlock ing channels

You can unlock channels that were previously locked. To do so, use the Locked Channels preference in the General Settings menu as described below.

To unlock a channel:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Locked Channels preference.


The LOCKED CHANNELS list shows which channels are currently locked.



In the Channels column, channels are marked with one of the following icons:

The closed lock icon indicates that thisThe open lock icon

indicates that this channel is locked, but channel is locked and Parental Control is Parental Control is currently disabled. currently enabled.


— If you want to unlock a specific channel, press the up or down arrow or the number key(s) to highlight the channel number and call letters of the channel you want to unlock. (Alternatively, you could specify the desired channel by pressing the number keys on the remote control.)

— If you want to unlock all channels at once, press the up or down arrow to highlight the Clear All option.

6. To unlock the highlighted channel (or to Clear All channels), press SELECT.


— Passport Guide DVR removes the channel from the list of locked channels and removes the lock icon from the Channels column. If so, skip to step 8.

— Passport Guide DVR requests your Parental Control PIN.

7. Key in the four digits of your Parental Control PIN.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following message.

8. Press the A key to acknowledge the new setting and return to the General Settings menu.

9. To unlock additional channels, return to step 5.





Lock ing rat ings

Passport Guide DVR enables you to lock ratings to prevent household members from viewing programs intended for mature audiences.

You can lock ratings by using the Locked Ratings preference in the General Settings menu as described below.

You can also lock channels, content advisory levels, and time periods by using the General Settings menu. Once you have specified the locking settings, you must activate Parental Control for the channels, ratings, content advisory levels, and time periods to be locked from viewing. For a detailed overview of Parental Control, refer to “Selecting Parental Control settings” on page 255.

The following table provides a description of each program rating. This table starts with ratings suitable for children and ends with ratings for mature audiences.

When you lock by rating, you lock from view all programs with content intended for more mature audiences. For example, if you lock the rating NA, programs at all ratings levels will be locked. If you lock the rating R, programs rated NC-17 and NR (Adult) will also be locked.

Rat ing Exp lanat ion

NA No rating information available.

TV-Y Program is appropriate for children of all ages, but is specifically designed for children ages 2 through 6.

TV-Y7 Program is appropriate for children age 7 and older.

NR (General) General Audience. This program is not rated.

G/TV-G General Audience. Program is appropriate for viewers of all ages.

PG/TV-PG Parental guidance suggested. The program contains material that parents may find inappropriate for young children.

PG-13 Parents Strongly Cautioned. The program contains material that parents may find inappropriate for children under 13 years of age.

TV-14 Parents Strongly Cautioned. The program contains some material that many parents would find unsuitable for children under 14 years of age. Parents are strongly urged to exercise greater care in monitoring this program and are cautioned against letting children under the age of 14 watch unattended. This program contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or intensely suggestive dialogue (D).

TV-MA Mature Audience Only. The program is specifically designed to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for children under 17 years of age. The program contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual activity (S), or crude indecent language (L).



Rat ing Exp lanat ion

R Restricted. Under 17 requires an accompanying parent or adult guardian.

NC-17 No one under 17 permitted. The program or movie is considered too adult (containing violence, sex, aberrational behavior, or drug use) for youngsters under 17.

NR (Adult) Not Rated — for Adults only. A stronger version of NC-17. The program or movie is considered too adult (containing violence, sex, aberrational behavior, or drug use) for youngsters under 17.

To lock ratings:









3. Press SELECT or the down arrow to highlight the Locked Ratings preference.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Ratings column.

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of ratings.

Note: A closed or open lock icon is displayed next to each rating that is currently locked. The right side of the display also lists all currently locked ratings.


indicates that this rating is locked, but rating is locked andParental Control is Parental Control iscurrently disabled. currently enabled.

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the rating you want to lock.

6. To lock the highlighted rating, press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR adds the rating(s) to the list of locked ratings.

Note: All ratings higher (that is, with content intended for more mature audiences) than the rating you locked are also automatically locked. For example, if you lock the rating R, you also automatically lock the ratings NC-17 and NR (Adult). However, if you do not wish to lock NC-17 and/or NR (Adult), you can unlock that particular rating. For more information, see “Unlocking ratings” on page 264.



7. To lock additional ratings, return to step 5.


Note: To activate Parental Control, refer to page 290.



Unlock ing rat ings

To unlock ratings that were previously locked, use the Locked Ratings preference in the General Settings menu.

You can unlock each rating one by one, or clear them all at the same time.

When you lock a rating, all ratings higher than the one you select are automatically locked also. Please note, however, that unlocking ratings does not work in the same way; you must unlock each rating individually.

To unlock ratings:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Locked Ratings preference.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Ratings column.

The locked rating list shows the ratings that are currently locked. In the Ratings column, locked ratings are marked by one of the following icons:




indicates that this rating is locked, but rating is locked and Parental Control is Parental Control is currently disabled. currently enabled.


— If you want to unlock a specific rating, press the up or down arrow to highlight the rating you want to unlock.

— If you want to unlock all ratings, press the up or down arrow tohighlight the Clear All option.

6. Press SELECT.


— The rating you selected is deleted from the locked ratings list and the lock icon is deleted from the Ratings column. (Note: All ratings are deleted from the locked ratings list if you selected the Clear All option). If so, skip to step 9.

— Passport Guide DVR requests your Parental Control PIN.


Passport Guide DVR displays the following message, indicating that all blocks are now disabled.



8. Press the A key to return to the General Settings menu.

9. To unlock additional ratings, return to step 5.





Lock ing content

Passport Guide DVR enables you to lock programs based on content advisories to prevent household members from viewing programs intended for mature audiences.

You lock specific program content using the Locked Content preference in the General Settings menu as described below.

You can also lock channels, ratings, and time periods by using the General Settings menu. Once you have specified the locking settings, you must activate Parental Control for the channels, ratings, content advisory levels, and time periods to be locked from viewing. For a detailed overview of Parental Control, refer to “Selecting Parental Control settings” on page 255.

The following table provides a description of each content advisory level.

When you lock programs by content, you lock from view all programs with content intended for more mature audiences. For example, if you lock the content advisory level “Violence (V)/Mild Violence,” all Violence (V) content advisory levels will be locked. If you lock the content advisory level “Sexual Situations (S)/Implied Sexual Situations,” all Sexual Situations (S) content advisory levels will be locked.

Content Adv isory Rat ings

(V) Violence

— Fantasy Violence

— Minimal Violence

— Moderate Violence

— Intense Violence

— Graphic Violence

(S) Sexual Situations

— Implied Sexual Situations

— Some Sexual Situations

— Intense Sexual Situations

— Explicit Sexual Activity

(D) Suggestive Dialog

— Mild Suggestive Dialog

— Some Suggestive Dialog

— Intensely Suggestive Dialog

— Explicit Dialog

(L) Adult Language

— Mild Language

— Infrequent Coarse Language

— Strong Coarse Language

— Crude Indecent Language



To lock programs based on content advisory levels:





The right side of the screen displays the current Parental Control settings.


3. Press SELECT or the down arrow to highlight the Locked Content preference.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Content column.

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of content advisories.

Note: A closed or open lock icon is displayed next to each content advisory level that is currently locked.

The closed lock icon indicates that a content The open lock icon

indicates that a content advisory is locked, but advisory is locked and Parental Control is Parental Control is currently disabled. currently enabled.



5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the content advisory level you want to lock.

6. To lock the highlighted content advisory, press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR adds a lock icon next to the selected content advisory level (and to content advisory levels that are more severe).

Note: All content advisories more severe (that is, with content intended for more mature audiences) than the content advisory you locked are also automatically locked. For example, if you lock the content advisory Mild Violence, you also automatically lock the content advisory Graphic Violence.

7. To lock additional content advisory levels, return to step 5.


Note: For information on how to activate Parental Control, refer to page 290.



Unlock ing content adv isor ies

To unlock content advisory levels that were previously locked, use the Locked Content preference in the General Settings menu.

You can unlock each content advisory level one by one, or unlock (clear) them all at the same time.

When you lock a content advisory level, all content advisory levels more severe than the one you select are automatically locked also. Please note, however, that unlocking content advisory levels does not work in the same way; you must unlock each content advisory level individually.

To unlock content advisory levels:





The right side of the screen displays the current Parental Control settings.


3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Locked Content preference.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Content column.

In the Content column, locked content advisory levels are marked by one of the following icons:

The closed lock icon indicates that a content The open lock icon

indicates that a content advisory level is locked, advisory level is locked but Parental Control is and Parental Control is currently disabled. currently enabled.




— If you want to unlock a specific content advisory level, press the up or down arrow to highlight the content advisory level you want to unlock.

— If you want to unlock all content advisory levels, press the up or down arrow to highlight the Clear All option.

6. Press SELECT.


— If Parental Control is disabled, the lock icon next to the content advisory level is deleted from the Content column. If so, skip to step 9.

Note: All content advisory levels are unlocked if you selected the Clear All option.

— If Parental Control is enabled, Passport Guide DVR requests your Parental Control PIN.

7. Key in the four digits of your PIN.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following message, indicating that all blocks are now disabled.

8. Press the A key to return to the General Settings menu.

9. To unlock additional content advisory levels, return to step 5.





Lock ing t ime per iods

Passport Guide DVR enables you to lock time periods so that household members can watch programs only during unlocked time periods.

You can lock time periods using the Locked Time preference in the General Settings menu as described below.

You can also lock channels, ratings, and content advisory levels by using the General Settings menu. Once you have specified the locking settings, you must activate Parental Control for the channels, ratings, content advisory levels and time periods to be locked from viewing. For a detailed overview of Parental Control, refer to “Selecting Parental Control settings” on page 255.

To lock time periods:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight a Locked Time preference.

(If locked times have already been set, there will be multiple options. Select Locked Time 1, Locked Time 2, etc., as desired.)




Passport Guide DVR moves the highlight to the Status column.

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight On.

6. Press the right arrow to move to the Day column.

7. Press the up or down arrow to select a day.

You can specify a specific day or date, a recurring weekday such as Tuesdays, a recurring sequence of days such as weekdays or weekends, or “Every” day.

8. Press the right arrow to move to the (Start) Time column, in which you can specify the beginning of a time period.

Passport Guide DVR highlights the hour.

9. Press the up or down arrow or the number key(s) to select the hour at which the time period begins.










Passport Guide DVR highlights the ‘a’ or ‘p,’ indicating whether you want to lock the program in the AM or PM.

15. To select PM, press the up or down arrow to highlight ‘p.’ To select AM, highlight ‘a.’

16. Press the right arrow to move to the (End) Time column.

Passport Guide DVR highlights the hour.

17. Press the up or down arrow or the number key(s) to select the hour at which the time period ends.








Passport Guide DVR highlights the ‘a’ or ‘p,’ indicating whether you want to lock the program in the AM or PM.

23. To select PM, press the up or down arrow to highlight ‘p.’ To select AM, highlight ‘a.’

24.When you have specified the time period, press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR adds a new preference in the Locked Time column with a number, for example Locked Time 1.

25. To specify additional time periods, return to step 3.

You can specify up to four time periods.

If you attempt to specify a fifth time period, Passport Guide DVR displays the following message on the right side of the screen:

Full - Delete an existing timer





Cancel ing locked t ime per iods

Passport Guide DVR enables you to cancel locked time periods.

(For information on how to lock time periods, see “Locking time periods” on page 272.)

To cancel a locked time period:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Locked Time number that you want to cancel (for example, Locked Time 1).



4. Press the C key.

One of the following things happen:

— If Parental Control is off, Passport Guide DVR removes the locked time (for example, Locked Time 4) from the Preferences column. If so, proceed to step 7.

— If Parental Control is on, Passport Guide DVR displays the following message:



6. Press the A key to acknowledge the new setting and return to the General Settings menu.

7. To cancel additional time periods, return to step 3.


Note: For information on how to activate Parental Control, refer to page 290.



Unlock ing or modi fy ing locked t ime per iods

You can unlock a Locked Time period, or modify its date and time range.

Please note that unlocking a specific locked time period is different from canceling a locked time period. (For more information on canceling a locked time period, see “Canceling locked time periods” on page 275.)

This procedure enables you to temporarily unlock a specific locked time period. You can return later to lock the period without having to again specify the time period. This is essentially the same as disabling Parental Control and leaving the automatic relock function turned on.

On the other hand, if you cancel a locked time period and later decide that you would like to relock the same time period, you must specify the date and time of the desired time period again from scratch.

To unlock or modify a time period:









3. Press the down arrow to highlight the locked time period that you want to unlock or modify (for example, Locked Time 1).

4. Press SELECT.

One of the following things will happen:

— If Parental Control is off, Passport Guide DVR displays the Status column. If so, skip to step 5.

— If Parental Control is on, Passport Guide DVR requests your Parental Control PIN.

— Key in the four digits of your Parental Control PIN.




— Press the A key to acknowledge the change in status.

Passport Guide DVR returns to the Status column of the Locked Time preference.

5. To unlock the time period, press the up or down arrow to highlight the Off setting, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR turns off the time period, but retains the time period information in case you choose to re-activate it later.

— For more information on how to modify the time period (that is, to specify a different day or to adjust the time period), refer to “Locking time periods” on page 272.

6. To unlock or modify additional time periods, return to step 3.





Hid ing adul t t i t les

The Hide Adult Titles preference lets you block or omit adult-oriented program titles and descriptions from appearing in several places in the user interface, including: • Program Guide Time Grid, Theme view, and Channel List view • Title or keyword search results • Passport Guide Integrated Search by title or keyword results • Recorded Shows • Scheduled Recordings • Series Manager • Info Banner • Channel Banner • Pay-Per-View channels

Passport Guide DVR will block or omit the program title and description if the program is rated for mature audiences or contains the content advisory “Sexually Explicit Content.”

This feature can help you prevent your family from being exposed to provocative titles.

If this feature is enabled, Passport Guide DVR will replace the adult program title and description with a “(Title Blocked)” indication in the Program Guide Time Grid and Channel List view.

In addition, if this feature is enabled, adult titles will be omitted from title and keyword search results, and from Theme view.

When enabled, the Hide Adult Titles preference also automatically adds NC-17 and NR (Adult) ratings to the Locked Ratings list.

(Title Blocked) indicator



The Hide Adult Titles preference features three settings:

Rating Explanation

Always With this setting, Hide Adult Titles is always enabled (regardless of whether Parental Control is on or off).

Adult titles will be replaced with a “Title Blocked” indicator in places such as the Program Guide Time Grid and Channel List view, and omitted from Theme view, as well as from title and keyword search results.

(See “To hide adult titles at all times:” on page 282.)

Never With this setting, Hide Adult Titles is never enabled (regardless of whether Parental Control is on or off). Adult titles may appear in the Program Guide or search results. (See “To disable the Hide Adult Titles setting (and display adult titles):” on page 284.)

Follow Parental Control

With this setting, Hide Adult Titles is enabled when Parental Control is on, and disabled when Parental Control is off. Adult titles may appear in the Program Guide or search results if Parental Control is turned off. (See “To manage the Hide Adult Titles preference by turning Parental Control on or off:” on page 287.)

For a detailed overview of Parental Control, refer to “Selecting Parental Control settings” on page 255.

If any of the following ratings apply to a program, Passport Guide DVR will block or omit the title if the Hide Adult Title preference is set to Always (or if it is set to Follow Parental Control and Parental Control is turned on).

• Rating “Adult” (“AO” per Tribune data)

• Rating “NC17”

• Rating “NR (Adult)”

• Rating “X”

• Category “Adult Series”

• Category “Adult Movie”

• Content Advisory “Strong Sexual Content”

• ShowRunner VOD programs if the genre is “Adult.”



Hid ing adul t t i t les a lways

The Always setting of the Hide Adult Titles preference lets you block or omit adult-oriented program titles and descriptions from appearing in several places in the user interface (including the Program Guide, title or keyword search results, Recorded Shows, Scheduled Recordings, Series Manager, Info Banner, Channel Banner and PPV channels) at all times, regardless of the current Parental Control setting.

To hide adult titles at all times:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Hide Adult Titles preference.

Passport Guide DVR displays the current setting.




Passport Guide DVR displays the following screen.

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Always.

With this setting, Hide Adult Titles is always enabled (regardless of whether Parental Control is on or off). Adult titles will be replaced with a “Title Blocked” indicator in the Program Guide, and omitted from Theme view, as well as from title and keyword search results.

6. Press SELECT to accept the new setting.





Disp lay ing adul t t i t les

The Hide Adult Titles preference lets you block or omit adult-oriented program titles and descriptions from appearing in several places in the user interface, including the Program Guide, title or keyword search results, Recorded Shows, Scheduled Recordings, Series Manager, Info Banner, Channel Banner and PPV channels. (For more information, see “Hiding adult titles” on page 280.)

If you have enabled the Hide Adult Titles preference and now wish to disable it (to permit the display of adult titles), follow the procedure below.

Note: When you set Hide Adult Titles to Always, Passport Guide DVR will automatically add NC-17 and NR (Adult) ratings to the Locked Ratings list. If you subsequently disable Hide Adult Titles by setting it to Never, programs rated NC-17 and NR (Adult) will remain on the Locked Ratings list until you remove them manually.

To disable the Hide Adult Titles setting (and display adult titles):






— If the Parental Control category is not expanded, press SELECT. The category will expand to display various preference items.




Passport Guide DVR displays the current setting on the right side of the screen.


5. Press the up or down arrow to select Never, then press SELECT.

— If the Parental Control Locking Status is set to Off, the highlight will return to the Preference column.

— If the Parental Control Locking Status is set to On, Passport Guide DVR will request your Parental Control PIN.



Key in the four digits of your Parental Control PIN.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following message:

— Press the A key to acknowledge the change in status.

The highlight returns to the Preference column.

The Hide Adult Titles preference is now disabled. Titles and descriptions for adult-oriented programs may appear in several places in the user interface, including the Program Guide, title and keyword search results, Recorded Shows, Scheduled Recordings, Series Manager, Info Banner, Channel Banner and PPV channels.

Please be aware that by disabling Hide Adult Titles (setting it to Never), you are also turning off Parental Control temporarily. Parental Control will automatically be set to Off [Auto relock], which means that Parental Control will be re-enabled automatically in five hours, or the next time you turn the set-top box off and back on.





Hid ing or d isp lay ing adul t t i t les by us ing the Parenta l Contro l Lock ing Status

You may wish to set the Hide Adult Titles feature so that you can manage it by simply enabling or disabling Parental Control.

This may make it quicker and easier for you to place Passport Guide DVR into or out of a “safe” mode that prevents your household from exposure to adult programming and adult title listings, all at once. You can set up the Parental Control channel, ratings, content and time locks one time, and then quickly turn Parental Control locks and the Hide Adult Titles feature on or off as you wish.

You can do this simply by setting the Hide Adult Titles preference to the Follow Parental Control option.

With this setting, when you turn the Parental Control Locking Status on, you also effectively enable the Hide Adult Titles preference to block the display of adult titles in the Program Guide or search results (as well as enabling all other Parental Control locks).

Conversely, when you turn Parental Control off, at the same time you also effectively disable the Hide Adult Titles preference and thereby permit the display of adult titles in the Program Guide or search results (as well as disabling all other Parental Control locks).

If you wish to manage the Hide Adult Titles preference simply by enabling or disabling the Parental Control preference, follow the procedure below.

Note: When you set Hide Adult Titles to Follow Parental Control, Passport Guide DVR will automatically add NC-17 and NR (Adult) ratings to the Locked Ratings list. If you subsequently disable Hide Adult Titles by setting it to Never, programs rated NC-17 and NR (Adult) will remain on the Locked Ratings list until you remove them manually.

To manage the Hide Adult Titles preference by turning Parental Control on or off:










Passport Guide DVR displays the current setting.


Passport Guide DVR displays the following screen.



5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Follow Parental Control.

With this setting, Hide Adult Titles is enabled only when Parental Control is on, and disabled when Parental Control is off. Consequently, adult titles may still appear in the Program Guide or search results if Parental Control is turned off.

6. Press SELECT to accept the new setting.





Act ivat ing Parenta l Contro l

When you turn on Parental Control, you activate all settings for several locking preferences (including Locked Channels, Locked Ratings, Locked Time, Locked Content, and possibly Hide Adult Titles, depending on its setting). To turn on Parental Control, turn on the Parental Control Locking Status preference.

If you have not locked any channels, ratings, or time periods, or set the Hide Adult Titles preference to Follow Parental Control, activating Parental Control will have no effect. For information on locking options, refer to “Selecting Parental Control settings” on page 255.

When the Parental Control Locking Status preference is turned on, you must enter your Parental Control PIN to view locked programs.

You can enable or disable Parental Control from the Quick Settings or General Settings menu.

The General Settings menu includes the Parental Control Locking Status preference, which features three settings that enable you to turn on Parental Control:

Lock ing Status Exp lanat ion

On This setting turns on Parental Control.

Off (Relock Manually)

With this setting, when you turn off Parental Control, it will remain turned off until you turn it back on by using the Quick Settings or General Settings menus.

Off (Auto Relock)

With this setting, when you turn off Parental Control, then turn off the set-top box, and then turn the set-top box back on, Parental Control will be automatically re-activated.

In addition, if the remote control remains inactive for five hours, Parental Control will be automatically enabled.

Note: If the Hide Adult Titles preference setting is set to Follow Parental Control, the setting you assign to Parental Control will also affect the Hide Adult Titles setting. For more information, see “Hiding adult titles” on page 280.



Act ivat ing Parenta l Contro l f rom the Quick Sett ings menu

This section explains how to activate Parental Control from the Quick Settings menu.

To activate Parental Control from the Quick Settings menu:



Note: If your cable operator has installed and configured the QuickMenu feature, Passport Guide DVR will not display the Quick Settings menu when you press the SETTINGS key. Instead, Passport Guide DVR will display the QuickMenu. To enable or disable Parental Control, you will need to access the General Settings. For more information, see “Turning on Parental Control from the General Settings menu” on page 293 or “Turning off Parental Control temporarily from General Settings” on page 299.


A dot in the No column indicates that Parental Control is currently turned off.

(If the dot appears in the Yes column, Parental Control is already activated.)




Passport Guide DVR displays a confirmation message. All blocks are now enabled (activated).




The Quick Settings disappears. Parental Control is now enabled (activated).



Turning on Parental Control from the General Settings menu

To turn on Parental Control from the General Settings menu:







3. If necessary, press the down arrow to highlight the Locking Status preference.

Passport Guide DVR shows the current Locking Status setting.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Status column.



5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight On.

6. Press SELECT to activate Parental Control.



Passport Guide DVR displays a message indicating that:

ALL BLOCKING now requires PIN entry.

8. Press the A key.

Parental Control is now active.

Passport Guide DVR returns to the Preferences column.




Turning of f Parenta l Contro l

If Parental Control is turned on and you want to watch a locked program, Passport Guide DVR can display a series of dialogs that allow you to unlock the channel to view the program. The process varies slightly if the program is broadcast on a channel that you have explicitly locked.

For example, if you attempt to unlock a program for which the rating exceeds the maximum acceptable rating you established (by using the Locked Ratings preference in the General Settings menu), Passport Guide DVR will display a dialog indicating that the program is locked by rating. To view the program, key in your four-digit Parental Control PIN. Passport Guide DVR will present a confirmation dialog. Press the A key to accept. Passport Guide DVR will then allow you to view the program.

If you attempt to unlock a program that is being broadcast on a locked channel (and that may also be locked by rating or time), Passport Guide DVR will display a dialog indicating that the program is locked. To view the program, key in your four-digit Parental Control PIN. Passport Guide DVR will present a dialog asking whether you wish to unlock only the specific channel, or all channels. Make your selection. Passport Guide DVR will then present a confirmation dialog. Press the A key to accept. Passport Guide DVR will then allow you to view the program.

If you select All Channels, Parental Control is automatically re-activated when you turn the set-top box off and then back on.

Turning off Parental Control does not delete your locking settings. Passport Guide DVR retains your settings so that you can easily re-activate them.

The Parental Control Locking Status preference enables you to turn off Parental Controls with two options:

Lock ing Status

Off (Relock Manually) With this setting, when you turn off Parental Control, it will remain turned off until you turn it back on by using the Quick Settings or General Settings menus, even if you turn off the power to the set-top box. For more information, refer to “Turning off Parental Control until you manually reactivate it” on page 301.

Off (Auto Relock) With this setting, when you turn off Parental Control, then turn off the set-top box, and then turn the set-top box back on, Parental Control will be automatically re-activated.

In addition, if the remote control is idle for five hours, Parental Control is automatically re-activated.

For more information, refer to “Turning off Parental Control until you power off the set-top box” on page 296.



Turning off Parental Control until you power off the set-top box

You can disable Parental Control temporarily for all locked times, ratings, channels and content so that you can view all programs. When you turn off the set-top box and then turn it back on, all Parental Control locking settings will be re-activated.

To temporarily disable Parental Control in this manner, you can use the Quick Settings or General Settings menu. Follow the procedures below.

You can also disable Parental Control temporarily if Passport Guide DVR displays a message over black background video indicating that a channel or recorded show is locked (see below).

Passport Guide DVR will display a dialog indicating that the time, rating or channel is locked. To view the program, key in your four-digit Parental Control PIN. (If you attempt to unlock a program that is being broadcast on a locked channel, Passport Guide DVR will present an additional dialog asking whether you wish to unlock only the specific channel, or all channels. Make your selection.) Passport Guide DVR will then present a confirmation dialog. Press the A key to accept. Passport Guide DVR will then allow you to view the program.

Note: To disable Parental Control so that it does not re-activate automatically when you turn the set-top box off and on, refer to “Turning off Parental Control until you manually reactivate it” on page 301.



Turning of f Parenta l Contro l temporar i ly f rom the Quick Set t ings menu

To turn off Parental Control temporarily from the Quick Settings menu, follow the procedure below. When you turn off the set-top box and then turn it back on, Parental Control will automatically be re-activated.

To turn off Parental Control temporarily from the Quick Settings:



Note: If your cable operator has installed and configured the QuickMenu feature, Passport Guide DVR will not display the Quick Settings menu when you press the SETTINGS key. Instead, Passport Guide DVR will display the QuickMenu. To enable or disable Parental Control, you will need to access the General Settings. For more information, see “Turning on Parental Control from the General Settings menu” on page 293 or “Turning off Parental Control temporarily from General Settings” on page 299.


A dot in the Yes column indicates Parental Control is active.

(If the dot appears in the No column, Parental Control is already disabled.)

3. Press SELECT or the right arrow to change the setting to No.



Passport Guide DVR displays a message indicating that Parental Control is now disabled.



5. Press the A key to accept the message.

Passport Guide DVR again displays the channel you were watching.

Parental Control is now disabled and all channels, programs, and times are unlocked. When you turn off the set-top box and then turn it back on, Parental Control will be automatically re-activated.



Turning of f Parenta l Contro l temporar i ly f rom Genera l Set t ings

To turn off Parental Control temporarily from the General Settings menu, follow the procedure below. When you turn off the set-top box and then turn it back on, Parental Control will be automatically re-activated.

To turn off Parental Control temporarily from the General Settings menu:








Passport Guide DVR displays the current Locking Status setting.


5. Press the up arrow to highlight Off (Auto Relock).

6. Press SELECT.






8. Press the A key.


Parental Control is now disabled and all channels, programs, titles, and times are unlocked. When you turn the set-top box off and back on, Parental Control will be automatically re-activated.




Turning off Parental Control until you manually reactivate it

To disable Parental Control “permanently” so that it does not activate automatically when the set-top box is turned off and then back on, follow the procedure below.

To turn off Parental Control from the General Settings menu until you manually turn it back on:








Passport Guide DVR displays the current Locking Status setting.


5. Press the up arrow to highlight Off (Relock Manually).



6. Press SELECT.




8. Press the A key.


Parental Control is now disabled and all channels, programs, titles, and times are unlocked.

When you turn the set-top box off and back on, Parental Control willremain disabled until you turn Parental Control back on.



8


Purchasing Pay-Per-View (PPV) Programs

This chapter explains how to purchase Pay-Per-View (PPV) programs in Passport Guide DVR.


• “About PPV” on page 304

• “Establishing a Purchase PIN” on page 305

• “Enabling and disabling the Purchase PIN” on page 308

• “Changing the Purchase PIN” on page 311

• “Purchasing PPV programs from the Program Guide” on page 313

• “Purchasing PPV programs from QuickInfo” on page 318

• “Purchasing PPV programs from PPV channels” on page 323

• “Checking the status of PPV programs” on page 325

• “Canceling PPV purchases from General Settings” on page 327

• “Canceling PPV purchases from the Program Guide” on page 329


Chapte r 8—Purchas ing Pay-Per -V i ew (PPV) P rograms

About PPV

Passport Guide DVR enables you to purchase Pay-Per-View (PPV) programs.

For each PPV program, the cable provider determines the details of the offer, such as the price, the buying window of opportunity, whether there is a free preview, and whether you can cancel a purchase.

Note: Passport Guide DVR can support certain currencies other than the US dollar for Pay-Per-View transactions.

You can purchase PPV programs from dedicated PPV channels or via QuickInfo or the Program Guide. You can purchase PPV programs in advance, or in certain circumstances, after the program has started.

If you purchase a future program, Passport Guide DVR will display a countdown reminder one minute before the program begins.

You can restrict which household members can purchase PPV programs by enabling the Purchase PIN.

If you are watching a Pay-Per-View program but not recording it, and you press the PLAY, PAUSE, REWIND, FAST FORWARD, STOP, or INSTANT REPLAY key, a message will appear informing you that you must record the Pay-Per-View program before you can use these keys (that is, trick modes).

The “free preview” portion of a PPV event is recorded in the LOD buffer. If you purchase a PPV event and initiate a recording of a PPV program, Passport Guide DVR will allow you to rewind to the beginning of the program, provided that you were tuned to the PPV channel during the free preview.



Establ ish ing a Purchase PIN

Passport Guide DVR provides the Purchase PIN feature to help you prevent unauthorized individuals from purchasing PPV programs. If the Purchase PIN is enabled, a PIN entry message will be displayed when you attempt to purchase a PPV program. You can continue the purchase only if you know the Purchase PIN. The following display shows the Purchase PIN Entry message:

You can establish a Purchase PIN by using the Purchasing Locking Status preference in the General Settings menu. (See the procedure below.)

You can change your Purchase PIN by using the Purchasing Change PIN preference in the General Settings menu. For more information, see “Changing the Purchase PIN” on page 311.

To establish a Purchase PIN for the first time:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Purchasing category.

The screen displays the current Purchasing settings.

— If the Purchasing category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Purchasing category will expand to display various preference items.




Passport Guide DVR indicates that Purchasing Locking Status is disabled.


5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight On (for the first time), then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays an initial PIN set up dialog.

6. Press the A key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the PIN Entry dialog.

7. Key in the four digits that you want to establish as your Purchase PIN.

Passport Guide DVR displays a second PIN Entry dialog that requests that you key in the PIN again to confirm it.



8. Key in the four digits of your new PIN again.

Passport Guide DVR displays a dialog indicating that the Purchase PIN has been set.


Your Purchase PIN is now established.



Enabl ing and d isab l ing the Purchase PIN

You can enable or disable the Purchase PIN by using the Purchasing Locking Status preference in the General Settings menu. (See the procedure on page 308.) If you disable the Purchase PIN, anyone will be able to purchase PPV programs.

To enable or disable the Purchase PIN:








Passport Guide DVR indicates whether the Purchasing Locking Status is enabled or disabled.



4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Status column. Then, do one of the following:

— To disable the Purchase PIN, proceed to the next step.

— To enable the Purchase PIN, proceed to step 9.

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Off option.

6. If you wish to disable the Purchase PIN, press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR requests your Purchase PIN:

7. Key in the four digits of the Purchase PIN.



Passport Guide DVR returns to the Preferences column. The procedure for disabling the Purchase PIN is now complete. Proceed to step 13.

9. To enable a Purchase PIN, press the up or down arrow to highlight the On option.



10. Press SELECT to enable the Purchase PIN.


11.Key in the four digits of the Purchase PIN.


12. Press the A key to confirm the message.

Passport Guide DVR returns to the Preferences column. The procedure for enabling the Purchase PIN is now complete.




Changing the Purchase PIN

You can establish or change the Purchase PIN by using the Change PIN preference in the Purchasing category of the General Settings menu.

It is advisable to change your Purchase PIN from time to time to prevent unauthorized viewers from discovering the Purchase PIN.

To change the Purchase PIN:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the Change PIN preference.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following text:

Press SELECT to Change PIN.



4. To change your Purchase PIN, press SELECT.


5. Key in the four digits of the current Purchase PIN.


6. Key in the four digits of the new Purchase PIN.


7. Key in the four digits of the new Purchase PIN again.

Passport Guide DVR displays a message indicating that the Purchase PIN has been set.


The new Purchase PIN is now active.




Purchas ing PPV programs f rom the Program Guide

You can purchase Pay-Per-View programs by using the Program Guide. You must have purchase credit available and may need to know your Purchase PIN to be able to purchase movies.

If you select a program associated with a locked channel, rating, content advisory, or time period, you will be required to use your PIN to disable Parental Control.

The Program Guide cell for a purchased PPV program is colored green and

includes a dollar-sign icon to indicate the purchase.

If you select a purchased PPV program in the Program Guide, its description will also include a dollar-sign icon.

Note: In one-way and reservation PPV systems, the program or movie promotion will include a telephone number for the cable provider that you can call to order the program. No such number appears on standard PPV promotions.

If you wish to see an overview of PPV purchases, you can use the General Settings menu. For more information, refer to “Checking the status of PPV programs” on page 325.

Note: There are several variables that may affect the procedure for purchasing a PPV program. For example, in the following procedure you can:

• Press SELECT or the REC key. Passport Guide DVR will display the channel and enable you to purchase the event.

• Choose to buy a show, or buy and record a show.

• Select a currently-airing show or a future show.

• If you select a currently-airing show within several minutes of its start time, you may still be able to purchase it through the Program Guide. If more than several minutes have expired, you cannot purchase the current showing.

Note: Due to this complexity, the following procedure does not describe every possible sequence, but instead provides an overview of some of the most likely scenarios.



To purchase a PPV program from the Program Guide:

Note: Until the purchase is complete, you can press the C key at any time to cancel the purchase and return to the Program Guide.



Note: Alternatively, if your remote control features a PPV key, you can press the PPV key. Passport Guide DVR will display the first PPV channel in the lineup.

2. Press the up, down, left, or right arrow to highlight a future PPV program that you want to purchase.

To quickly find PPV programs, you can also press the GUIDE key again to display the Find Shows pop-up menu. Then press the down arrow to highlight the Themes menu option, and then press SELECT. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Movies theme, then press SELECT to expand the Movies theme list. Press the down arrow to select the Pay-Per-View option. Press the right arrow to move to the Programs column. Press the up or down arrows to highlight a desired PPV program.

Note: When you sort the Program Guide by theme, a “NOW” indicator displayed to the left of the program title indicates that the program is currently airing.

3. Press SELECT or the REC key.

One of the following events occurs:

— If the selected program is scheduled to show in the future, Passport Guide DVR displays a future PPV show dialog.

Press the up or down arrow to select an option, then press SELECT.

The options can vary but may include:

• Buy and Record this show

• Buy this show




— If you pressed the REC key and the program is currently showing and can still be purchased, Passport Guide DVR displays a graphic with the message: Record feature not available until this show is purchased. Press the C key to acknowledge the message and return to the Program Guide.

— If the program is currently showing but it is too late to purchase it, Passport Guide DVR displays a title graphic for the next available show on the PPV channel (similar to the screen shown below).

For more information, refer to the procedure “Purchasing PPV programs from PPV channels” on page 323.

— If your current PPV purchase overlaps another purchase, or if there is a Parental Control rating lock on the program, Passport Guide DVR displays the “overlap” message below. Press the B key to continue the purchase (or press the C key to cancel the purchase).

Note: If the overlap is a ratings lock, Passport Guide DVR will request a Parental Control PIN.



4. If you have established a Purchase PIN, Passport Guide DVR displays the following screen.

Key in your four digit Purchase PIN.

(If you do not see this display, proceed to the next step.)

5. If the program is subject to a Parental Control lock and you have enabled Parental Control, Passport Guide DVR displays the Parental Control Time, Rating, Channel, or Content block screen.

6. Press SELECT to disable Parental Control.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Parental Control PIN Entry screen.

7. Key in your four digit Parental Control PIN.



Passport Guide DVR disables all channel, time, ratings, and content blocks.

8. Press the A key to return to the Program Guide.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Program Guide. (If necessary, press the GUIDE key.)

— If you elected to buy the PPV program, the Program Guide cell for the program changes to green and displays a dollar-sign icon, indicating that you have purchased the program. In the Theme sort, Passport Guide DVR displays a dollar sign ($) next to the PPV channel call letters (for example, $PPV03).

— If you elected to buy and record the PPV program, the Program Guide cell for that program changes to green and includes a dollar-sign icon

indicating that you have purchased the program.

— It also includes a record icon , indicating that you have requested

a recording of the program.



Purchas ing PPV programs f rom QuickInfo

You can purchase Pay-Per-View programs by using QuickInfo. You must have purchase credit available and may need to know your Purchase PIN to be able to purchase movies.

If you select a program with a locked rating, time period, or channel, you will have to use your PIN to disable Parental Control.

Note: In one-way and reservation PPV systems, the program or movie promotion will include a telephone number for the cable provider that you can call to order the program. (No such number appears on standard PPV promotions.)

For an overview of PPV purchases, use the General Settings menu. For more information, refer to “Checking the status of PPV programs” on page 325.

Note: There are several variables involved in the process of purchasing a PPV program. For example, in this procedure you can:

• Press SELECT or the REC key. Passport Guide will display a relevant dialog.

• Choose to buy a show, or choose to buy and record a show.

• Select a currently-airing show or a future show.

• If it is a currently-airing show and within several minutes of the start time, you can still purchase it. If more than several minutes have elapsed, you cannot purchase the current showing.

Note: Due to this complexity, the following procedure does not describe every possible sequence, but instead provides an overview of some of the most likely scenarios.

To purchase a PPV program from QuickInfo:

Note: Until the purchase is complete, you can press the C key at any time to cancel the purchase and return to QuickInfo.







3. Press the up, down, left, or right arrow to find a PPV program that you want to purchase.


Depending on program airtime, which key you press, and other variables, one of the following events occurs. Continue to proceed as instructed on screen.

— If you pressed SELECT on a program that will air in the future, Passport Guide DVR will display a future PPV show dialog.

— Press the up or down arrow to select one of the Buy options, then press SELECT.

— If you pressed the REC key and the program is showing currently and can still be purchased, Passport Guide DVR displays the following message.

The message indicates that you must purchase the show before you can schedule a recording.

Press the C key to clear the message screen.

Press SELECT to initiate the purchase process, as described above.

— If you pressed SELECT, and the program is showing currently and can still be purchased, Passport Guide DVR displays a graphic similar to the one below, asking you to confirm the purchase.



Press the B key to continue with the purchase.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following menu. Options include:

• Buy and Record this Show

• Buy this Show


Highlight an option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR tunes to the PPV channel.

— If the program is showing currently but it is too late to purchase it, Passport Guide DVR displays a title graphic for the next available show on the PPV channel. For more information, refer to the procedure “Purchasing PPV programs from PPV channels” on page 323.

— If your PPV purchase overlaps another purchase, or if there is a Parental Control rating lock on the program, Passport Guide DVR displays an “overlap” message similar to the one below. Press the B key to continue the purchase.

Note: If the overlap is a ratings lock, Passport Guide DVR will request a Parental Control PIN.



5. If you have established a Purchase PIN, Passport Guide DVR displays the following screen.

Key in your four digit Purchase PIN.

(If you do not see this display, proceed to the next step.)

6. If the program is subject to a Parental Control lock and you have enabled Parental Control, Passport Guide DVR displays the Parental Control Time, Rating, Channel, or Content block screen below.

7. Press SELECT to disable Parental Control.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Parental Control PIN Entry screen below.

8. Key in your four digit Parental Control PIN.

Passport Guide DVR disables all channel, time, ratings, and content blocks.



9. Press the A key to return to the Program Guide.

— If you purchased the PPV program, the QuickInfo panel includes a

dollar-sign icon , indicating that you have purchased the program.

— If you elected to buy and record the PPV program, the QuickInfo panel

includes a dollar-sign icon and a record icon , indicating that

you have purchased the program and requested a recording of the program.



Purchas ing PPV programs f rom PPV channels

Cable services provide dedicated PPV channels that feature announcements and advertisements for the channel’s PPV programs.

The following procedure describes how to purchase a program directly from a PPV channel.

To purchase a program from a PPV channel:

1. Access the PPV channel showing the program you wish to purchase.

2. Press the B key if you wish to purchase the PPV program.

— If your PPV purchase overlaps with another purchase, or if there is a Parental Control ratings lock on the program, Passport Guide DVR shows a display similar to the one below. Press the B to continue the purchase. Passport Guide DVR then displays the Purchase PIN entry dialog.

— If your PPV purchase does not overlap with another purchase, and if there is no Parental Control ratings lock on the program, Passport Guide DVR displays the Purchase PIN entry dialog.


— If you have established a Purchase PIN, Passport Guide DVR displays the Purchase PIN entry display below. Key in your four-digit Purchase PIN.



— If you have not established a Purchase PIN, you can do so by using the Purchase PIN preference in the General Settings. For more information, see “Establishing a Purchase PIN” on page 305.

4. One of the following events occurs:

— If the program has already started and it is not too late to purchase the program, Passport Guide DVR displays the program.

— If the program has not yet started, a message thanks you for your order and displays a countdown marker reflecting the amount of time until the event starts.



Checking the s tatus o f PPV programs

You can have a maximum of seven pending PPV purchases. Payment for the programs is arranged by the cable operator after the purchase is complete or the event is listed as a past item.

To check the status of PPV programs:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the PPV Purchases preference.

Passport Guide DVR displays the number of pending and past purchases.

Note: Past purchases are occasionally purged by cable operators. At most, there can be seven pending and eight past purchases.



4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Events Summary column.

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of PPV purchases.

Note: If there are no Pending or Past purchases, you will be unable to access the Events Summary column.

5. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the list if necessary.




Cance l ing PPV purchases f rom Genera l Set t ings

You can cancel PPV purchases by using the PPV Purchases preference in the General Settings menu.

Note: You can also cancel PPV purchases from the Program Guide. For more information, refer to “Canceling PPV purchases from the Program Guide” on page 329.

To cancel PPV purchases from the General Settings menu:







3. Press the down arrow to highlight the PPV Purchases preference.

Passport Guide DVR displays the number of pending and past purchases.

Note: Past purchases are occasionally purged by cable operators. At most, there can be eight pending and eight past purchases.

4. Press SELECT or the right arrow to move to the Events Summary column.

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of purchases.

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the purchased PPV program that you want to cancel.

Note: When you highlight an event that you cannot cancel, the red status bar at the top of the display shows “This event may no longer be cancelled.”



6. To cancel the purchase, press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the message shown below.

7. Press the A key to cancel the purchase.

Passport Guide DVR returns to the Events Summary column.




Cance l ing PPV purchases f rom the Program Guide

You can cancel PPV purchases by using the Program Guide.

Note: You can also cancel PPV purchases using the PPV Purchases or the Alert Summary preference in the General Settings menu. For more information, refer to “Canceling PPV purchases from General Settings” on page 327 or “Setting a reminder timer” on page 204.

To cancel PPV purchases from the Program Guide:


Passport Guide DVR displays the Program Guide. The current program is highlighted in the Time Grid.

2. Press the up, down, left, or right arrow to highlight the future PPV program purchase you want to cancel.

Note: Upcoming programs you have requested to purchase are highlighted in green and marked with a dollar sign in the Program Guide.

Note: To quickly find PPV programs, you can also press the GUIDE key again to display the Find Shows pop-up menu. Then press the down arrow to highlight the Themes menu option, and then press SELECT. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Movies theme, then press SELECT to expand the Movies theme list. Press the down arrow to select the Pay-Per-View option. Press the right arrow to move to the Programs column. Press the up or down arrows to highlight the desired PPV program.


Passport Guide DVR displays a future PPV show dialog (similar to the panels shown below for the Time Grid and Theme views.)



4. Press the up or down arrow to select Cancel this PPV Purchase, then press SELECT.

The program cell in the grid changes to blue and the dollar-sign icon disappears, indicating that the purchase has been cancelled.

Note: If a recording was scheduled, it will also be cancelled.


9


Using the Digital Video Recorder (DVR)

This chapter explains how to operate the Passport Guide DVR digital video recorder, and how to take advantage its many features. It includes the following main sections:

• “About the Digital Video Recorder (DVR)” on page 332

• “Features of your Digital Video Recorder (DVR)” on page 333

• “Info Banner and Mini Info Banner” on page 335

• “Rewind and fast forward speeds” on page 338

• “Notch skip function” on page 339

• “Thirty (30) second skip ahead” on page 339

• “Slow motion playback” on page 339

• “Frame-by-frame advance and rewind” on page 339

• “Delayed video (time-shifting)” on page 340

• “Changing the position of the Mini Info Banner” on page 341

• “Recording a program” on page 342

• “Manual recording” on page 350

• “Recording a series” on page 353

• “Canceling a recording from the Program Guide” on page 355

• “Using the Recording Options menu” on page 357

• “Resolving conflicts” on page 362

• “Playing back recorded programs” on page 364

• “Using the Recorded Shows screen” on page 366

• “Using the Scheduled Recordings screen” on page 384

• “Sorting and grouping titles on the Scheduled Recordings screen” on page 387

• “Using the Series Manager” on page 389

• “Sorting the Series Manager by priority or title” on page 392

• “Cropping” on page 401

• “Using Lost & Found to find missing recordings” on page 405


Chapte r 9—Us ing the D ig i t a l V ideo Recorder (DVR)

About the D ig i ta l V ideo Recorder (DVR)

Passport Guide DVR enables you to digitally record programs and manage a library of previously recorded programs. For example, you can group episodes of the same program into a folder. You can schedule future recordings of programs or entire series. You can also view TV live or time-shift your TV viewing.

Note: In order to access the DVR-related menus of Passport Guide DVR, you must have a remote control that features a DVR LIST key.

Your set-top box may feature two tuners as well as DVR capabilities, which enable you to:

• Watch live TV

• Watch time-shifted (delayed) TV. You can pause, rewind, skip ahead in 30second increments, or fast forward the video (up to the current point in the program).

• Watch recorded programs

• Record one program while watching another live program

• Record two programs simultaneously

• Record two programs simultaneously--while watching a third program that had been previously saved to the set-top box’s internal hard disk

• Convert any data temporarily recorded in the Live Off Disk (LOD) buffer to a long-term recording. This feature enables you to begin a recording up to one hour after the program has started and still record the entire program, including the beginning (assuming you were tuned to the channel since the beginning of the program).

• Swap back and forth between two tuners. This enables you to jump between two channels of live TV, or between a live channel and a time-shifted program or a recording.

• Display information about how much space on your hard disk has been used for recordings and how much is available

• Group recorded programs with identical titles (for example, episodes of the same series) into folders

• Use the Lost & Found screen to determine why shows that you expected to appear in the Recorded Shows screen were not recorded, and in some cases, to retrieve erased shows for viewing

• Watch playback in slow motion


Chapte r 9—Us ing the D ig i t a l V ideo Recorde r (DVR)

Features o f your D ig i ta l V ideo Recorder (DVR)

This document assumes that your set-top box hardware includes the following components:

• Two TV tuners

• Two video encoder/decoders

• An internal and/or external hard disk drive

Note: Each tuner is typically associated with one encoder/decoder.

These components enable you to take advantage of a number of special features.

As long as the set-top box is plugged into an AC power outlet, each of the two tuners continuously records a live broadcast from two different channels.

As each program is being recorded, the data is held in a temporary disk cache called an LOD buffer. When you turn on the power to the set-top box, a certain amount of programming data (typically one half-hour or one hour, depending on your cable operator) is already present in each of the LOD buffers.

These dual tuners and LOD buffers enable you to do several useful things. For example, you can:

• Pause live TV or recorded shows

• Rewind and replay live TV or recorded shows

• Rewind, then fast forward to the current point in a program

• Decide to record a program after it has started and still record the entire program, including the beginning (assuming one of the tuners was tuned to the channel since the program started)

• Perform standard digital video recorder (DVR) functions, such as fast forwarding buffered live TV or recorded shows

• Skip ahead in 30 second increments (when playing back recorded shows or video from the buffer)

• Play back video in slow motion (when playing back recorded shows or video from the buffer) in forward or reverse directions

• Step forward or backward frame-by-frame (when playing back recorded shows or buffered live TV)

• Skip to predetermined time increments as you fast forward or rewind through a program (Notch Skip)



Channel LOD buf fer cache s ize

Each tuner can cache (hold in temporary LOD buffer storage) a certain amount of video, typically 60 minutes for each tuner.

Note: The amount of video that can be cached in each LOD buffer depends on the configuration established by your cable operator.

This means that if you were watching a program since its beginning, you can rewind “back in time” to view an earlier portion of the show. (You can also decide to record the program after it has begun, and if the beginning of the program is present in an LOD buffer, you can record the program in its entirety--even the “free preview” portion of a Pay-Per-View event.)

Swapping between foreground and background tuners

The tuner you are currently watching is generally referred to as the foreground tuner. The other tuner is called the background tuner.

You can swap between the programs shown on the foreground and background tuners by pressing the SWAP key on the remote control.

Background tuner (not visible)

Foreground tuner (visible) BEFORE AFTER

SWAP key

If you press the number keys to tune to the background tuner channel, Passport Guide DVR swaps the tuners (that is, Passport Guide DVR displays the channel that was on the background tuner and moves the foreground tuner channel to the background) in the same way as if you pressed the SWAP key.



Info Banner and Min i Info Banner

Passport Guide DVR briefly displays the Info Banner when you start to record a program or when you press the INFO key.

An LOD buffer progress bar in the lower middle section of the Info Banner provides information on the status of the DVR.

.

Time Rating and Playback Current

Current Time Current Show Title Increment Content Head Program Air Tick Marks Advisory Time

Current Current LOD Buffer LOD Buffer LOD LOD Buffer Channel Logo Channel Bar Buffer

Number and Start Time Timeline End TimeCall Letters (above)

Playback mode

A minimized version of the Info Banner is displayed when you press any of the DVR/VCR control keys (PLAY, PAUSE, REWIND or FAST FORWARD). The minimized banner is unobtrusive, yet it provides information about the video.

Time Increment Tick Marks Playback Head LOD Buffer End Time

LOD Buffer LOD Buffer Timeline LOD Buffer Bar Playback mode Start Time

For information on the DVR section of the Info Banner or the mini Info Banner, see the following table. For more information on other elements of the Info Banner or the mini Info Banner, see “Using the Channel Banner and the Info Banner” on page 40.



Banner E lement

Descr ipt ion/Informat ion for L ive or De layed Programs

Descr ipt ion/ Informat ion for Recorded Programs

LOD Buffer Timeline

Represents the amount of storage for LOD buffer video. The timeline is represented by beginning and end times. These times change as the buffer grows. Initially, the LOD buffer timeline displays the most current 30 minutes of programming. As the buffer grows, the timeline expands to accommodate the LOD buffer bar. The exact amount of buffer growth depends on the head-end configuration.

Note: The LOD buffer timeline may be 60 minutes in some locations.

For recorded programs greater than 30 minutes in length, the timeline represents the duration of the entire program. (The LOD buffer bar will be the same length for shows that are one hour, two hours, etc.)

For recorded programs less than or equal to 30 minutes in length, the timeline represents a fixed 30 minute period.

Note: The LOD buffer timeline may be 60 minutes in some locations.

LOD Buffer Bar Displayed in green within the LOD buffer timeline. Represents the amount of the program stored in the LOD buffer on the hard drive. The right edge of the bar shows the live (current) position.

Note: During a Pay-Per-View program, the LOD Buffer Bar is blue.

Displayed in green within the LOD buffer timeline. Represents the duration of the stored recording on the hard drive. If a program is recorded in its entirety, the green bar will completely fill the LOD buffer timeline. For programs that are partially recorded, the bar represents the recorded portion.

Time Increment Tick Marks

Represent 15-minute intervals on the timeline. Half-hour increments are represented by larger tick marks.

Playback Head Displayed above the timeline. Shows the current position in the video stream. The playback head enables you to pinpoint the displayed portion of the current program. As you watch a program, the playback head moves to the right.

Note: If you are recording a Pay-Per-View program, you can use the Playback mode keys (such as REWIND, FAST FORWARD, STOP, etc.) to control program viewing.

LOD Buffer Start Time

Indicates the beginning of the Start/Stop time of the currently-viewed show.

Displays Start time.

LOD Buffer End Time

Represents the latest point in time that may be stored in the LOD buffer.

Displays the duration of the recorded program.

Recording in Progress icon

Indicates that a recording is currently in progress. (Not illustrated on page 335. See “Passport Guide DVR icons” on page 49 for an illustration of the Recording in Progress icon.)

Rating icon Indicates the Rating of the program. (For more information, see “Locking ratings” on page 260.)

Content Advisory abbreviation

Content Advisory information is expressed by the following abbreviations: “S” for Sexual situations; “L” for Language; “V” for Violence; and “D” for suggestive Dialog. For example, a Content Advisory summary of (S, L, V) may be displayed. (For more information, see “Hiding adult titles” on page 280.)



As shown in the figure below, Passport Guide DVR displays icons in the Info Banner to represent the current playback state. (Each of these icons is discussed in detail in the table on the following page.)

Icon



Rewind and fast forward speeds

Passport Guide DVR features three levels of rewind and fast forward. These levels equate approximately to the speeds listed in the table below:

Moderate 3X

Medium 20X

Fast 60X

The following table includes explanations of the icons that appear on the Info Banner.

Icon Meaning

Rewind Fast

Note: In any Rewind mode, pressing the left arrow key will skip back to the previous 15 minute time increment tick mark. (This feature is called “Notch Skip.”)

Rewind Medium

Rewind Moderate

Stop

Pause

Note: In Pause mode, pressing the left or right arrow key will step frame-by-frame backward or forward.

Note: In Pause mode, pressing the FAST FORWARD key will play slow-motion forward; pressing the Rewind key will play slow-motion backward.

Play

Fast Forward Moderate

Fast Forward Medium

Fast Forward Fast

Note: In any Fast Forward mode, pressing the right arrow key will skip forward to the next 15-minute time increment tick mark. (This feature is called “Notch Skip.”)

Slow Motion (for more information, see “Slow motion playback” on page 339).



Notch sk ip funct ion

Passport Guide DVR includes a Notch Skip function that enables you to skip forward (or back) to the next (or previous) 15-minute time increment tick mark in a program. This features enables you to skip over program content that you do not care to view, or to skip back to view parts of a program again. (Refer to the illustration of the Info Banner on page 337 to see the tick marks.)

When you are in any Fast Forward mode, you can press the right arrow key to skip forward to the next 15-minute time increment tick mark.

When you are in any Rewind mode, you can press the left arrow key to skip back to the previous 15-minute time increment tick mark.

Thir ty (30) second sk ip ahead

Passport Guide DVR features a 30-second skip ahead function that enables you to skip ahead in increments of 30 seconds.

The 30-second skip function can be configured by the cable services provider at the head-end.

• If the 30-second skip function configurable setting is turned on (enabled), pressing the PLAY key twice quickly causes playback to skip ahead 30 seconds and immediately resume.

• If the 30-second skip function configurable setting is turned off (disabled), pressing the PLAY key twice quickly initiates slow-motion playback. (For more information, see “Slow motion playback” on page 339.)

Slow mot ion p layback

Slow-motion playback is initiated as follows:

• Pressing the PAUSE and FAST FORWARD keys in rapid succession initiates slow-motion playback.

• Pressing the PAUSE and RWD keys in rapid succession initiates slow-motion reverse playback

Frame-by- f rame advance and rewind

Passport Guide DVR features frame-by-frame advance and rewind functions.

• Pressing the PAUSE key and then pressing the right arrow key repeatedly steps forward frame-by-frame.

• Pressing the PAUSE key and then pressing the left arrow key repeatedly steps backward frame-by-frame.



Delayed v ideo ( t ime-shi f t ing)

“Time-shifted” or “delayed” video refers to video that has been broadcast and stored in the LOD buffer, or video that has been recorded and is being played back from the hard disk.

The video may be delayed by any amount of time from one second to 60 minutes (depending on the size of the configurable buffer).

In delayed video mode, you can use commands such as pause, fast forward, rewind, etc. to control the video playback.

Notes:

• When you change channels, Passport Guide DVR displays the actual broadcast signal. However, the first time you press one of the following keys (PLAY, PAUSE, REW, FAST FORWARD, STOP, or Instant Replay) after you change channels, Passport Guide DVR shifts into delayed video mode.

• When you use one of these VCR-type commands, the video that you see displayed is being read from the hard disk. When you view an analog channel, you might notice a slight degradation of the video quality if the video is read from the hard disk. There should be no such degradation when you use VCR-type commands on digital channels.

• If you are watching but not recording a Pay-Per-View event, Passport Guide DVR will not shift into delayed video mode. All time-shifting keys are disabled. The playback head is dimmed and the LOD Buffer Bar is displayed in blue (see the figure on page 335). If you press the PLAY, PAUSE, REW, FAST FORWARD, STOP, or Instant Replay key while watching a Pay-Per-View program, a banner will automatically appear, informing you that you must initiate a recording of the Pay-Per-View program before you can use those keys.

To enter delayed video mode:

• Press one of the following keys to switch the viewing mode from live TV to delayed video: — REWIND — PAUSE — INSTANT REPLAY — SLOW MOTION (see “Slow motion playback” on page 339 for key

sequences that invoke slow motion playback)

You can rewind up to one half-hour (30 minutes) in the current broadcast (provided that your current tuner has been on the same channel for at least 30 minutes). In any case, you can rewind only as far as the LOD buffer allows.

Note: This value may be 60 minutes in some locations.

When you change to a new channel, the LOD buffer is cleared.

To return to live TV mode:

• Press the LIVE key, or change channels.

Note: After you press the LIVE key, you will still be viewing program data that is being played back from the buffer; however, you will be viewing programming at the very “front” end of the data.



Changing the pos i t ion of the Min i Info Banner

The Mini Info Banner may on occasion block a part of the screen that you wish to see. You can move the Mini Info Banner to the top of the screen to facilitate viewing.

This can be helpful when you are watching a sporting event, for example, and the Mini Info Banner is blocking a displayed scoreboard.

To change the position of the Mini Info Banner:

1. While the Mini Info Banner is displayed, press the up arrow.

The Mini Info Banner moves to the top of the screen.

2. To move the Mini Info Banner back to its default position, press the down arrow while the banner is displayed.

The Mini Info Banner moves to the bottom of the screen.

The Mini Info Banner will be reset to the bottom of the screen if:

— You do not press the PLAY, PAUSE, REWIND, FAST FORWARD, STOP, or INSTANT REPLAY key for five hours.

— You change the channel or press the INFO key

— You access Quick Settings, QuickMenu, Program Guide, DVR List, General Settings, or any recording dialog.

Note: You cannot move the Mini Info Banner while the Parental Control barker is displayed.



Record ing a program

You can schedule to record a single program episode or a complete series.

In either case, the program(s) will be recorded to the hard disk, where they will remain available for future viewing.

• You can record two programs at the same time, while watching a saved program from the hard disk.

• You can watch a program on one channel while recording a program on another channel.

The following sections provide detailed procedures for recording a program.

Note: Banners and dialogs that are displayed while you record programs are not saved with the recording.

Record ing a program whi le watch ing the program

To record a program while watching the program:

1. Select a program that you want to record.

(There are numerous ways to do so. For more information, see “Selecting a channel” on page 33.)


Passport Guide DVR displays a Recording dialog (below; menu options are context sensitive).

(If you wish to cancel the request and close the dialog, press the C key.)

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight an option, then press SELECT. Options can include: — Record this show — Record entire series — Create a manual recording — List upcoming shows/episodes

Note: This menu may include the options to List upcoming shows or List upcoming episodes. If the program is a movie, the menu will refer to “shows.” If the program is an episode from a series, the menu will refer to “episodes.”



— If you selected Record this show, the process is now complete.

— If you selected Record entire series, Passport Guide DVR displays the Series Manager Options menu. Proceed to the next step.

— If you selected Create a manual recording, refer to “Manual recording” on page 350.

— If you selected List upcoming shows, Passport Guide DVR displays the information in the Program Guide Search by Title results panel, just as if you had run a search by title. For more information on using the Program Guide Search by Title feature, “Displaying the Recorded Shows screen” on page 87.

4. To continue with this step, you should have selected Record entire series in step 3. If not, return to step 3.

Press the arrow keys to specify your preferences for a series recording in the Series Manager Options menu.

— Episodes to Record: First run only, First run & repeats

— Channels: KCET 28 only (example), Any channel, HD Only, SD Only

— Air Times: All showings, 12 pm only (example)

— Save: Until space is needed, Until manually erased

— Episodes to Keep: All episodes, Up to 1, Up to 2, ... Up to 5

— Start Time: On time, 1 minute early or late, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,7 8, 9, or 10 minutes early or late (negative start time)

— End Time: On time; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 15 or 30 minutes over; 1, 2 or 3 hours over; or 1 to 10 minutes under (negative end time/cropping)

Notes:

• Playback control of a program is independent of the recording. Consequently, you can do things such as rewind while the program is recording without interrupting the recording.

• If you are watching but not recording a Pay-Per-View event, Passport Guide DVR will not shift into delayed video mode. All time-shifting keys are disabled. The Recording Head is dimmed and the LOD Buffer Bar is displayed in blue (see the figure on page 335). If you press the PLAY, PAUSE, REWIND, FAST FORWARD, STOP, or INSTANT REPLAY key during a Pay-Per-View recording, a banner will automatically appear, informing you that you must initiate a recording of the Pay-Per-View program before you can use those keys.



• The program title will be added to the Recorded Shows screen. (Refer to “Using the Recorded Shows screen” on page 366.)

• Recording will automatically stop at the end of the program.

• If you are watching a live sporting event and attempt to record the program, Passport Guide DVR will display an option enabling you to extend the recording.

Stopping a program whi le i t i s be ing recorded

If you press the STOP key during the recording, a dialog asks whether you want to stop or continue to record the program.

• To stop the recording, press the up or down arrows to highlight Stop now, then press SELECT.

• To continue the recording, press the up or down arrows to highlight Do not stop now, then press SELECT.

• To play the recording again from the beginning, press the up or down arrows to highlight Play again from the beginning, then press SELECT.

Automat ica l ly extending the recording of a l ive sport ing event and the subsequent program

When you attempt to record a live sporting event, Passport Guide DVR offers an option to extend the recording time in case the game goes into overtime or is extended for some reason beyond its scheduled end time.

Note: For Passport Guide DVR to recognize an event as “live,” the event must be denoted as a live event in the program guide data.

You can also extend the recording time of any program that follows a live sporting event.

To extend the recording of a live sporting event:

1. Select a live sporting event that you want to record. (There are numerous ways to do so. For more information, see “Selecting a channel” on page 33.)


Passport Guide DVR displays a dialog that includes an option to Extend end time.



(Press the left or right arrow to toggle between Extend end time and As scheduled.)

3. Select Extend end time, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a dialog that enables you to specify how long you wish to extend the end time. The End Time option is highlighted.

4. Press the left or right arrow to select the extended end time.

(You can also change the start time by pressing the up arrow to select Start Time, then pressing the left or right arrow to schedule a start time.)


— Start Time: On time, 1 minute early or late, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,7 8, 9, or 10 minutes early or late (negative start time)


5. Press the A key to confirm the setting, or press the C key to cancel the start or end time adjustments.



Recording a current or future program from the Program Guide

The following procedure explains how to record a program from the Program Guide.

Note: The Series Recording Options menu will appear if you initiate a series recording from the Program Guide or live TV.

You may on occasion wish to record a high-definition (HD) program in standard definition (SD) to save hard disk space.

If you are setting up a recording from the Program Guide, a “Record in Standard Definition” menu option will be available during the recording initiation process if (a) the Auto-tune to HD preference (page 175) is turned on, and (b) Passport has tuned automatically to an HD channel version of the SD channel that you selected.

For more information about auto-tuning to HD, see “Auto-tuning to high-definition (HDTV) channels” on page 175. For more information about hard disk space, see “Checking hard disk space usage” on page 377 and “Clearing space on the hard disk” on page 379.

To record a program from the Program Guide:



2. Press the arrow keys to highlight a current or future program.


Passport Guide DVR displays a panel similar to the one below. Depending on the type of program you selected, menu options may include:


— Record the entire series (option is unavailable if the show is not an episode in a series)

— Remind me about this show (option is unavailable if the show is currently airing)


— List upcoming episodes

— Record in Standard Definition (option is available only if the Auto-tune to HD feature has auto-tuned to an HD channel)

Note: This menu may include options to List upcoming shows or List upcoming episodes. If the program is a movie, the menu will refer to “shows.” If the program is an episode from a series, the menu will refer to “episodes.”



4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight one of the following, then press SELECT.


— Record the entire series

— Record in Standard Definition (if available)

Note: If you encounter a recording conflict, Passport Guide DVR will display a dialog that will provide information about conflict resolution. For more information, refer to “Resolving conflicts” on page 362. You must resolve the conflict before proceeding.

— If you select Record this show (or Record in Standard Definition), the procedure is complete.

— If you select Record the entire series, Passport Guide DVR displays the Series Recording dialog. See “Recording a series” on page 353.

— For information about the other options that may appear on this menu, see “Using the Recording Options menu” on page 357.



Record ing a future program from QuickInfo

The following procedure explains how to record a future program from QuickInfo.

Note: The Series Recording Options menu will appear if you initiate a series recording from the Program Guide or live TV.

You may on occasion wish to record a high-definition (HD) program at standard definition (SD) to save hard disk space.

A “Record in Standard Definition” menu option will be available if the Auto-tune to HD preference (page 175) is turned on, and if the feature has tuned automatically to an HD channel version of the SD channel the viewer selected.

For more information about auto-tuning to HD, see “Auto-tuning to high-definition (HDTV) channels” on page 175. For more information about hard disk space, see “Checking hard disk space usage” on page 377 and “Clearing space on the hard disk” on page 379.

To record a future program from QuickInfo:





(For more information on QuickInfo, please see “Displaying and browsing QuickInfo™” on page 44.)

3. Press the arrow keys to browse program titles and times to locate a future program you wish to record.


Passport Guide DVR displays the panel similar to the one below. Depending on the type of program you selected, menu options may include:


— Record the entire series (option is unavailable if the show is not an episode in a series)



— Remind me about this show (option is unavailable if the show is currently airing)


— List upcoming episodes

— Record in Standard Definition (option is available only if the Auto-tune to HD feature has auto-tuned to an HD channel)

Note: This menu may include options to List upcoming shows or List upcoming episodes. If the program is a movie, the menu will refer to “shows.” If the program is from a series, the menu will refer to “episodes.”



— Record entire series

— Record in Standard Definition (if available)

Note: If you encounter a recording conflict, Passport Guide DVR will display a dialog that will provide information about conflict resolution. For more information, refer to “Resolving conflicts” on page 362. You must resolve the conflict before proceeding.

— If you selected Record this show (or Record in Standard Definition), the

procedure is complete. A record icon will be displayed next to the

program title in QuickInfo.

— To cancel the recording, press the REC key again to display the future show dialog, highlight the Cancel this recording option, then press SELECT.

— If you selected Record the entire series, Passport Guide DVR displays the Series Recording dialog. See “Recording a series” on page 353.

For information about the other options that may appear on this menu, see “Using the Recording Options menu” on page 357.



Manual record ing

A manual recording takes place at the time you specify. It can occur once or recur repeatedly.

It begins and ends at the times you specify, regardless of the programs that are scheduled to air during that time period.

An Individual recording is a one-time-only recording. A Recurring recording will record at the same time on the designated days.

To create a manual recording:

1. While any channel is displayed, press the REC key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following dialog.

2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Create a manual recording... option, and then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Manual Recording dialog.

3. Press the up or down arrow as needed to highlight either an Individual or a Recurring recording.

4. Press the right arrow key to access the Channel column. Press the up or down arrow to highlight a channel.



5. Press the right arrow to access the Days column. Press the up or down arrow to highlight a day or days, then press SELECT.

— For Individual recordings, the Day(s) column displays the date of the recording.

— For Recurring recordings, the Day(s) column displays a day of the week (or a combination of days).

6. Press the right arrow to access the Start column, in which you can set the time that the recording should start.

— Press the up or down arrow to select the hour. (You can also use the number keys to enter the number.)

— Press the right arrow to move to the next digit, and repeat the procedure until you have set a Start time.

— Press the right arrow to highlight the ‘a’ or ‘p,’ indicating whether you want the recording to start in the AM or PM.

7. Press the right arrow to move to the End column.

— Press the up or down arrow to select the hour. (You can also use the number keys to enter the number.)

— Press the right arrow to move to the next digit, and repeat the procedure until you have set an End time.

— Press the right arrow to highlight the ‘a’ or ‘p,’ indicating whether you want the recording to end in the AM or PM.

8. Review the information and do one of the following:

— Press the A key to accept the entry and schedule the recording.

— The single manual recording icon or the recurring manual

recording icon will be displayed next to the program listing in the Program Guide.

— If there is an error and you need to change some of the information, you can press the left arrow to return to the column that requires editing. Once the information is correct, press the A key to accept.

— Press the C key to cancel the process. No recording will be scheduled.

Note: You can use the Scheduled Recordings, Recorded Shows, or Series Manager screens to set a manual recording. For additional information on this feature, refer to “Using the Scheduled Recordings screen” on page 384.



Manual record ing notes

The following notes apply to manual recordings:

• In the Scheduled Recordings screen, the title of a single instance manual recording appears as “Untitled Recording” until recording starts. At that time, the program title will appear. In addition, if the requested recording time precisely matches the start time and end time of a program, the program title will appear.

• In the Recorded Shows or Scheduled Recordings screen, the title assigned to a single instance manual recording that spans multiple programs is the title of first complete program in the block. If no program in the block is complete, the assigned title is the title of the program that takes up the greatest amount of space in the recording block.

• In the Series Manager, the title of a recurring manual recording appears as “Untitled Recording” unless the scheduled recording time happens to precisely match a program, in which case the program title will appear.

• In the Program Guide, the first program included in the specifications of a manual recording request appears in red. A recording-in-progress icon is displayed in the program title cell.

• In the event of a conflict, manual recording requests have a higher priority than series recording requests. Manual recording requests have the same priority as single instance recordings and will cause Passport Guide DVR to display a conflict dialog.



Record ing a ser ies

Passport Guide DVR allows you to record not just a single episode of a program, but the entire series automatically. You need to set up a series recording only once, and all episodes will automatically be recorded when they are broadcast.

To record a series:



2. Press the arrow keys to select a future program that you want to record as a series.

(You can also use QuickInfo to select a program.)


Passport Guide DVR displays the dialog below.

4. Press the up or down arrow to select the Record entire series option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Series Manager Options menu.

5. Press the arrow keys to specify your preferences for a series recording in the Series Manager Options menu. See the list below.

— Episodes to Record: First run only, First run & repeats

— Channels: KCET 28 only (example), Any channel, HD Only, SD Only

— Air Times: All showings, 12 pm only (example)


— Episodes to Keep: All episodes, Up to 1, Up to 2, ... Up to 5



— Start Time: On time, 1 minute early or late, 2 ... 10 minutes early or late (negative start time)


6. When you have finished specifying options, press the A key.

The series recording (REC) icon will be displayed next to the program listing in the Program Guide.



Cancel ing a record ing f rom the Program Guide

This section explains how to cancel a recording directly from the Program Guide.

You can also cancel a recording from the Scheduled Recordings screen. For additional information, refer to “Using the Scheduled Recordings screen” on page 384.

To cancel a recording from the Program Guide:

1. In the Program Guide, highlight a program that is scheduled to be

recorded. (A record icon [either single or recurring] will appear next

to the program listing.)

2. Press the REC key or SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays one of the following menus:

— If the recording has started (and it is a single instance recording), Passport Guide DVR displays the following menu.

Press the up or down arrow to highlight Stop this recording, then press SELECT.

No more of the show will be recorded. (A partial recording will remain.)

Passport Guide DVR displays the Program Guide. The cell listing for the program is no longer marked for recording.

— If the recording will take place in the future, Passport Guide DVR displays the following menu.

Press the up or down arrow to highlight either Cancel this recording or Cancel this series, then press SELECT.

Note: This menu will display different options depending on whether it is displayed for a single instance show or a series.



— If it is for a single instance show, menu options will include:

• Cancel this recording

• Record entire series



• Record Options...

• List upcoming episodes

— If it is for a series, menu options will include:

• Series Recording Options...

• Cancel this recording

• Cancel this series



• Record Options...

• List upcoming episodes

Passport Guide DVR cancels the scheduled recording and displays the Program Guide.

The cell listing for the program or series is marked by a cancelled recording icon.



Using the Record ing Opt ions menu

The Recording Options menu displays options that are context sensitive. Some options may not be available, depending on program status.

All options are listed in the following table. The following illustration is an example of a typical dialog. It does not display all possible recording options.

Opt ion Descr ipt ion

Record this show This option schedules the program for recording, or starts a recording, if the program is currently being broadcast.

Record this live event

This option is available only when you select a “live” sporting event for recording. This option schedules the live sporting event for recording, or starts the recording if the program is currently being broadcast. Use the Extended end time option to record the event in its entirety if, for example, the game goes into overtime. (Note: For Passport Guide DVR to recognize an event as “live,” the event must be denoted as a live event in the program guide data.)

Record entire series

If the program you wish to record is an episode from a series, this option enables you to record the current program and schedules the entire series for recording. The Series Manager Options menu enables you to specify carious options.

Record in Standard Definition

This option enables you to save hard disk space by recording a high-definition (HD) program in standard definition (SD).

This option will be displayed only in the following situation:

(a) You are setting up a recording from the Program Guide, and (b) The “Auto-tune to HD” preference is turned on (see page 175), and (c) The “Auto-tune to HD” preference has tuned automatically to an HD channel

version of an SD channel you selected.

Create a manual recording

This option enables you to initiate a manual recording of a program. See “Manual recording” on page 350 for details.

Cancel this recording

This option cancels a scheduled recording. If the program is scheduled as part of a series, only this instance of the recording will be cancelled, not the entire series. Use the Cancel this series option to cancel the entire series.

Cancel this series This option cancels an entire series recording. However, currently recording episodes will not be cancelled. (You can stop current recordings by using the Stop this recording option.)

View this channel now

This option displays the selected channel.

Stop this recording This option stops a recording that is in progress.

Remind me about this show

This option creates a Reminder Timer. The Reminder Timer icon is displayed next to the cell listing in the Program Guide and a reminder alert banner will be displayed on your TV one minute before the show starts. For more information, see “Setting a reminder timer” on page 204.




Record Options... This option displays a dialog with additional recording options, such as start and end time and save options. See the following section, “Additional Recording Options menu” on page 360.

Series Recording Options...

This option displays additional options for recording a series. If the program is not a part of a series, this option is grayed out. For more information, see “Recording a series” on page 353.

List upcoming episodes (or shows)

For the selected program, this option displays a list of all upcoming episodes of a series, or all upcoming showings of a non-serial program (such as a movie). It displays the information in the Program Guide/Search results panel, just as if you had run a Search by Title.



To use the Record Options menu:

1. From the Program Guide or the Scheduled Recordings screen, highlight a scheduled recording and press SELECT to display the Record Options menu.

If a recording is in progress, press the REC key or SELECT.

2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Record Options..., then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Recording Options menu.


(See the table above for a list of options. See the following table for ways in which you can customize your recording request.)

4. Press SELECT to accept the highlighted option, or press the C key to exit.



Addi t iona l Record ing Opt ions menu

The Additional Recording Options menu offers additional options that let you customize your recording request.


Save You can manage how programs are retained or erased by the system using the following options:

— Until manually erased: The program will be saved until you manually erase it.

— Until space is needed: The program will automatically be erased when disk space is needed for other recordings.

Start Time You can select whether to start a recording earlier than the scheduled start time using the following options:

— On time

— 1-10 minutes early or late (negative start time)

The Start Time will be greyed-out if you press SELECT or the REC key on a currently-airing program.

For information about the Cropping feature, see “Cropping” on page 401.

End Time You can select whether to end a recording later than the scheduled end time using the following options:

— On time

— 1-5, 15, 30 minutes over

— 1-3 hours over

— 1 - 10 minutes under (negative end time/cropping)

For information about the Cropping feature, see “Cropping” on page 401.



To display the Recording Options menu:

The preceding table describes the options available in the Record Options menu.

1. You can display this dialog in several ways.

— From the Recording dialog, select Record Options...

— From the Schedule Recordings Options menu. For more information, see “Using the Scheduled Recordings screen” on page 384.

— While a show is being recorded, press the REC key and then select Record Options...

— From the Recorded Shows Options menu (from the Recorded Shows screen for an active recording).

2. Press the up or down arrow to select and highlight the desired option.

3. Press the left or right arrow to scroll and highlight the desired sub-options.

4. Press one of the following keys:

— The A key to accept the changes and close the dialog.

— The C key to ignore the changes and close the dialog.



Reso lv ing conf l i c ts

Your set-top box may eventually encounter one of three types of conflicts: recording conflicts, tuner conflicts, or space conflicts. These conflicts can occur in several situations:

• If you try to schedule a recording that overlaps two simultaneous active or scheduled recordings

• If you try to schedule a recording that will not fit on the hard disk due to disk space limitations

• If you try to record an all-day program

• If you try to change channels while recording on both tuners

• If you try to extend the start time or end time for a recording in a way that causes the recording to overlap with another recording

When conflicts occur, Passport Guide DVR displays a conflict message. (See the examples below.)

Passport Guide DVR displays the dialog on the left if you have two simultaneous recordings in progress and try to change the channel.

Passport Guide DVR displays the dialog on the right if you have at least two simultaneous recordings scheduled and you attempt to schedule a new recording that conflicts with the previously scheduled recordings.



The following table lists conflict messages for recordings and provides information about resolving conflicts.

Message Descr ipt ion

To schedule this recording you must make the following changes:

You tried to schedule a recording that overlaps an existing scheduled recording, or you have a programs set to start early or end late. Follow the directions in this message and press the appropriate key, or press the C key to exit.

Note:

— Series recordings are lower priority than single recordings. If a conflict arises due to extended start or end times, the Passport Guide DVR resolves the conflict based on the scheduling priorities you established. For more information, see see “Using the Scheduled Recordings screen” on page 384.

— Changes in the Program Guide may create conflicts with extended start or stop times. These conflicts will be resolved by Passport Guide DVR. Extended end times always take priority over extended start times.

This all-day program is too long to record in its entirety. You may record parts of it using the Manual Record feature.

You tried to schedule a recording of a program that is too long to be recorded in its entirety due to disk space limitations. You can record parts of the program using the manual recording feature.

Press the C key to close the dialog; the recording will not be scheduled.

There are too many conflicts to schedule this recording. You must cancel other recordings.

You have attempted to schedule a recording that will result in multiple recording conflicts. Press the C key to close the dialog without scheduling this recording. You must cancel previously scheduled recordings that conflict with the program you wish to record. To view a list of schedule conflicts, see the Scheduled Recordings screen. For more information, see “Using the Scheduled Recordings screen” on page 384.

Both tuners are currently recording. To change to channel xx, you must first stop the recording:

You tried to select a channel when both tuners were actively recording. To change a channel, you must stop one of the recordings. The dialog enables you to stop either recording and change channels, or continue recording without changing channels.

You may change channels after either recording is finished.

The hard disk does not have enough free space to record this program. To make room, you must erase some recorded shows.

You tried to start a recording but there is not enough hard disk space currently available. Press the A key to acknowledge the message; the recording will not start. You must free up some disk space (that is, erase one or more saved programs) before starting the program. (Refer to “Erasing a saved program” on page 383).



Play ing back recorded programs

Recorded programs are programs that have been saved to the hard disk.

A program may have been saved because a viewer pressed the REC key, or scheduled the program for recording in the Program Guide.

• You can use the playback keys to play, pause, rewind, fast forward or stop the video, play it back in slow motion, or step forward or backward frame-by-frame.

• If a recorded program is subject to Parental Control locking parameters and Parental Control is enabled, you will be asked to disable Parental Control before you can display the video.

To play back a recorded program (a Recorded Show):

1. Display the list of previously recorded programs (Recorded Shows) by pressing the DVR LIST key on your remote control.

2. Press the up or down arrow to select the program you wish to view.

3. Do one of the following

— Press SELECT. Passport Guide DVR displays an Options menu. Then press the up or down arrow to select Play, Play From Beginning, or Resume Playback. (Note: These options are context-sensitive and may not all be displayed.) Then press SELECT again.

— Highlight a recorded program, then press the PLAY key.

The program will begin to play.

Notes:

• The Recorded Shows screen shows you how much of a program was saved. Passport Guide DVR can play back only the recorded part. For example, if Recorded Shows lists a program, but only two minutes were recorded (for example, 9:58 - 10:00), only two minutes of video will be available for playback.

• In the Recorded Shows screen, Start and End times appear in yellow if they differ from the actual start and end times of the broadcast. For example, if the recording started late, the start time appears in yellow, and the end time appears in yellow only if the recording ended early.



• If you press the STOP key, a dialog displays the following options: (A) Stop and erase, (B) Stop and save, and (C) Resume playback.

• When playback of a recorded program ends, Passport Guide DVR displays a dialog asking whether you wish to erase the program or play it again from the beginning.

• If communication to the hard drive is lost, Passport Guide DVR will display the dialog below. You can then choose to display the List menu or reboot the set-top box.

• If you wish to play multiple recorded programs in sequence, for more information see “Playing all programs in a folder sequentially” on page 374, or “Playing all unviewed programs in a folder sequentially” on page 375.



Using the Recorded Shows screen

The Recorded Shows screen provides access to all programs that have been saved to the hard drive or that are currently being recorded.

From the Recorded Shows screen you can also access the Scheduled Recordings and Series Manager screens. (For more information, see “Using the Scheduled Recordings screen” on page 384 and “Using the Series Manager” on page 389.) In addition you can also access the Program Guide, the Lost & Found, and return to full-screen live TV.

On the Recorded Shows screen, shows that have been recorded but not yet viewed are listed in bold text.

Each entry in the Recorded Shows screen contains the following information:

• Program title

• Record date

• Status icons (Recording in Progress, Playback in Progress, Deletion Status).

A Deletion Status icon appears on the left side of each listing in the Recorded Shows screen. In addition, when you highlight a particular show in the list, Passport Guide DVR displays an additional icon and some brief explanatory text on the right side of the display (refer to the figure on page 368).

The following table explains the meaning of each Deletion Status icon and the right side text.

Remain ing t ime Lef t s ide i con

R ight s ide i con R ight s ide text

About 3 days to infinity No icon About <N*> days

(*usually 3 to 7 days)

-or-

More than a week

About 1 to 3 days About <N> days

(1, 2, or 3 days)

Less than a day Less than a day

Program locked. Program will not be automatically deleted by Passport Guide DVR. (However, you can manually delete it.)

Keep



When a program is highlighted, Passport Guide DVR displays additional information:

• Days-until-deletion indicator

• Channel call letters and numbers

• Recording start/end times

• Program description

• Parental Control icon

• Rating icon

• Content Advisory information

• Cropping icons

If Passport Guide DVR is in Group Titles mode (folders mode), the following information is also displayed when a Group Title is highlighted:

• The number of new recordings of the show that are available for playback (if any)

• The date the newest recording of the show was saved (for example, Last recording: 6/18)

• The number of new recordings of the show that are available for playback, if any (for example, New Recordings: 4).



To access the Recorded Shows screen:

1. Press the DVR LIST key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Recorded Shows screen. .

On the Recorded Shows list, you can:

— Press the up or down arrow to highlight a specific program, then press SELECT to display the Recorded Shows Options menu. Refer to “Recorded Shows Options menu” on page 380 for more information.

— Press the REC key to display the Manual Recording dialog.

From the Recorded Shows list, you can use the DVR Menus to access the following Passport Guide DVR features:

— To access the Scheduled Recordings screen, press the DVR LIST key again, then select Scheduled Recordings on the pop-up menu.

— To access the Series Manager, press the DVR LIST key again, then select Series Manager on the pop-up menu.

— To access the Lost & Found recordings list, press the DVR LIST key again, then select Lost & Found on the pop-up menu.

— To access the Program Guide Time Grid, press the DVR LIST key again, then select Time Grid on the pop-up menu. (Alternatively, you could press the EXIT key.)

— To display full-screen live TV, press the DVR LIST key again, then select Back to TV on the pop-up menu.



Sort ing and grouping t i t les on the Recorded Shows screen

By default, Passport Guide DVR lists titles of programs on the Recorded Shows screen in reverse chronological order by scheduled date of erasure (that is, the recorded show that is first scheduled for erasure appears at the bottom of the panel; the most recently recorded show appears at the top).

However, you can group identical titles into folders, which Passport Guide DVR will then list in alphabetical order. This can be a useful way to sort and display programs on the Recorded Shows screen if you record several episodes of the same series.

To group titles into folders or display all recordings:



2. Press the A key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Sort pop-up menu, which includes the following options:

— Show All Listings

— Group Titles

— View Disk Info...

— View Network Info... (optional)

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Group Titles menu option, then press SELECT.



Passport Guide DVR groups all recordings with identical titles (for example, all episodes of a series) into folders of the same name.

The show that was highlighted when you selected the Group Titles menu option appears as an expanded folder (that is, all showings visible).

All other sets of shows with identical titles are grouped into collapsed folders. All folders are listed in alphabetical order.

4. To expand or collapse a folder, press the up or down arrow to highlight the folder, then press SELECT.

Note: Alternatively, if an episode in an expanded list is highlighted, you can press the left arrow to collapse the list into a folder. If a folder is highlighted, you can press the right arrow to expand the folder.

Passport Guide DVR expands or collapses the folder.

5. To again list the programs in reverse chronological order based on date of scheduled erasure, press the A key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Sort pop-up menu.

6. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Show All Listings menu option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR lists all recorded programs in reverse chronological order based on date of scheduled erasure (similar to first screen in this procedure at step 1).

7. To return to full-screen viewing, press the EXIT key.

Alternatively, you can press the DVR LIST key to display the pop-up menu, highlight Back to TV, then press SELECT.



Delet ing a fo lder and i ts contents f rom the Recorded Shows screen

You can delete folders that contain groups of program episodes (including the content of those folders). This function enables you to delete a relatively large number of recorded programs at once.

To delete a folder of grouped titles and its contents:



Note: If the Recorded Shows screen is not already in Grouped Titles mode, press the A key, use the up or down arrows to highlight Group Titles, then press SELECT to enter Group Title mode.

2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the folder you wish to delete, then press the INFO key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following menu.

3. Press the down arrow to highlight Erase All (x min.).

4. Press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays an erasure request confirmation message.

(If you do not want to erase the folder and it contents, press the C key.)



5. Press the A key.

Passport Guide DVR erases the specified folder and its contents.



Delet ing a l l v iewed programs f rom a fo lder on the Recorded Shows screen

You can simultaneously delete all programs that have been viewed from a folder on the Recorded Shows screen. Unviewed programs remain in place.

To delete all viewed programs that are contained in a folder:



Note: If the Recorded Shows list is currently not sorted in Group Titles mode (that is, it displays individual titles not nested in folders) you may wish to first sort the titles into Group Titles mode. To do so, press the A key, select Group Titles from the Sort pop-up menu, then press SELECT. The recordings will be grouped into folders. For more information, see “Sorting and grouping titles on the Scheduled Recordings screen” on page 387.

2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the folder that contains the viewed programs that you wish to delete, then press the INFO key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the menu below.

3. Press the down arrow to highlight Erase All Viewed (x min.).



4. Press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays an erasure request confirmation message.

(If you do not want to erase the viewed programs from the folder, press the C key.)

5. Press the A key.

Passport Guide DVR erases all programs in the selected folder that have already been viewed.





Play ing a l l programs in a fo lder sequent ia l ly

You can use a single menu option to play sequentially all programs in a folder on the Recorded Shows screen.

To play all programs in a folder sequentially:



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the folder that contains the programs that you wish to play sequentially, then press the INFO key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following menu:

3. Press the down arrow to highlight Play all (x min.).

4. Press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR begins to play the first program in the folder. When that program has finished playback, the next program in the folder will play, and so on.





Play ing a l l unv iewed programs in a fo lder sequent ia l ly

You can use a single menu option to play sequentially all not-yet-viewed programs contained in a folder on the Recorded Shows screen.

To play all unviewed programs in a folder sequentially:



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the folder that contains the unviewed programs that you wish to play sequentially, then press the INFO key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the following menu:

3. Press the down arrow to highlight Play all new (x min.), then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR begins to play the first unviewed program in the folder. When that program has finished playback, the next unviewed program in the folder will play, and so on.





Stopping p layback whi le fo lder sequent ia l p layback is in progress

Passport Guide DVR enables you to play all programs in a folder in sequence.

For more information, see “Playing all programs in a folder sequentially” on page 374 and “Playing all unviewed programs in a folder sequentially” on page 375.

To stop playback of a program while sequential playback is in progress, you can press the STOP key.

Passport Guide DVR will display a menu with several options:

• Erase (or Erase now and play next show)

To erase the program, press the up or down arrows to highlight an Erase option, then press SELECT.

(If there is no next show in the folder, the menu option will be Erase.)

Passport Guide DVR will display an erasure request confirmation. Press SELECT to erase the program.

• Save and play next show

To save the current program and begin playing the next program in sequence, press the up or down arrows to highlight Save and play next show, then press SELECT.

• Return to Recorded Shows list

To stop playback and display the Recorded Shows list, press the up or down arrows to highlight Return to Recorded Shows list, then press SELECT.

• Play this show from the beginning

To play the program again from the beginning, press the up or down arrows to highlight Play this show from the beginning, then press SELECT.

• View live TV

To return to live TV, press the up or down arrows to highlight View live TV, then press SELECT.



Checking hard d isk space usage

The Recorded Shows Information (Disk Info) panel features a color-coded bar graph and numerical data for three categories of disk space information. (Note that this panel contains more detail than the bar graph shown near the top of the Recorded Shows screen.) The data is expressed as a percentage of total hard disk space.

• Saved until manually erased

This represents the total duration (expressed as a percentage of total hard disk space) of programs that have been saved to the hard disk--and that you requested to remain on the hard disk until manually erased. In the bar graph, this disk space is color-coded red.

• Automatically erased as needed

This represents the total duration (expressed as a percentage of total hard disk space) of programs that have been saved to the hard disk that you have indicated may be automatically erased by Passport Guide DVR when hard disk space is required to record additional programs. In the bar graph, this disk space is color-coded yellow.

• Estimated free space

This represents an estimated amount of hard disk space (expressed as a percentage of total hard disk space) that is currently available for additional recordings. In the bar graph, this disk space is color-coded green.

Note: On High Definition DVR set-top boxes, this category is labeled as follows:

Estimated free space (fewer hours are available if recording HDTV shows).



To display the Recorded Shows Information (Disk Info) panel:



2. Press the A key.


3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the View Disk Info... menu option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Recorded Shows Information panel.

4. To return to the Recorded Shows screen, press the C key.

5. To return to full-screen viewing from the Recorded Shows screen, press the EXIT key.




Clear ing space on the hard d isk

If your hard disk fills up with locked programming and you try to record another program, Passport Guide DVR will display the following dialog indicating that you must clear space on the hard disk before you can record additional programs.

• Press C to continue.

The program will be scheduled for recording. However, recording will not start until you have cleared sufficient space on the hard disk. Once you have cleared sufficient space, the recording will start automatically.

You can erase programs from the hard disk by following the stepsdescribed in the section “Erasing a saved program” on page 383.

Note: Programs recorded in high-definition (HD) require substantially more hard disk space than programs recorded in standard definition (SD). You may on occasion wish to record HD programs in standard definition to save hard disk space. For more information on recording HD programs in standard definition, see “Recording a current or future program from the Program Guide” on page 346 and “Auto-tuning to high-definition (HDTV) channels” on page 175.



Recorded Shows Opt ions menu

The Recorded Shows Options menu provides several options for recorded programs. These options are context-sensitive. Not all options are available at all times.

.


Record Options If Passport Guide DVR is currently recording, this option displays the Recording Options menu.

Play Starts playback from the beginning. If you select Play for an active recording, Passport Guide DVR displays the recording in progress (full display).

Stop Recording Stops the currently selected recording.

Erase Displays the Erase Confirmation dialog if the program is not currently recording. Press the A key to confirm that you want to erase the highlighted program. Press the C key to exit without making a change. This option is not displayed if the program is currently recording.

Play From Beginning

Starts playback of a recorded program from the beginning of the recording. This option is displayed only if the program has been partially viewed before and is not currently recording.

Play All Plays all recorded programs in the selected folder sequentially, beginning with the program listed first. (Displayed only when Recorded Shows are Grouped by Title and viewer presses INFO on a folder name.)

Play All New Plays all new recorded programs (that is, programs that have never been played before) in the selected folder sequentially, beginning with the first new program. (Displayed only when Recorded Shows are Grouped by Title and viewer presses INFO on a folder name.)

Erase All Erases all recorded programs in the selected folder. (Displayed only when Recorded Shows are Grouped by Title and viewer presses INFO on a folder name.)

Erase All Viewed Erases all recorded programs in the selected folder that have already been viewed. (Displayed only when Recorded Shows are Grouped by Title and viewer presses INFO on a folder name.)

Resume Playback Starts playback at the point the program was last stopped. (For example, if you watched 15 minutes of the recording yesterday, playback to will resume at the 15minute mark.) This option is displayed only if a program has been partially viewed.




Keep Longer... Displays the Recorded Shows Priority panel. This option is available for current and previous recordings. This option is displayed only if the program is set to Save until space is needed. For more information, refer to “Using the storage priority screen” on page 382.

Save until manually erased

The recording will not be erased until you manually erase it. This option is displayed if the show is currently set to Save until space is needed.

Save until space is needed

The recording can now be erased if additional space is required on the hard drive. This option is displayed if the show is currently set to Save until manually erased.

To access the Recorded Shows Options menu:


Passport Guide DVR displays Recorded Shows screen.

2. On the Recorded Shows screen, highlight a program and then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Recorded Shows Options menu. Options are listed in the table above.

3. Highlight an option and then:

— Press SELECT to execute the option, or

— Press the C key to exit the dialog without executing an option.

Disp lay ing in format ion about a recorded show

You can display detailed information about a Recorded Show.

To do so, highlight the show listing, then press the INFO key.



Using the storage pr ior i ty screen

The storage priority screen enables you to set or change the storage priority of your recorded programs. Programs at the top of the list are saved longer; programs at the bottom of the list are erased first.

Note: Passport Guide DVR follows the priority you establish here when it deletes programs to free disk space.

To access the storage priority screen:



2. Press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Recorded Shows Options menu.

3. In the Recorded Shows Options menu, select the Keep Longer... option, and then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the storage priority screen.

4. Press the up or down arrow to move the highlighted program up or down the list.

Note: Programs that are higher on the list will be erased later (that is, saved longer); items lower on the list will be erased sooner.

5. Press SELECT to drop the program into the new location in the list.

Passport Guide DVR returns to the Recorded Shows screen.



Eras ing a saved program

Use the following procedure to erase a saved program.

To erase a saved program:



2. Press the up or down arrow to select a recorded program, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Recorded Shows Options menu.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Erase, and then press SELECT.

A message asks if you are sure you want to permanently erase the recording.

4. To erase the program, press the A key.



Using the Scheduled Record ings screen

The Scheduled Recordings screen displays a list of active and upcoming recordings.

It also displays the number of upcoming recordings near the top of the panel.

When a recording is finished, it is removed from the Scheduled Recordings screen, and listed in the Recorded Shows screen.

Note: Recordings in progress are displayed in both the Recorded Shows and Scheduled Recordings screens.

Each entry in the Scheduled Recordings screen contains the following information:

• Program Title

If you have set up a Manual Recording or a Manual Recurring Recording, the program title might not be specified in the Scheduled Recordings screen until recording starts. The program title may appear temporarily as “Untitled Recording.”

• Scheduled Record Date

— Programs scheduled to be recorded on the current day display “Today.”

— Programs scheduled to be recorded over the next six days display a weekday (abbreviated; for example, SAT, SUN).

— Programs scheduled to be recorded beyond six days away, use the mm/ dd format.

• No record icon

This icon is displayed if Passport Guide DVR cannot record a program due to a tuner conflict, or if a scheduled recording has been cancelled.

• Recording in Progress icon

Displayed if the program is an active recording.

• Cropping icon

Displayed if the program has been manually or automatically cropped.



When you highlight a program, Passport Guide DVR provides additional information, including:

• Channel call letters and numbers

• Start time and end time of the original showing

• Parental control rating

• Program description

• Content Advisory information

• Recording icon (Series Header or Keyword Header icon, manual record icon, or recurrent manual recording icon)

To access the Scheduled Recordings screen:

1. On the Recorded Shows or Series Manager screens, press the DVR LIST key to display the pop-up menu, highlight Scheduled Recordings, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Scheduled Recordings screen, which shows a list of individual scheduled recordings in reverse chronological order based on the scheduled date of recording (the top item will be recorded soonest).

— Press the up or down arrow to scroll and highlight a specific scheduled recording. Press SELECT to display the Scheduled Recording Options menu.

For more information, see “Scheduled Recording Options menu” on page 386.



Scheduled Record ing Opt ions menu

The Scheduled Recordings Options menu provides two or three options for recorded programs.

Op t ion s Descr ipt ion

Stop Recording This option is displayed only when the system is currently recording. Selecting this option stops the recording and closes the dialog.

Record Options This option displays the Recording Options menu. For additional information on recording options, see “Additional Recording Options menu” on page 360.

Cancel Recording This option is displayed only when a future recording is highlighted. Selecting this option removes the program from the Scheduled Recordings screen. Passport Guide DVR will display a cancelled recording icon next to the listing of the program in the Scheduled Recordings screen (and also in the Program Guide).

Note: For information on deleting a series recording request and on other options related to managing a series recording, see “Series Manager Options menu” on page 391.

To access the Scheduled Recording Options menu:


Passport displays the Recorded Shows screen.

2. Press the DVR LIST key again to display the pop-up menu, highlight Scheduled Recordings, then press SELECT.

Passport displays the Scheduled Recordings screen.

3. Press the up or down arrow to select and highlight a specific scheduled recording, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Scheduled Recording Options menu.


Refer to the table above for additional information on available options.



Sorting and grouping titles on the Scheduled Recordings screen

By default, Passport Guide DVR lists titles of programs on the Scheduled Recordings screen in reverse chronological order by scheduled date of recording.

However, you can group identical titles into folders, which Passport Guide DVR will then list in alphabetical order. This can be a useful way to sort and display programs on the Scheduled Recordings screen if you schedule recordings of multiple episodes of the same series.

To group titles into folders or display all scheduled recordings:


Passport Guide DVR displays the Scheduled Recordings screen.

2. Press the A key.



— Group Titles


— View Network Info...

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Group Titles menu option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR groups all scheduled recordings with identical titles (for example, all episodes of a series) into folders of the same name.



The show that was highlighted when you selected the Group Titles menu option appears as an expanded folder (that is, all showings visible). (Note: The sample screen below shows a highlighted collapsed folder.)

All other sets of shows with identical titles are grouped into collapsed folders.

All folders are listed in alphabetical order.




5. To again list the programs in reverse chronological order based on scheduled recording date, press the A key.


6. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Show All Listings menu option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR lists all recorded programs in reverse chronological order based on scheduled recording date.





Using the Ser ies Manager

The Series Manager enables you to modify recording parameters for each of your series recordings. The changes you make to the series recording will affect each episode in the series.

Note: Be careful when you make changes to the Save option in the Series Record Options menu. If you set the Save option to “Until manually erased,” all episodes in the series will be locked.

It is possible that your changes will cause Passport Guide DVR to fill the hard disk drive with programs that must be manually erased, thereby preventing other recordings from taking place.

For information on recording a series, refer to “Recording a series” on page 353.

When you access the Series Manager screen, you will see a list of the series that you have set up for recording. The Series Manager screen also displays the number of series recordings near the top of the panel (for example, 10 Series recordings).

To access the Series Manager:



2. Press the DVR LIST key again to display the pop-up menu, press the up or down arrow to highlight Series Manager, then press SELECT.



Passport Guide DVR displays the Series Manager.

3. You may select one of the following options:

— Press the up or down arrow to highlight a series, and then press SELECT to display the Series Manager Options menu. (For additional information, see “Series Manager Options menu” on page 391.)

— To display the Recorded Shows screen, press the DVR LIST key again to display the pop-up menu, highlight Recorded Shows, then press SELECT.

— To display the Scheduled Recordings screen, press the DVR LIST key again to display the pop-up menu, highlight Scheduled Recordings, then press SELECT.

— To display the Lost & Found recordings panel, press the DVR LIST key again to display the pop-up menu, highlight Lost & Found, then press SELECT.

— To access the Program Guide Time Grid, press the DVR LIST key again to display the pop-up menu, highlight Time Grid, then press SELECT.

— To display full-screen live TV, press the DVR LIST key again to display the pop-up menu, highlight Back to TV, then press SELECT.

4. To exit the Series Manager, press the EXIT key.



Ser ies Manager Opt ions menu

The Series Manager Options menu provides several options for managing series recordings.

Op t ion Descr ipt ion

Series Recording Priority

Displays the Series Recording Priority panel. For more information, see “Assigning priority to series recordings” on page 394.

Note: This option will be greyed-out if only one series is scheduled.

Series Recording Options

Displays the Series Recording Options menu. For more information, see “Series Recording Options menu” on page 396.

Series Repeat Options

Displays the Series Repeat Options menu. For more information, see “Series Repeat Options menu” on page 399.

Cancel Series Recording

Removes the currently-selected series recording from the list. Removes any unrecorded scheduled recordings for the series from the Scheduled Recordings screen. For more information, see “Canceling a series recording” on page 400.

To display the Series Manager Options menu:





3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight a series, then press SELECT.


— Press the up or down arrow to highlight an option on the Series Manager Options menu, then press SELECT.

— Press the C key to cancel any changes and exit the dialog.

5. To exit the Series Manager, press the EXIT key.



Sort ing the Ser ies Manager by pr ior i ty or t i t le

You can sort the series titles listed on the Series Manager screen by recording priority, or in alphabetical order by title.

To sort series titles by priority or title:



2. Press the DVR LIST key again.

Passport Guide DVR displays the pop-up menu.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Series Manager option, then press SELECT.


4. Press the A key.


— Sort by Priority

— Sort by Title





5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight either the Sort by Priority or Sort by Title menu option, then press SELECT.

— Sort by Priority

If you select Sort by Priority, Passport Guide DVR will sort all series in order of recording priority. (For more information on series priority, see “Assigning priority to series recordings” on page 394.)

— Sort by Title

If you select Sort by Title, Passport Guide DVR will list the series titles in alphabetical order.

6. To close the dialog without making any changes, press the C key.



Ass ign ing pr ior i ty to ser ies record ings

The Series Recording Priority panel enables you to assign and adjust the recording priority of a series.

If there is a conflict between scheduled series recordings, Passport Guide DVR will record the episode from the series that is higher in the priority list.

Note: To assign priority to a series recording, it may be convenient to first sort the listing by priority. You can view the priority assignments in Sort by Priority mode. (For more information, see “Sorting the Series Manager by priority or title” on page 392.)

To display the Series Recording Priority panel:




Passport Guide DVR displays the pop-up menu

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Series Manager, then press SELECT.


4. Press the A key.

Passport Guide DVR displays a pop-up menu.



5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Sort by Priority menu option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR sorts all series in order of recording priority.



7. Press the arrows to highlight Series Recording Priority..., then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Series Recording Priority panel.


— Press the up arrow to move the series higher in the list, making it a higher priority for recording in the event of a conflict.

— Press the down arrow to move the series lower in the list, making it a lower priority for recording in the event of a conflict

— To make no changes, do not move the selected series recording.

9. Press SELECT to set the new priority position of the selected series.



Ser ies Record ing Opt ions menu

The Series Recording Options menu provides several options for managing scheduled series. The changes you make here will be reflected on ALL scheduled recordings for a particular series.


Episodes to Record

Press the left or right arrow to select one of the following:

— First run & repeats: Schedules recordings for both new broadcasts and reruns.

— First run only: Schedules recordings for new broadcasts only.

Channels Press the left or right arrow to select one of the following:

— Any channel: Schedules recordings of episodes that air on any channel.

— Call letters/channel number only: Schedules recordings of episodes airing only on the specified channel.

— HD Only

— SD Only

Air Times Press the left or right arrow to select one of the following:

— All showings: Schedules recordings for all episodes airing at any time.

— 00:00xx only: 00:00xx is the air time you selected when initiating the series recording. If you selected a program that airs at 6:00 pm, then the option listed is 6:00 pm, and only the 6:00 pm broadcast of the program is scheduled for recording.

Save Press the left or right arrow to select one of the following:

— Until space is needed: This permits the system to erase a program automatically when space is needed for other recordings.

— Until manually erased: The recordings from this series will not be erased automatically; you must manually erase these programs.

Note: Setting one or more series to the “Until manually erased” option could cause Passport Guide DVR to fill your hard drive with programs that will not be erased automatically. This could prevent Passport Guide DVR from recording other programs. If you choose to save programs until they are manually erased, be certain that hard disk space is available for future recordings.



Op t ion Desc r ip t ion

Episodes to Keep Press the left or right arrow to select the number of episodes you wish to keep in the Recorded Shows screen after they are recorded. Options include the following:

— All episodes: Every episode recorded from the series will be saved and displayed in the Recorded Shows screen, unless the episode is erased.

— Up to X: This option enables you to specify that you wish to keep up to five episodes. (For example, if the number is set to 2, when the third episode airs, the first episode will be erased.) Press the right arrow to increment the count; press the right arrow to decrement the count.

Start Time Press the left or right arrow to select a start time for the recordings from the following options.

— On time: All scheduled recordings for the series will start at the time the program is scheduled to air.

— X minutes early or late: You can choose from 1-10 minutes early or late by pressing the left or right arrows. This option might help to avoid missing the beginning of a program that airs a little early or the ending of a program that airs a little late.

For information about the Cropping feature, please see “Cropping” on page 401.

End Time Press the left or right arrow to select an end time for the recordings from the following options:

— On time: All scheduled recordings for the series will end exactly at the time at which the program is scheduled to end.

— X minutes/hours over or under: You can choose from the following: 1-5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, or 3 hours over or under by pressing the left or right arrows. The recording will extend past (or retract before) the normally scheduled time by the amount of time indicated.

For information about the Cropping feature, please see “Cropping” on page 401.

The Series Recording Options menu is also displayed when you create a series recording from the Program Guide or live TV. The following procedure explains how to display the Series Recording Options menu from the Series Manager.

To display the Series Recording Options menu:





3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight a series, and then press SELECT.


4. Press the arrow keys to highlight Series Recording Options, and then press SELECT.



Passport Guide DVR displays the Series Recording Options menu.

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight an option. Press the right or left arrow to change its status.


— Press the A key to accept the changes and close the dialog.

— Press the C key to ignore the changes and close the dialog.



Ser ies Repeat Opt ions menu

The Series Repeat Options menu enables you to specify the days of the week on which you want to record an episode of a series.


Any day is okay The series will be recorded regardless of day.

Monday through Friday only The series will be recorded on weekdays only.

Saturday and Sunday only The series will be recorded on weekends only.

Individual Days (Monday - Sunday)

The series will be recorded on an individual day or combination of days.

To display the Series Repeat Options menu:

1. Use the procedure described in the previous section to display the Series Manager options.


3. Press the arrow keys to highlight Series Repeat Options, and then press SELECT.

4. Press the up or down keys to highlight an option.

5. Press SELECT to select or deselect the option(s).

A dot appears to the left of selected days on which a recording occurs.


— Press the A key to accept the options and close the dialog

— Press the C key to ignore the changes and close the dialog.



Cancel ing a ser ies record ing

To cancel a series recording:



2. Press the DVR LIST key again to display the pop-up menu, then press the up or down arrow to highlight Series Manager, then press SELECT.


3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight a series, and then press SELECT.


4. Press the arrow keys to highlight the Cancel Series Recording option.

Passport Guide DVR displays a confirmation request message.


— To cancel the series, press the A key.

— To ignore the message and close the dialog without canceling the series, press the C key.



Cropping

Passport Guide DVR features a cropping function that ensures the recording of high priority programs in their entirety--even if the programs start or end at times other than the top or bottom of the hour and conflict with other scheduled recording requests.

The Passport Guide DVR system features two tuners, which enable you to record two programs on different channels at the same time. However, since many programs do not start precisely at the top (for example, 1:00pm) or bottom (for example, 1:30pm) of the hour, scheduled recording requests can sometimes overlap.

In the following example, the viewer has scheduled four shows for recording. The shows have been assigned the following priority:

1. Late Show With David Letterman (11:35pm to 12:37am)

2. Zoolander (12:30am to 2:00am)

3. Charlie Rose (11:30pm to 12:30am)

4. BBC World News (12:30am to 1:30am)

Passport Guide DVR will automatically crop shows of lower priority to allow all four shows to be recorded (even though one or more lower priority shows may not be recorded in their entirety).

11:30pm 12:00am 12:30am 1:00am

2 CBS

3 KCET

4 NBC

Late Show with David Letterman

Charlie Rose BBC World News

Zoolander

REC

REC

REC

REC

Automatically cropped segment

Priority is determined in accordance with standard Passport Guide DVR conflict resolution criteria. By default, the most recently scheduled single instance recording request is assigned highest priority, followed by the most recently scheduled Series Recording requests.

Note: You can modify series recording priority by using the Series Recording Priority panel. For more information, see “Assigning priority to series recordings” on page 394.



Automat ic cropping

If a scheduled recording request overlaps two concurrently scheduled recordings by 10 minutes or less, Passport Guide DVR will automatically crop (trim the recording time of) the programs of lower priority so that the highest priority program will be recorded in its entirety. Programs of lower priority will still be recorded, although up to ten minutes of time may be cropped from their beginning or end to accommodate programs of higher priority.

Manual cropping

Passport Guide DVR will automatically crop shows as described in the preceding sections. However, you can modify or fine-tune cropping amounts to suit your preferences.

In the example below, the viewer has decided to crop seven minutes from the end of the Late Show With David Letterman to enable Passport Guide DVR to record the beginning of BBC World News.

11:30pm 12:00am 12:30am 1:00am

2 CBS

3 KCET

4 NBC

Late Show with David Lett...

Charlie Rose BBC World News

Zoolander

REC

REC

REC

REC

Manually cropped segment

Follow the procedure below to manually crop time from the beginning or end of a scheduled recording request:

To crop time manually:



2. Press the DVR LIST key again to display the pop-up menu.


— Press the up or down arrow to highlight Scheduled Recordings if you want to manually crop time from a scheduled recording request.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Scheduled Recordings screen.

— Press the up or down arrow to highlight Series Manager if you want to manually crop time from a series recording request.




4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the program or series you wish to manually crop, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Recording Options menu.

5. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Record Options... or Series Recording Options..., then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Scheduled Recording Options menu or the Series Manager Options menu.

6. Press the down arrow repeatedly to highlight the Start Time or End Time option.

7. Repeatedly press the left or right arrow to adjust the Start Time or End Time up to 10 minutes early or late.

Passport Guide DVR will adjust the start time or end for the program or series accordingly (for example, 5 minutes late) and display a Cropping icon to the right.



Passport Guide DVR will display a Cropping icon when the relevant program is highlighted in the Recorded Shows, Scheduled Recordings or Series Manager screens. Any cropped Start Time or End Time will be displayed in yellow text.



Using Lost & Found to f ind miss ing record ings

Occasionally the viewer may expect to see a program listed in the Recorded Shows screen--but discovers that the show is missing from the list.

The show may not be listed for one of two likely reasons:

• A scheduled recording failed to record due to technical glitches, changes to guide data, scheduling conflicts, automatic or manual cancellations, or other reasons.

• A member of the viewer’s household accidentally or intentionally deleted a recorded show.

The Lost & Found screen offers the viewer a chance to see why a show was not recorded or why it is missing from the Recorded Shows list.

The Lost & Found screen also offers the viewer a chance to recover and view listed programs under certain situations. (For more information on retrieving and restoring Lost & Found programs, see “Recovering a manually erased show” on page 411.)

When a viewer highlights a title, the Lost & Found screen displays the following information for the recording:

• Channel number and name

• Start time and end time

• The reason the title appears in the Lost & Found list, if known

Explanation of why show is listed in Lost & Found

To access the Lost & Found screen:




Passport Guide DVR displays the DVR Menus pop-up.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Lost & Found option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Lost & Found screen.



Grouping t i t les in the Lost & Found

The Lost & Found enables you to:

• List all shows in the Lost & Found in reverse chronological order by scheduled date of recording, or

• Group all shows with identical titles into folders, which are then listed in alphabetical order.

To group titles or show all listings on the Lost & Found screen:

1. On the Lost & Found screen, press the A key.



— Group Titles




— If you wish to list all of the shows that are currently in the Lost & Found, press the up or down arrow to highlight Show All Listings, then press SELECT.



Passport Guide DVR will list all Lost & Found shows in reverse chronological order (that is, the most recently-lost show appears at the top of the list).

— If you wish to group into folders all of the shows that are currently in the Lost & Found that share identical titles, press the up or down arrow to highlight the Group Titles menu option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR groups all of the shows that are currently in the Lost & Found that share identical titles (for example, all episodes of a series) into folders of the same name.

The show that was highlighted when you selected the Group Titles menu option appears as an expanded folder (that is, all showings visible).

All other sets of shows with identical titles are grouped into collapsed folders that are listed in alphabetical order.






Delet ing a program from the Lost & Found

The Lost & Found screen enables you to permanently delete listed program titles.

Once you delete a program title from the Lost & Found screen, it is permanently deleted from the hard disk and cannot be retrieved. (For more information on the possibility of retrieving programs from the Lost & Found for viewing, see “Recovering a manually erased show” on page 411.)

(After a certain number of days, listings for shows that are not retrievable but that are listed in the Lost & Found will be deleted automatically by Passport Guide DVR.)

To permanently delete a program from the Lost & Found screen:

1. On the Lost & Found screen, press the up or down arrow to highlight the show that you want to delete, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Lost & Found Options menu, which may include the following options, depending on the context:

— Save until space is needed

— Save until manually erased

— Clear show now

— Clear recording now


2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight Clear recording now or Clear show now, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR permanently deletes the program title from the Lost & Found screen, and the associated video asset from the hard disk (if it was available).



F ind ing an upcoming showing of an erased or fa i led record ing

The Lost & Found screen enables you to search for upcoming showings of a listed program. This feature can help you locate and record a show you missed.

If the Program Guide data includes an additional showing of the program, you can schedule Passport Guide DVR to record it.

If the Program Guide data does not include an additional showing of the program, you can request Passport Guide DVR to record it if and when it becomes available.

To find an upcoming erased or failed recording:

1. On the Lost & Found screen, press the up or down arrow to highlight the show for which you want to list upcoming showings, then press SELECT.




— Clear show now





2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight List upcoming shows, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Program Guide Search by Title panel, listing all upcoming episodes or showings of the program you selected that are currently listed in the Program Guide data.

If no additional showings of the program are included in the Program Guide data, Passport Guide DVR displays an empty Program Guide Search by Title panel, enabling you to request that Passport Guide DVR record the show if and when it becomes available.

For more information on using the Program Guide Search by Title feature, “Displaying the Recorded Shows screen” on page 87.



Recover ing a manual ly erased show

The Lost & Found screen offers the possibility of retrieving and viewing shows under certain circumstances, as outlined below:

• You may be able to retrieve shows that were manually erased from the Recorded Shows screen.

• You cannot retrieve shows that were automatically erased from the Recorded Shows screen, even if the title is listed in the Lost & Found.

• If a show was not recorded (due to technical problems, scheduling conflicts, changes in guide data), it cannot be retrieved, even if the title is listed in the Lost & Found.

Durat ion o f l i s t ing

If a recording was manually deleted, you may be able to recover and view the recording--up until the hard disk space is reclaimed and used to record another program. Once the disk space is reclaimed, the title will remain in the Lost & Found list for 14 days, but the recording will no longer be recoverable.

In all other cases, the title will remain in the Lost & Found list for 14 days (but the recording will no longer be recoverable).

To recover a manually erased show:

1. On the Lost & Found screen, press the up or down arrow to highlight the show you want to retrieve, then press SELECT.




— Clear show now







If you select Save until space is needed, Passport Guide DVR will retrieve the program and save it until space is needed.


If you select Save until manually erased, Passport Guide DVR will retrieve the program and save it until it is manually erased by you or a household member.

Note: If a show is not retrievable, the Save until space is needed or Save until manually erased menu options will not be available.

In either case, the program will be restored to the Recorded Shows screen and will be available for viewing.


10


Passport Guide DVR Applications

This chapter explains how to use various Passport Guide DVR applications. The availability of these applications is determined by your cable operator.

This chapter includes the following main sections:

• “About Passport Guide DVR applications” on page 414

• “Playing the Games application” on page 414

• “Selecting a game” on page 415

• “Passport Guide DVR Weather application” on page 419

• “Displaying a Weather application report” on page 420

• “Specifying a new location for the Weather application” on page 421

• “Remote Wizard application” on page 423

• “Fingerprint application” on page 430


Chapte r 10—Passpor t Gu ide DVR App l i ca t i ons

About Passport Guide DVR appl icat ions

Passport Guide DVR may enable you to access a variety of channel applications, such as Games and the Weather application.

These applications may or may not be available on your set-top box. Availability is determined by your cable operator.

It is possible that your cable operator may offer access to these games and applications, and may choose to enable access via the QuickMenu.

Play ing the Games appl icat ion

Depending on decisions made by your cable operator, Passport Guide DVR may enable you to play video card games on screen. Currently available games include Klondike Solitaire, Twenty One or Bust, and Poker 5 Card Draw.

Your cable operator may choose to make these games available and may choose to enable access to the games by using the QuickMenu. (For more information, see “Using Passport QuickMenu™” on page 147.)

The figure below shows an example of a QuickMenu with the Cool Products menu category selected. (This menu category name is merely an example.) The actual name of the menu option on your screen will be determined by your cable operator.



Select ing a game

1. Press the MENU key.


Note: Your cable operator may choose to enable access to the games by using the QuickMenu. (For more information, see “Using Passport QuickMenu™” on page 147.) Alternatively, your cable operator may choose to enable access to the Games application in another manner. (For more information, contact your cable operator.)

2. Press the left or right arrow to select the appropriate menu category (which will vary by location).

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Games Application menu option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a game selection panel, which offers the following options:

— Klondike Solitaire

— Twenty One or Bust

— Poker 5 Card Draw

4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the game you wish to play, then press SELECT.

(Alternatively, you can simply press the A, B, or C key to select a game.)

Passport Guide DVR displays the initial panel for the game you selected.

— For information on Klondike Solitaire, see “Klondike Solitaire” on page 416.

— For information on Twenty One or Bust, see “Twenty One or Bust” on page 417.

— For information on Poker 5 Card Draw, see “Poker 5 Card Draw” on page 418.

5. When you have finished playing the Games application, press EXIT.



Klondike So l i ta i re

• If you selected Klondike Solitaire, Passport Guide DVR displays a panel similar to the screen below.

Press the A key to start the game.

•

•

If you need instructions on how to play, press the B key.

Passport Guide DVR displays helpful instructions on how to play the game.

In the Help section, press the B key to re-display the game.

When you wish to quit playing the game, press the C key to exit.

Passport Guide DVR may display an Attention panel warning you that you are about to leave the game and that no record of your game will be saved.

If necessary, press the A key to confirm.



Twenty One or Bust

• If you selected Twenty One or Bust, Passport Guide DVR displays a panel similar to the screen below.


• If you need instructions on how to play, press the B key.


In the Help section, press the B key to re-display the game.

• When you wish to quit playing the game, press the C key to exit.





Poker 5 Card Draw

• If you selected Poker 5 Card Draw, Passport Guide DVR displays a panel similar to the screen below.


•

•

If you need instructions on how to play, press the B key.


Press B to re-display the game.

When you wish to quit playing the game, press the C key to exit.





Passport Guide DVR Weather appl icat ion

Depending on decisions made by your cable operator, Passport Guide DVR may enable you to display a five-day weather report for your location. This weather report may be made available by City, and in some cases, by Zip Code as well.

Your cable operator may choose to make the Passport Guide DVR Weather application available, and may also choose to enable access to the application by using the QuickMenu. (For more information, see “Using Passport QuickMenu™” on page 147.)

The figure below shows a QuickMenu with the Cool Products menu category selected. This is merely an example. The name of the menu options that will actually on your screen will be determined by your cable operator.



Display ing a Weather appl icat ion report

1. Press the MENU key.


Note: Your cable operator may choose to enable access to the Weather application by using the QuickMenu. (For more information, see “Using Passport QuickMenu™” on page 147.) Alternatively, your cable operator may choose to enable access to the Weather application in another manner. (For more information, contact your cable operator.)

2. Press the left or right arrow to select the appropriate menu category (which will vary by location).

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Weather menu option, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a five day weather report for the current city (example below).

4. When you have finished reviewing the information available in the Weather application, press EXIT.

Passport Guide DVR displays full screen video.



Spec i fy ing a new locat ion for the Weather appl icat ion

1. While the Weather application screen is displayed (see page 420), press the A key.

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of available states (example below).

2. Press the arrow keys to highlight the name of a state. Then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of available cities in the specified state (example below).

Optional: Press the C key to display a forecast for the default location.

Note: ZIP Codes may not be displayed on your TV, depending on how your cable operator chooses to configure the Weather application server.



3. Press the arrow keys to highlight the name of a city. Then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a five day weather report for the updated city(example below).

Optional: Press the C key to display a forecast for the default location.



Remote Wizard appl icat ion

Passport Guide DVR features an illustrated Remote Wizard application that helps you identify the type of remote control you plan to use to control your TV (and depending on the remote control you are using, possibly your DVD player, audio volume level, or other devices).

The Remote Wizard application includes simple instructions to help you set up your remote control to work with the various devices connected to your entertainment system.

You can access the Remote Control menu option by using the QuickMenu, or by tuning to the appropriate channel by keying channel numbers, using the Program Guide, or using QuickInfo.

The figure below shows a QuickMenu with the Cool Products menu category selected. This is merely an example. The actual name of the menu options on your screen will be determined by your cable operator



Set t ing up the Passport Guide DVR remote to operate your DVD p layer

1. Tune to the remote control channel.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Remote Wizard application, which includes a graphic of a remote control (example below).

2. Press the up or down arrow repeatedly until an image that looks like your remote control is displayed, then press SELECT (or the right arrow).

Passport Guide DVR displays the Device menu (for example, TV, DVD, Audio).

Note: The list of devices in the Device column in the example screen below is established when Passport Guide DVR reads in the related information for the selected remote control. This information may vary depending on the remote control.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight DVD, then press SELECT (or the right arrow).

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of DVD player brand names.



4.

5.

6.

Press the up or down arrow to highlight the brand name of your DVD player, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a set of instructions that explain how to set up your Passport Guide DVR remote control to operate the specified model of DVD player.

Read the instructions to learn how to complete the set-up.

If necessary, press the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN keys to turn the pages of the instructional text.

When you have finished reviewing the set-up instructions, press EXIT.



Setting up the Passport Guide DVR remote to operate your TV




Passport Guide DVR displays the Device menu.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight TV, then press SELECT (or the right arrow).

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of TV brand names.



4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the brand name of your TV, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a set of instructions that explain how to set up your Passport Guide DVR remote control to operate the specified model of TV.

5. Read the instructions to learn how to complete the set-up.


6. When you have finished reviewing the set-up instructions, press EXIT.



Set t ing up the Passport Guide DVR remote to adjust the audio leve l




Passport Guide DVR displays the Device menu.

3. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the Audio menu option, then press SELECT (or the right arrow).

Passport Guide DVR displays a list of audio system brand names.



4. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the brand name of your audio system, then press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays a set of instructions that explain how to set up your specific model of remote control to control the audio system volume.

5. Read the instructions to learn how to complete the set-up.


6. When you have finished reviewing the instructions, press EXIT.



F ingerpr int appl icat ion

If appropriately configured at the head-end, the Fingerprint application will display the Unit address of a set-top box on specifically-configured channels for a short period of time (for example, two minutes every 15 minutes).

Cable head-end administration can also specify that the Unit address be displayed in a selected screen location (that is, a location selected from a variety of pre-configured locations made available to administrators by the software).

Unit address


11


Purchasing Premium Services using the iSubscribe Application

This chapter describes the iSubscribe® application. It includes the following sections:

• “About iSubscribe” on page 432

• “Purchasing services from a single offer iSubscribe screen” on page 433

• “Purchasing services from a multiple offer iSubscribe screen” on page 436

• “Purchasing services from the All iSubscribe Offers channel” on page 440

• “Selecting an offer that has already been purchased” on page 445

• “Selecting unsubscribed channels not associated with any offers” on page 446

• “Selecting iSubscribe application channels from the Program Guide” on page 446


Chapte r 11—Purchas ing P remium Serv i ces us ing the iSubsc r i be App l i ca t i on

About iSubscr ibe

The iSubscribe® application enables you to purchase unsubscribed premium services using your set-top box's remote control. When you select an unsubscribed premium channel associated with an iSubscribe offer, the iSubscribe application interface displays information about that offer.

The iSubscribe application is configurable by your cable operator. It may not be available on your system.

The iSubscribe application offers consist of one or more premium services. Offers consisting of more than one premium service are typically called packages. For example, if you order the HBO/Cinemax package, you might get HBO, HBO2, HBO Signature, HBO Family, HBO Latino, HBO HD, Cinemax, More Max, Action Max, etc.

Since multiple offers may be associated with a single service, the iSubscribe application enables you to scroll left and right to browse other offers, if available. You may then select an offer, obtain detailed information about terms, conditions and pricing, and purchase a subscription--all by conveniently using your remote control.

Additionally, the iSubscribe application features an All Offers screen, which enables you to browse or purchase any available offer.



Purchas ing serv ices f rom a s ing le o f fer iSubscr ibe screen

Passport Guide DVR displays the Single Offer iSubscribe screen when you select an unsubscribed premium channel that is associated with only one offer. This screen (imposed over a dark gray background) blocks all video from view. The channel’s audio is muted.

To purchase services from a Single Offer iSubscribe screen:

1. Select an unsubscribed premium channel associated with only one offer.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Single Offer iSubscribe screen.

Note: If more text than fits in the visible display area is available, an active PAGE +/- indicator appears in the lower right of the screen. Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys on your remote to scroll the text.



2. Press the B key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Pricing/Terms and Conditions screen.

3. Review the pricing, terms, and conditions associated with the offer.



— If the Purchase PIN is disabled, press the A key (Complete Order) to complete the purchase.

Passport Guide DVR displays the cover screen while your order is being processed. You may launch and view other channels during this time.

— If the Purchase PIN is enabled, press the A key (Complete Order).

Passport Guide DVR displays the PIN entry dialog. Key in your PIN. Passport Guide DVR displays the cover screen (above).

If PIN entry fails, Passport Guide DVR again displays the Terms and Conditions screen. For more information on purchasing, see Chapter 7, “Purchasing Pay-Per-View (PPV) Programs” on page 303.



Note: If your account is delinquent or if technical issues prevent the purchase from being completed, Passport Guide DVR displays an error screen after you press the A key (Complete Order) on the Pricing/Terms and Conditions screen. Contact customer service at the number displayed on the screen or, if the issue is technical, try placing your order again later.

Once your order has been processed, the cover screen is replaced by broadcast video of the service you just ordered. If your offer consisted of more than one premium service, you may view all channels associated with the offer.

— To abort the purchase and return to the previous screen, press the C key.



Purchasing services from a multiple offer iSubscribe screen

Passport Guide DVR displays the Multiple Offer iSubscribe screen when you select an unsubscribed premium channel that is associated with more than one offer.

Multiple Offer iSubscribe screens feature a scrolling offer title list. Press the left and right arrows on your remote control to scroll horizontally through offers associated with this channel.

The Multiple Offer iSubscribe screen (imposed over a dark gray background) blocks all video from view. The channel’s audio is muted.

Scrolling offer title list



To purchase services from a Multiple Offer iSubscribe screen:

1. Select an unsubscribed premium channel associated with more than one offer.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Multiple Offer iSubscribe screen:

Note: If you initiated the iSubscribe purchasing process from an SVOD Library channel, an additional prompt (C Back) will appear at the bottom of the screen. You can press the C key to return to the SVOD Library channel, if desired.

2. Press the left or right arrows on your remote control to browse the scrolling offer title list that appears in the bar beneath the masthead.

The highlighted offer is displayed on the left side of the bar. Related information is displayed below the bar.


3. When the desired offer is highlighted in the title bar, press the B key.



Passport Guide DVR displays the Pricing/Terms and Conditions screen.

4. Review the pricing, terms, and conditions associated with this offer.


— If the Purchase PIN is disabled, press the A key (Complete Order) on your remote.


— If the Purchase PIN is enabled, press the A key (Complete Order).

Passport Guide DVR displays the PIN entry dialog. Key in your PIN. Passport Guide DVR displays the Cover screen (above).




Note: If your account is delinquent or if technical issues prevent the purchase from being completed, Passport Guide DVR displays an error screen after you press the A key (Complete Order) on the Pricing/Terms and Conditions screen. Contact customer service at the number displayed on the screen or, if the issue is technical, try placing your order again later.

Once your order has been processed, the cover screen is replaced by broadcast video of the service you just ordered. If your offer consisted of more than one premium service, you may view all channels associated with the offer.




Purchasing services from the Al l iSubscribe Offers channel

The All iSubscribe Offers channel enables you to browse and/or purchase all available offers. Your cable service provider may organize offers into unique categories, which appear on the scrolling offer title list.

• Press the left and right arrows on your remote to scroll horizontally through offer categories.

• Press the up and down arrows to scroll vertically through offers in a highlighted category.

Instructional text appears in the right pane of the All Offers iSubscribe channel:

Scrolling offer title list

Category offers

Instructional text



To purchase an offer from the All Offers iSubscribe menu:

1. Launch an All Offers iSubscribe channel through one of the following methods:

— Select the View All Offers option from a Single or Multiple Offer iSubscribe screen.

— Select a channel using any standard method.

Passport Guide DVR displays the All Offers iSubscribe menu:

2. Scroll the list of available offers by pressing the up or down arrows on your remote.

If your cable service provider has organized offers into categories, they will appear on the scrolling offer title list beneath the masthead. Press the left and right arrows on your remote to scroll horizontally through offer categories.

3. If you wish to subscribe to an offer you have not already purchased, press SELECT.

Passport Guide DVR displays an offer-specific information screen:

Note: The category highlighted from the previous screen remains on the bar beneath the masthead.



4. Review the information about the offer.



— If you wish to subscribe to a service, press the B key.

Passport Guide DVR displays an offer-specific Pricing/Terms and Conditions screen.

— If you opt not to subscribe to the service, press the C key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the All iSubscribe Offers screen.

6. If you wish to subscribe, review the pricing, terms and conditions associated with the offer on the Pricing/Terms and Conditions screen.



— If the Purchase PIN is disabled, to complete the purchase, press the A key (Complete Order) on your remote.




Note: Press the C key while the cover screen is displayed to return to the All Offers iSubscribe channel.

— If the purchase PIN is enabled, to complete the purchase, press the A key (Complete Order) on your remote.

Passport Guide DVR displays the PIN entry dialog. Key in your PIN. Passport Guide DVR displays the Cover screen (see previous page).


Note: If your account is delinquent or if technical issues prevent the purchase from being completed, Passport Guide DVR displays an error screen after you press the A key (Complete Order) on the Pricing/Terms and Conditions screen. Contact customer service at the number displayed on the screen or, if the issue is technical, try placing your order again later. Press the C key while the error screen is displayed to return to the All Offers iSubscribe screen.




Once your order has been processed, Passport Guide DVR displays an offer-specific “just purchased” screen. This screen acknowledges your purchase and lists channels that have been made available through the transaction. Press the up and down arrows on your remote to scroll the list.

8. Press SELECT to view the highlighted channel.



Select ing an of fer that has a l ready been purchased

Passport Guide DVR displays a check mark next to all offers on the All Offers iSubscribe screen that have already been purchased:

Check mark indicates that

an offer has already been

purchased.

If you select an offer that has already been purchased, Passport Guide DVR displays a scrollable list of channels included in the offer. The following text appears beneath the offer: You have already purchased these channels.

• Press the up and down arrows to scroll the list.

• Press SELECT to display the highlighted channel.



Selecting unsubscribed channels not associated with any offers

If you select an unsubscribed channel not associated with any offers, Passport Guide DVR displays the No Offer dialog:

Contact customer service at the number provided to order this channel. Press the A key to launch the All Offers iSubscribe channel.

Select ing iSubscr ibe appl icat ion channels f rom the Program Guide

If you select from the Program Guide a program that is currently airing on an unsubscribed channel, Passport Guide DVR launches the channel.

If this channel is associated with single or multiple iSubscribe offers, you may interact with the iSubscribe application interface as described previously in this chapter (purchase services, browse offers, etc.). If you select a future program on an unsubscribed channel, Passport Guide DVR displays an alert dialog.

To launch the currently airing program on the unsubscribed channel, press the up or down arrow to highlight the View Channel Now option, and then press SELECT.


12


About Video Mosaic Channels

Video Mosaic channels enable you to watch multiple video streams simultaneously on a single channel (in scaled video windows) and launch services by highlighting and selecting channels.

Channels are grouped by thematic genre, such as News, Kids, Sports, etc. For example, a News Mosaic channel might display video streams from CNN, MSNBC, CNN Headline News, FOX News, and the Weather Channel.


• “Video Mosaic channel features” on page 448

• “Entering a Video Mosaic channel” on page 451

• “Exiting a Video Mosaic channel” on page 451

• “About interactive video advertisements in Video Mosaic” on page 459

• “Audio behavior in Video Mosaic” on page 460

• “Using Advanced Mode” on page 460

• “Using the QuickInfo banner in a Video Mosaic channel” on page 462

• “Using Mosaic to create and facilitate portals” on page 464

• “Guide links functionality in Mosaic” on page 465


Chapte r 12—About V ideo Mosa i c Channe l s

Video Mosaic channel features

Video Mosaic channels offer the following features:

• Scaled Video Streams: Depending on your cable provider, Video Mosaic channels feature as few as two or as many as 12 scaled video streams. Scaled video streams are displayed in panes. A highlight box indicates which pane is currently “in focus.” Using the arrows on your remote control, you can navigate among panes, and between panes and the Standalone Channel Buttons List (see next page). And you can launch services by highlighting and selecting a pane. For more information, see “About scaled video streams” on page 453.

When you display a Video Mosaic channel, Passport Guide DVR plays audio from the highlighted scaled video stream. As you navigate from stream to stream, the audio track changes to correspond to the highlighted stream.

• Standalone Channel Buttons List: Video Mosaic channels with eight or fewer scaled video feeds may also feature a Standalone Channel Button List. This list is typically located on the left side of the Video Mosaic channel and displays a vertically scrollable list of channels for which scaled video is unavailable. A highlight box indicates which channel button is currently “in focus.” You may launch services by highlighting and selecting a channel button. For more information, see “Using the Standalone Channel Button List” on page 457.

Note: When a list is highlighted, up and down arrows appear at the top and bottom of the list indicating that the list is scrollable.

• Program Information Panel: Located at the top of the screen, the Program Information panel displays information associated with either the currently highlighted pane, channel button or interactive video advertisement (see below). It features an Advanced Mode, which enables you to browse future programs on the highlighted channel by pressing the left and right arrows on your remote. For more information about the Program Information panel, see “Using the program information panel” on page 452. For more information about Advanced Mode, see “Using Advanced Mode” on page 460.

• Interactive Video Advertisement: The optional interactive video advertisement pane is located at the bottom-right corner of the screen. When you highlight the pane, the Program Information panel displays information pertaining to the advertisement. You can launch the associated channel by pressing SELECT. For more information, see “About interactive video advertisements in Video Mosaic” on page 459.



The following figure shows a variation of the NewsZONE Video Mosaic channel. It features six scaled video streams and a scrollable button list, which displays seven channels:

Standalone Channel

Button List

Highlight box indicates the

pane or channel button

currently “in focus.”

Program Information panel

Scaled video streams

Interactive video advertisement

Depending on your cable service provider, your Video Mosaic channel may be configured differently than the one depicted above. Channel button quantity, and scaled video quantity and position may vary.



The following screens are examples of how your Video Mosaic channels may appear:

Note: In certain instances, your cable operator may deploy “non-interactive” Video Mosaic channels. These channels consist of two or more (up to 12) view-only scaled video streams. All interactivity is disabled; you cannot navigate among streams, browse future programs, select or launch channels. Typically, audio associated with the Video Mosaic service is played on non-interactive Video Mosaic channels (see below).



Enter ing a V ideo Mosaic channel

You can enter a Video Mosaic channel using any of the following standard Passport Guide DVR channel selection methods:

• Enter a channel number while viewing full-screen broadcast video

• Select a channel while browsing the Program Guide

• Select a channel while browsing the Channel Banner or QuickInfo

Exi t ing a V ideo Mosaic channel

You may exit a Video Mosaic channel by pressing any of the following keys on your remote:

Key Descr ipt ion

GUIDE Exits the Video Mosaic channel and launches the Program Guide. If your set-top box supports scaled video, then a Video Mosaic barker is displayed in the Picture in Graphics (PIG) window. Once you select a program, Passport Guide DVR will tune to the new channel.

FAV Exits the Video Mosaic channel and displays the next highest favorite channel (standard Passport Guide DVR behavior).

Channel Up/Down Or Digits

Exits the Video Mosaic channel and launches another channel.

EXIT Exits the Video Mosaic channel.



Understanding h igh l ight box behaviors

Depending on your cable service provider, one of the following default highlight box behaviors will occur when a Video Mosaic channel is launched:

• No highlight box is displayed on screen by default (see above) and the following instructional text appears on the Program Information panel:

Press STWX to highlight a channel and hear its audio, then OK [SELECT] to view full screen.

• The interactive video advertisement, placed at the bottom-right of the screen, is highlighted by default.

• A scaled-video stream is highlighted by default.

• A channel on the Standalone Channel Button List is highlighted by default.

Using the program informat ion panel

When a scaled video stream or channel button is highlighted, the Program Information panel displays channel call letters/numbers, icons (Favorites, Parental Control, Skip), the program’s air date/time, title, rating and INFO icon. It can also display the REC icon when appropriate. When the interactive video advertisement is highlighted, text pertaining to the advertisement is displayed.

The following figure shows the Program Information panel:



INFO key behavior in V ideo Mosaic channels

As with all Passport Guide DVR channels, the Channel Banner appears when you first launch a Video Mosaic channel. However, once the channel banner clears, you cannot launch it again by pressing the INFO key (as you can in non-Video Mosaic channels).

If you press the INFO key while a Video Mosaic channel is displayed, the More INFO menu drops down from the Program Information panel. The More INFO menu enables you to view additional information about the highlighted channel or to browse future programs airing on the highlighted channel. For more information about the More INFO menu, see “Using Advanced Mode” on page 460.

About sca led v ideo streams

Depending on your cable provider, Video Mosaic channels feature as few as two and as many as 12 scaled video streams:

Space permitting, station call letters and channel numbers are displayed on a colored bar beneath each scaled video stream.

If there is not enough space to display both call letters and channel numbers (usually on Video Mosaic channels with more than 10 panes), the system will display station call letters only. However, if there is not enough space to display call letters, the system will display channel numbers only.

In the above example, each video pane features a footer area beneath the pane that contains call letters and channel numbers. These footers can be configured--or excluded--by the cable operator.



Navigat ing sca led v ideo st reams

Depending on your cable operator, a highlight box may or may not be displayed when you first launch a Video Mosaic channel.

If no highlight box is displayed, then instructional text appears in the Program Information panel. Press one of the arrows on your remote to highlight a scaled video pane and hear its audio.

The following table illustrates where the highlight box will appear among the scaled video panes, depending on the arrow you press:

Arrow key H igh l ight

Up Bottom row

Down Top row

Left Right column

Right Left column

Note: If no highlight box is displayed, pressing an arrow will always highlight a scaled video pane—not a channel—on the Standalone Channel Button List.

If a highlight box is displayed, then either a scaled video stream (including an interactive video advertisement) or a channel on the Standalone Channel Button List will be highlighted by default.

You may navigate among panes (as well as jump to the button list) by using the arrows on your remote.



The following table describes how arrow keys control the highlight:

Key Funct ion

Left arrow If a scaled-video channel is highlighted, the left arrow moves the highlight to the left.

If the Standalone Channel Button List is positioned on the left side of screen and an adjacent scaled video stream is highlighted, then pressing the left arrow causes the highlight to jump to the middle button on the Standalone Channel Button List.

If the Standalone Channel Button List is highlighted (and positioned on the left side of the screen), the left arrow is inactive.

Right arrow If a scaled-video channel is highlighted, the right arrow moves the highlight to the right.

If the Standalone Channel Button List is highlighted (and positioned on the left side of the screen), then the right arrow causes the highlight to jump to an adjacent scaled video stream.

If a scaled-video pane placed in the right column is highlighted, the right arrow is inactive.

Up arrow If a scaled-video channel is highlighted, the up arrow moves the highlight up.

If a scaled-video channel placed in the top row is highlighted, the up arrow is inactive.

If the Standalone Channel Button List is highlighted, the up arrow scrolls the list down. Note that the highlight remains stationary in the middle of the list, but the list scrolls, thus changing which channel button is highlighted. This is standard Passport Guide DVR behavior for list navigation.

Down arrow If a scaled-video channel is highlighted, the down arrow moves the highlight down.

If the Standalone Channel Button List is highlighted, the down arrow scrolls the list up.

If a scaled-video channel placed in the bottom row is highlighted, the down arrow highlights the interactive video advertisement pane.

Information about the current highlighted pane appears in the Program Information panel. To view additional information about the highlighted program or to browse future programs airing on the highlighted channel, press the INFO key on your remote. The More INFO menu drops down from the Program Information panel. For more information about the More INFO menu, see “Using Advanced Mode” on page 460.

Note: When you display a Video Mosaic channel, audio from the highlighted scaled video stream is played (unless the highlighted stream contains blocking criteria, in which case no audio will play). As you navigate from stream to stream, the audio track changes to correspond to the highlighted stream. For more information about how Video Mosaic handles audio streams, see “Audio behavior in Video Mosaic” on page 460.



To launch a channel from a scaled video stream:

1. Press the arrow keys on your remote to navigate to the channel you wish to launch.

2. Press SELECT to launch the highlighted channel.

Viewing locked channels in V ideo Mosaic

If a program airing on a scaled-video channel includes blocking criteria that match your Parental Control settings, both video and audio are blocked and a Parental Control barker is displayed. Press SELECT to launch the blocked channel. Passport Guide DVR displays the blocked barker.

To view the channel, use the standard PIN entry process. For more information, see “Using Parental Control” on page 247.



Using the Standalone Channel Button L ist

The Standalone Channel Button List displays a list of channels for which scaled video is unavailable.

Video Mosaic channels with eight or fewer scaled video feeds may feature a Standalone Channel Button List, which is typically located on the left side of the Video Mosaic channel.

Standalone Channel Buttons

List

The Standalone Channel Button List displays up to seven channel buttons at a time. If the list includes more than seven channels, you can use the up and down arrows located at the top and bottom of the list to scroll to the additional channels.

Note: The Standalone Channel Button List is an optional Video Mosaic feature and may not be offered by your cable operator.

Access ing the Standalone Channel Button L ist

To access the Standalone Channel Button List from an adjacent highlighted pane, press the left arrow (or the right arrow if the list is positioned to the right) on your remote.

Note: If a channel button is highlighted, one of the following audio behaviors will occur (depending on your cable provider):

• Audio from the last highlighted scaled video stream will be played.

• Audio associated with the Video Mosaic service will be played.

• If the last highlighted scaled video stream is blocked, then no audio will be played.

For more information on how Video Mosaic handles audio streams, see “Audio behavior in Video Mosaic” on page 460.



Navigat ing the Standalone Channel But ton L is t

You may scroll through the list by using the up and down arrows on your remote. Pressing the down arrow scrolls the list up one channel; pressing the up arrow scrolls it down one channel.

Note: When you scroll up or down, the highlight remains stationary in the middle of the list, but the list scrolls, thus changing which channel button is highlighted.

You can also use the PAGE UP or DOWN keys to scroll the list one page at a time.

Information about the currently highlighted channel button is displayed in the Program Information panel. To view additional information about the highlighted program or to browse future programs airing on the highlighted channel, press the INFO key on your remote. The More INFO menu descends from the Program Information panel. For additional information on the More INFO menu, see “Using Advanced Mode” on page 460.

Launching a channel from the Standalone Channel Button List

To launch a channel from a Standalone Button Channel List:

1. Press the up or down arrows on your remote to highlight the channel button you wish to launch.

2. Press SELECT to launch the highlighted channel.



About interact ive v ideo advert isements in V ideo Mosaic

Video Mosaic channels feature an interactive video advertisement in the lower-right corner of the screen. Interactive video advertisements might feature offers for Pay-Per-View events or channel subscriptions.

To launch an interactive video advertisement:

• If your Video Mosaic channel contains more than one row of scaled video streams, press the down arrow on your remote from any pane in the bottom row to highlight the interactive video advertisement pane. Press SELECT to launch the interactive video advertisement channel.

• If your Video Mosaic channel contains a single row of scaled video streams, press the down arrow on your remote from any pane to highlight the interactive video advertisement pane. Press SELECT to launch the interactive video advertisement channel.

• If a button on the Standalone Channel Button List is highlighted, press the right arrow on your remote to jump to the scaled video streams (assuming the list is positioned at the left edge of the screen), and then follow one of the previous two steps (depending on your Video Mosaic channel configuration).

Note: When you navigate to an interactive video advertisement pane, the system may be configured to play audio for the advertisement pane (if available). For more information on how Video Mosaic handles audio streams, see “Audio behavior in Video Mosaic” on page 460.



Audio behavior in V ideo Mosaic

When you display a Video Mosaic channel, Passport Guide DVR plays audio from the highlighted scaled video stream. As you navigate from stream to stream, the audio track changes to correspond to the highlighted stream. If a standalone channel button is highlighted, one of the following behaviors will occur (depending on your cable provider):

• Audio from the previously-highlighted scaled video stream will be played.

• Audio associated with the Video Mosaic service will be played.

• If the highlighted scaled video stream is blocked, then no audio will be played.

Note: For non-interactive Video Mosaic channels, audio associated with the Video Mosaic Service is played.

Using Advanced Mode

Advanced Mode enables you to view additional information about a selected scaled video stream (including an interactive video advertisement) or channel button. It also enables you to browse future programs airing on the highlighted channel.

To enter Advanced Mode:

1. In a Video Mosaic channel, press the arrows on your remote to highlight a scaled video stream (including an interactive video advertisement) or standalone channel button.


The More INFO menu descends from the Program Information panel. Additionally, a BROWSE prompt replaces the More INFO prompt on the Program Information panel, as illustrated in the following figure:

The More INFO menu

descends from the Program

Information panel

BROWSE prompt replaces the More INFO prompt in the Program Information panel

Page Indicator is displayed if more than four lines of descriptive text are available.



Using the More INFO menu

The More INFO menu displays additional information about the title displayed in the Program Information panel. If more than four lines of descriptive text are available, a page indicator is displayed to the right of the menu. Press the Page Down key or the down arrow to scroll the text down four lines at a time. To scroll the text up, press the Page Up key or the up arrow.

Browsing programs in Advanced Mode

In Advanced Mode, the Program Information panel enables you to browse future programs on the highlighted channel by pressing the left and right arrows on your remote.

To browse future programs from the Program Information panel:

1. Highlight the channel button or scaled video stream you wish to browse.

2. Press the INFO key on your remote.

The More INFO menu descends from the Program Information panel.

3. Press the right arrow to browse ahead, or the left arrow to browse back.

4. If you press the left arrow while information from the currently highlighted scaled video stream or channel button is displayed, the Program Information panel will display descriptions of programs that aired prior to the current program (if the information is available).

Notes:

— In Advanced Mode, you cannot navigate scaled video panes or the button list.

— In Advanced Mode, audio from the highlighted scaled video pane is played. If a channel button is highlighted, either audio from the most-recently highlighted scaled video pane or audio associated with the Video Mosaic service is played. For more information on how Video Mosaic handles audio streams, see “Audio behavior in Video Mosaic” on page 460.

To exit Advanced Mode:

• Press the EXIT, INFO, or C key on your remote.



Using the QuickInfo banner in a V ideo Mosaic channel

As with all Passport Guide DVR channels, the Channel Banner appears when you first launch a Video Mosaic channel.

To display the QuickInfo banner, press the INFO key while the Channel Banner is displayed on screen. You can browse the QuickInfo banner for program title and time information using the arrows on your remote.

To browse QuickInfo on a Video Mosaic channel:

1. While the channel banner is displayed (upon entering a Video Mosaic channel), press the INFO key on your remote.


2. Use the arrows to browse QuickInfo.

While you browse, an additional bar is displayed above the banner that shows the currently-selected program and channel.

3. If more than two lines of description text are available, press the Page Down key to view the next two lines of text. To display the previous two lines of text, press the Page Up key.


— To view a channel displayed in QuickInfo (if it is different from the currently-selected channel), press SELECT.

— The set-top box displays the channel you selected.

— To continue viewing the currently-selected channel (and not change channels/programs), you can do one of the following:

— Wait a few seconds. The Channel Banner will disappear.

— Press the EXIT key.

— Press the INFO key twice to cause the channel banner to disappear.



Using the record key in V ideo Mosaic channels

To record from a Video Mosaic channel:

1. Highlight the desired pane, then press the REC key on the remote.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Recording Options menu (for example, Record this show, Record entire series, etc.).


Passport Guide DVR displays a record icon next to the name of the service below the pane, and a REC indicator in the short description above the pane.

— If the Mosaic channel recording is the only recording currently in progress, Passport Guide DVR will not display full screen video. Instead, the Mosaic channel will remain displayed while the program is recorded.

— If the Mosaic channel recording is the second recording currently in progress, Passport Guide DVR will display full screen video of the service you started recording.

For more information about recording programs in Passport Guide DVR, see “Using the Digital Video Recorder (DVR)” on page 331.

About the V ideo Mosaic screen saver

If no user interaction is detected for a time period specified by your cable provider (typically five minutes), the system activates a screensaver that will cause your screen to dim, thus minimizing the risk of burn-in. Press any key on your remote to resume viewing the Video Mosaic channel.

Tuning to the “ last tuned” channel

While tuned to a Video Mosaic channel, the viewer can press the EXIT key to display the channel to which he was most recently tuned (the “last tuned” channel).

This option can be configured by MSO system administration.



Using Mosaic to create and fac i l i tate porta ls

In some cases, MSOs may choose to use Mosaic channels to serve as portals featuring links to features and services.

For example, the screen below is a mock-up of a portal that could be created by a cable operator. It is designed to promote the cable operator’s services and features by showing a video barker, as well as links to channels, features, information or advertising.

Example screen only.

Does not appear in Passport Guide DVR.

Refer to system administration documentation for more information on relevant configurable options.



Guide l inks funct iona l i ty in Mosaic

Mosaic channels support the same guide links functionality also supported in the QuickMenu. These links can enable quick access to specific features of the Program Guide.

The MSO can configure and make available links to various services or Program Guide features, for example: Closed Captioning, Saved Shows, Series Manager, Subtitles, Power-On Channel, Record Lists, Parental Control, etc.

For example, in the screen below, the button labeled GUIA links to the Program Guide. (This screen was created as an example and will not be seen on your system.)

Conf igurable he lp text for l inks

The Mosaic authoring tool enables the MSO to configure Mosaic channels to feature links to customized dialogs of help text.

For example, the viewer can click a “Help” icon to display a dialog that contains a few lines of feature-relevant help text.


13


Enjoying ShowRunner Video on Demand (VOD)

This chapter describes the ShowRunner Video on Demand channel. It contains the following sections:

• “About ShowRunner Video on Demand (VOD)” on page 468

• “About VOD offers” on page 469

• “Understanding VOD and PPV” on page 470

• “About VOD Library channels” on page 472

• “Head-end configurable features” on page 473

• “Purchasing VOD programs from a VOD library channel” on page 478

• “Canceling VOD purchases” on page 480

• “Reviewing VOD purchases” on page 482

• “Hiding VOD purchases and SVOD views” on page 483

• “Playing a hidden VOD purchased program” on page 484

• “Understanding VOD and SVOD icons” on page 485

• “Controlling VOD and SVOD playback” on page 486

• “About the On Demand Channel Banner” on page 490

• “About the On Demand QuickInfo™ Banner” on page 491

• “About the Mini Channel Banner” on page 492

• “About VOD Feature channels” on page 492

• “About SVOD Library channels” on page 495

• “Supercategory Library channels” on page 499

• “Whole Home VOD (WHVOD) and ShowRunner VOD” on page 501


Chapte r 13—Enjoy ing ShowRunner V ideo on Demand (VOD)

About ShowRunner V ideo on Demand (VOD)

Passport Guide DVR can include ShowRunner Video on Demand (VOD) application channels (as an optional feature) that enable you to purchase programs using your remote control.

You can think of VOD as a virtual video store. You can select and purchase programs from a library of titles and watch those videos anytime during the “rental” period.

Once you have purchased a program, you can control the viewing experience by using the playback keys on your remote--just like you would with a DVD or videotape. You can pause, stop, fast-forward and rewind shows. In other words, you have complete control of your viewing experience.

Passport Guide DVR offers the following types of VOD channels:

• VOD Library Channels: These channels enable you to browse a library of content categories such as Comedy, Family, Foreign, and Science Fiction. By selecting a title, you may access more information about it, view a preview (if available), purchase it, or cancel a purchase (if allowed). Once purchased, a program can be viewed until its rental window has expired.

• VOD Feature Channels: Unlike library channels, which contain multiple titles, feature channels offer a single VOD title for purchase.

• Subscription Video On Demand (SVOD) Library Channels: SVOD library channels also feature a library of titles organized in Categories and Super Categories. However, unlike VOD titles, which you must purchase individually, an SVOD subscription grants you access to all titles in a particular library.

• Subscription Video On Demand (SVOD) Feature Channels: SVOD feature channels also offer a single title for viewing. You do not need to purchase the title separately to view the program; however, you do need to be subscribed to the SVOD service that sponsors the title.

• Supercategory Library Channels: Your cable service provider may also offer Supercategory Library channels. These channels present content under more general headings such as movies, sports, or series. When you select a Supercategory, the Library channel associated with it appears.

Note: Access to an SVOD library channel may require a subscription to that channel, a subscription to a related premium channel such as HBO or Showtime, or a subscription to both. If the feature is supported by your cable operator, you can purchase an SVOD channel subscription through the iSubscribe feature or by calling your cable operator.

On occasion, the cable operator may temporarily disable any of the playback controls (for example, FAST FORWARD, REWIND or PAUSE) for a specific title.



About VOD of fers

Your cable service provider determines the specifics of VOD offers, such as price, buying window of opportunity, length of the VOD “rental” and whether or not you can cancel a purchase. Certain VOD offers will enable you to preview a title by viewing a preview (a video stream promoting a program).

Enter ing and ex i t ing VOD and SVOD channels

You may enter and exit VOD Library, VOD Feature, and SVOD Library channels using any of the standard Passport Guide DVR channel selection methods, including:

• Entering a channel number while viewing full-screen broadcast video

• Selecting a channel while browsing the Program Guide

• Selecting a channel while browsing the Channel Banner or QuickInfo™ banner

• Selecting a channel while browsing in a Venue application



Understanding VOD and PPV

You can purchase Video On Demand (VOD) and Pay-Per-View (PPV) programs using your remote control.

VOD enables you to control the viewing experience in much the same way you would control a DVD or videotape. With VOD, you can start, stop, pause, rewind and fast-forward a program using the playback icons on your remote. A VOD offer can remain available for up to 24 hours.

When you purchase a PPV title, a reminder is set to alert you just before the program starts. This type of programming works best for a live, start-to-finish viewing experience. Technically, you can also control playback of a PPV program. However, it is unwise to do so without first recording the program in its entirety. Since a PPV event is tied to a specific offer window that is equal to the duration of the event (for example, two hours) if you were to pause playback or rewind, it is very likely that you would be unable to view the entire event before the PPV offer window expires.

However, VOD rentals are allowed a “grace period” that extends beyond the 24-hour rental window--as long as the movie continues to run. However, during the grace period, trick modes (PAUSE, FAST FORWARD, REWIND) are not available. If the user presses STOP, or lets the VOD program run to its conclusion, the rental window will expire and the VOD program will no longer be available.

Feature VOD PPV

Dedicated channels Yes Yes

Purchase with remote Yes Yes

View immediately Yes No

Control playback Yes Yes (if program has been recorded)



Renta l windows and grace per iods

VOD program rentals are typically allowed a “grace period” that can extend beyond the conclusion of the specified rental window.

For example, if a VOD title is a two-hour movie with a rental window of 24-hours, and the user starts to play the title after 23 hours have transpired since initiating the rental, Passport Guide DVR will not abruptly terminate the viewing experience at the 24-hour mark. Instead, the VOD title will be allowed to continue to play.

• However, if the viewer stops playback during the grace period, the VOD title will no longer be available to be played or resumed.

• Additionally, during the grace period, all trick modes (PAUSE, FAST FORWARD, REWIND, etc.) will be unavailable.

During the grace period, playback of the VOD title must continue straight through, non-stop to its conclusion.

Index number

(configurable: show/hide)

Initial default

landing category

(configurable)

Restr ic t ing VOD purchases

You can restrict which household members can purchase VOD programs by enabling the Purchase PIN. To limit the kind of movies household members can purchase, you can set up parental control options. For information, see “About Parental Control” on page 248.



About VOD L ibrary channels

VOD Library channels are virtual video stores of titles organized into categories such as Comedy, Family, Foreign and Science Fiction. VOD Library channels enable you to:

• Browse library categories and titles

• Learn more about a title

• Preview a title by viewing its preview (if available)

• Purchase a title

• Cancel a purchase (if allowed)

Typically, titles are organized into categories. The names of the various categories appear on the horizontal scrolling category list near the bottom of the VOD Library screen. Users can scroll this list horizontally by pressing the left or right arrow key on the remote.

These categories can be configured by the head-end administrator and include by default:

• Just In: New stuff; programs recently made available

• Last Channel: List of last channel(s) viewed

• Purchased: Purchased VOD programs

• Recently Viewed: List of recently-viewed VOD programs

Head-end administration can also configure the software to specify the initial category to be highlighted in the scrolling Category List.

A list of associated titles appears in the left pane of the VOD Library channel. Press the up or down arrow on your remote to scroll the title list vertically. Information about the highlighted title appears in the right pane of the VOD Library channel.

VOD library masthead

Scrolling Title List

Selected Title

Scrolling Category List

Poster art in ¼ screen associated with the highlighted title (if available and not blocked by Parental Control)

Information about the highlighted title



Head-end conf igurable features

System administration at the cable head-end can configure the ShowRunner VOD application software in a few ways that affect the user interface. Key options are summarized below.

• On a ShowRunner VOD Library channel, titles are listed in the left pane. One title at mid-screen is highlighted, and extra information about it is provided in a right-side pane. An index number appears to the left of the highlighted title (see screen below). Administration can choose to show or hide this Index number.

• The horizontal scrolling category list appears near the bottom of the screen. One category is highlighted at the left end of the list (see screen below). Head-end administration can specify categories to appear in the horizontal scrolling list, as well as the default initial highlighted “landing” category.

Index number

(head-end configurable:

Initial default

landing category

show/hide)

(head-end configurable)



To browse available VOD Library titles:

1. Launch a VOD Library channel using any of the standard Passport Guide DVR channel selection methods.

The VOD Library channel is displayed. Titles are listed in the left pane. One title at mid-screen is highlighted, and extra information about it is provided.

Closer to the bottom of the screen, the horizontal scrolling category list is displayed; one category is highlighted near the left end of the list.

Note: The categories in the horizontal scrolling list--and the default initial highlighted “landing” category--can be configured by cable operator head-end administration.

2. Press the left or right arrow key on your remote to scroll the category list horizontally.

3. Press the up or down arrow key on your remote to scroll the numbered title list vertically.

Information about the highlighted title is displayed in the right side of the screen.

If available, poster art associated with the highlighted title will appear in the upper-right corner. If the highlighted program is subject to Parental Control restrictions, Passport Guide DVR will block the poster art from being displayed.



To view more information about a VOD title:

1. Select a title using the method described in the previous section.

2. Press the INFO key on your remote.

The VOD More Info screen is displayed.

3. Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys on your remote to read the complete description. Press the up or down arrows to view additional information about a different numbered title in the title list.

Note: When you press the up or down arrows to view additional information about a different title, the poster art associated with that title (if available and not blocked by Parental Control) also appears in the upper right corner of the VOD More Info screen.

4. Press the C key to return to the VOD Library screen.



To view a preview from a VOD Library Channel (if a preview is available):

1. Launch a VOD Library channel using any of the standard Passport Guide DVR channel selection methods.

Passport Guide DVR displays the VOD Library channel.

(You can also highlight a title on the VOD Library channel, and then press the INFO key on your remote to display the More Info screen.)

2. With the VOD Library channel or More Info screen displayed, press the PLAY key.

Passport Guide DVR displays the preview for the highlighted or selected title (if a preview is available).



Hidden MOD channels

Your cable operator may choose to make certain MOD channels accessible only through a Venue channel.

In such cases, the MOD channel number is “hidden” and cannot be tuned to directly by the viewer.

If you access a hidden MOD channel in such a way, the channel number (which usually appears below the masthead in the upper-left) is replaced by the short description name of the venue channel.

Press the up or down arrow on your remote to scroll the title list vertically. Information about the highlighted title is displayed in the right pane of the VOD Library channel.

Short description name of venue channel

Scrolling Title List

Selected Title

Scrolling Category List; landing category

configurable by MSO

Poster art in ¼ screen associated with the highlighted title (if available and not blocked by Parental Control)

Information about the highlighted title



Purchas ing VOD programs f rom a VOD l ibrary channel

To purchase VOD programs from a VOD library channel:

1. Launch a VOD Library channel by using any of the standard Passport Guide DVR channel selection methods.

2. Browse categories by using the left or right arrow keys on your remote; browse titles using the up or down arrows.

3. Once you highlight the title you wish to purchase, press the B key (Buy) on your remote.

The purchase confirmation dialog is displayed. It lists the price andduration of the VOD “rental.”

4. Press the B key to continue with your purchase.

Once the system has accessed the purchased title, the VOD Just Purchased screen is displayed.



The Just Purchased screen displays text describing VOD playback, rental window and title duration. It also features a progress bar, which graphically represents the entire length of the newly purchased program. For more information on the progress bar, see “Controlling VOD and SVOD playback” on page 486.

5. Press the PLAY key on your remote to begin viewing the VOD title.

(Alternatively, you can simply wait five seconds, and the title will begin to play automatically.)

The VOD Cover screen is displayed.

Note: If the purchase PIN function is enabled, the standard PIN Entry dialog appears when you press the Buy key. If you enter a valid PIN, the Cover screen (pictured above) will be displayed. For more information, see “About Parental Control” on page 248.



Cance l ing VOD purchases

If you change your mind about a VOD purchase, you may be able to cancel it. Typically, this depends on:

• The type of program you purchased

• When you purchased it

• The discretion of your cable service provider

In general, you must cancel your purchase within a designated window of time (for example, five minutes) after purchase. Your cable service provider determines the duration of the cancellation window.

Note: Not all types of VOD program purchases can be cancelled and not all cable service providers allow purchases to be cancelled.

To cancel a VOD purchase from a VOD Library screen:

1. Highlight the title you wish to cancel, and then press the INFO key on your remote.

The More Info screen is displayed.

2. On the More Info screen, press the STOP key.

The Cancel Confirmation dialog is displayed.

3. Press the A key to cancel.

If cancellation is allowed and is successful, the Cancel Status dialog is displayed.



If cancellation is not allowed or fails, the Cancel Status (Fail) dialog is displayed.

4. Press EXIT to return to the VOD library screen.



Reviewing VOD purchases

VOD Library screens feature a Recently Purchased category on the horizontal scrolling category list.

When you select this category, up to eight of your most recent VOD purchases are displayed.

Note: The eight purchase listing limit is distributed among all MOD businesses. Depending on your range of purchases, less than eight of your most recent purchases may be listed on any particular MOD channel.

horizontal scrolling category bar

Press the up or down arrows on your remote to scroll the title list vertically. Information about the highlighted title appears in the right pane of the VOD Library channel.



Hid ing VOD purchases and SVOD v iews

Your cable service provider may enable you to omit specific VOD purchases from the Purchased category list. (Similarly, you may be able to omit SVOD views from the Recently Viewed category.)

This feature enables you to keep part of your viewing history private, if you so choose.

If you choose to hide a program, the following things happen:

• The selected title is removed from the active service’s Recently Viewed category (SVOD) or Purchased category (VOD).

• When displayed in any other category (or on a More Info screen/Feature Channel), the title appears as though it has not been purchased.

• The PAID icon that usually appears to the left of purchased titles is hidden. Similarly, the VIEWED icon is suppressed in SVOD services.

• When a hidden VOD purchase is highlighted in a VOD Library screen, information about the selected title appears in the right pane, and a SELECT (Buy) key icon appears near the bottom of your screen. In other words, the hidden VOD purchase appears exactly like other VOD titles available for purchase.

Note: Depending on the back office configuration, the capability to hide program titles as described above may not be available to all viewers.

To hide VOD purchases and SVOD views:

1. Ensure that the VOD/SVOD purchase cancellation window has expired. (For more information, see “To cancel a VOD purchase from a VOD Library screen” on page 480.)

2. Highlight the purchased title in a VOD or SVOD library channel, or launch the purchased VOD feature channel. Then press the INFO key.

The VOD/SVOD More Info screen is displayed.

Press the STOP key to display the “Hide this Purchase” dialog



3. Press the STOP key.

The Hide the Purchase (VOD) or Hide Show (SVOD) confirmation dialog is displayed.

4. Press the A key to accept.

Passport Guide DVR closes the dialog and will hide the VOD purchase from the noted locations in the user interface.

Play ing a h idden VOD purchased program

On a VOD or SVOD library channel, highlight the hidden title, and then press SELECT.

(If you purchased a title through a VOD feature channel, launch the channel, then press SELECT.)

The Just Purchased/Introductory screen is displayed (see example below).

On this screen, you can play a title from the beginning (Begin) or from the last viewed frame, resume playback, or return to the previous screen (Back). For more information on controlling playback, see “Controlling VOD and SVOD playback” on page 486.

Note: Once you play a hidden title, it will no longer be hidden. To re-hide it, you must again follow the steps outlined in the previous section (“To hide VOD purchases and SVOD views:” on page 483).



Understanding VOD and SVOD icons

VOD and SVOD channels feature icons that provide additional information about a title.

Note: For descriptions of playback icons, see “Understanding playback icons” on page 488.

Icon Descr ipt ion

New Title: Appears beside new releases in the scrolling title list.

Last Chance: Appears beside titles in the scrolling title list that will soon be unavailable for viewing.

Purchased: Appears beside titles in the scrolling title list that you have purchased. (VOD screens only.)

Paid: Replaces price in title description area. (VOD screens only.)

Viewed: Appears beside titles in the title list that you have already viewed. (SVOD screens only.)

Preview: Appears in the title description area and indicates that a preview for the title is available.

HD: Identifies HD titles in VOD menus.



Contro l l ing VOD and SVOD p layback

Once you have purchased a VOD program, you may control playback using the playback keys on your remote just as you would a DVD or videotape.

The table below describes the available playback options:

Playback Funct ion Act ion

Play Press the PLAY key.

Pause Press the PAUSE key.

If the video is in normal 1x speed playback, REWIND, or FAST FORWARD mode, this key will pause the video. After a specified amount of time passes (determined by your cable provider) without viewer interaction, the session is closed, and the Stopped Screen (described later) is displayed.

Stop Press the STOP key. Passport Guide DVR displays the Stopped Screen.

Rewind Press the REWIND key. Three rewind speed options* are available:

One press = rewind speed 1 (slow)

Two presses = rewind speed 2 (medium)

Three presses = rewind speed 3 (fast)

If REWIND is pressed while at rewind speed 3, the video is returned to rewind (speed 1).

If the video is rewound to the first frame, normal 1X speed playback is automatically resumed.

*Speeds are optional and configurable and based on the capabilities of the VOD back office.

Fast-Forward Press the FAST FORWARD key. Three fast-forward speed options* are available:

One press = fast forward speed 1 (slow)

Two presses = fast forward speed 2 (medium)

Three presses = fast forward speed 3 (fast)

If FAST FORWARD is pressed while at fast forward speed 3, the video is returned to fast forward speed 1.

If the video is fast-forwarded to the last frame of the program, the Stopped Screen (described later is displayed).

*Speeds are optional and configurable and based on the capabilities of the VOD back office.

Jump forward 15 minutes

While the video is in a FAST FORWARD playback mode (speed 1, 2, or 3), press the right arrow key on your remote. The video jumps 15 minutes forward and resumes at the previously selected fast-forward speed.

If the program is within 15 minutes of the final frame, if you use the jump forward feature, the video will jump to the last frame.



Playback Funct ion Act ion

Jump back 15 minutes While the video is in a REWIND playback mode (speed 1, 2, or 3), press the left arrow key on your remote. The video jumps back 15 minutes back and resumes at the previously selected rewind speed.

If the program is within 15 minutes of the first frame, if you use the jump back feature, the video will jump to the first frame.

Instant replay Press the INSTANT REPLAY key (if available) to jump back 10 seconds and resume normal 1x speed playback.

If the video is less than 10 seconds from the first frame, the video jumps to the first frame when you press INSTANT REPLAY.



Understanding p layback icons

Playback icons represent the playback state of your On Demand program.

These icons appear in the Mini Channel Banner, the On Demand Channel Banner, and the On Demand QuickInfo™ Banner (each of which is described later in this chapter).

The following table shows and describes On Demand playback icons:

Playback Icon Descr ipt ion

Pause

Play

Fast-forward (speed 1)



Rewind (speed 1)

Rewind (speed 2)

Rewind (speed 3)



Progress bar

The progress bar graphically represents the entire length of an On Demand program.

• On the left end of the bar, the start of the program is represented by the numbers “00:00”.

• On the right end of the bar, the program total runtime is displayed (for example, 01:00).

• A playback head (which includes an elapsed time indicator for the current position) appears above the progress bar to indicate the current location within the program (for example, 00:30).

The image below shows the progress bar as it appears on the Mini Channel Banner:

The progress bar appears on the:

• Mini Channel Banner

• On Demand Channel Banner

• On Demand Just Purchased screen

• On Demand Cover screen

• On Demand Introductory screen

• On Demand Stopped screen



About the On Demand Channel Banner

The On Demand Channel Banner is similar to the standard Passport Guide DVR Channel Banner. It provides quick access to information about the On Demand program you are viewing. In addition to the standard channel banner information, the On Demand Channel Banner also displays:

• Rental period (for example, “View Until Fri. 9:30p”)

• Playback icon (Pause, Fast Forward, Rewind, etc.)

• Progress Bar

• Paid ticket icon preceding title

Note: For more information about the standard Passport Guide DVR Channel Banner, see “Using the Channel Banner and the Info Banner” on page 40.

To access the On Demand Channel Banner:


• Press the INFO key on your remote.

• Press any of the arrow keys on your remote.

To exit the On Demand Channel Banner:


• Press the EXIT key on your remote.

• Press the INFO key twice.

• Wait a few seconds for the On Demand Channel Banner to disappear automatically.



About the On Demand QuickInfo™ Banner

The On Demand QuickInfo™ Banner is similar to the standard Passport Guide DVR QuickInfo™ Banner. It provides quick access to information (including a synopsis) about the On Demand program you are viewing.

In addition to the standard QuickInfo™ Banner information, the On Demand QuickInfo™ Banner displays a playback status icon (Pause, Fast Forward, Rewind, etc.):

Note: For more information about the standard Passport Guide DVR QuickInfo™ banner, “Displaying and browsing QuickInfo™” on page 44.

To access the On Demand QuickInfo™ Banner:

• Press the INFO key on your remote twice.

Note: In order to access the On Demand QuickInfo™ Banner you must be viewing an On Demand video stream.

To exit the On Demand QuickInfo™ Banner:


• Press the EXIT key on your remote.

• Wait a few seconds for the On Demand Channel Banner to disappear automatically.



About the Min i Channel Banner

If you press any of the playback control keys on your remote while an On Demand program is in progress, the Mini Channel Banner will be displayed.

This banner is similar to the On Demand Channel Banner; however, it displays only the Playback Icon and Progress Bar in a compact interface that obscures less of the video.

About VOD Feature channels

Like VOD Library channels, Feature channels enable you to purchase and view video content on demand. However, these channels do not allow you to select from multiple titles. Rather, a single title is displayed on each Feature channel, as shown below:

Note: The (C) On Demand button is configurable by the cable operator. Button and assignment and specific text may vary.



To purchase a program from a VOD Feature channel:

1. Launch a VOD Feature channel using any of the standard Passport Guide DVR channel selection methods.

2. Press the B (Buy) key on your remote control.

The purchase confirmation dialog is displayed. It lists the price and duration of the VOD “rental:”

3. Press the B key to continue with your purchase.

Once the system has accessed the purchased title, the VOD Just Purchased screen is displayed.

The Just Purchased screen displays text describing VOD playback, rental window, and title duration. It also features a progress bar, which graphically represents the entire length of the newly purchased program. For more information on the progress bar, see “Controlling VOD and SVOD playback” on page 486.

4. Press the PLAY key on your remote to view the VOD title.

(Alternatively, you can simply wait five seconds, and the title will begin to play automatically.)

The VOD Cover screen is displayed.



Note: If the purchase PIN function is enabled, the standard PIN Entry dialog appears when you press the Buy key. Upon entering a valid PIN, the Cover screen (pictured above) is displayed. For more information, see “About Parental Control” on page 248.

To view a preview from a VOD Feature channel:

• On the VOD Feature channel screen, press the PLAY key on your remote. The preview (if available) will play.

• If you like the preview, you can press the B key to initiate purchase.



About SVOD L ibrary channels

Like VOD Library channels, SVOD Library channels feature a library of titles organized into categories. However, while VOD titles must be purchased individually, an SVOD subscription grants you access to all titles in that library:

SVOD Library screen

(Subscription authorized)

SVOD Library screen

(Subscription not yet authorized)

Note: Access to an SVOD channel may require a subscription to that channel, a subscription to a related premium channel such as HBO or Showtime, or a subscription to both. However, you can view title listings and display detailed information about programs in an SVOD Library even if you have not yet subscribed. If you are not currently subscribed to the SVOD Library, an option to order a subscription (Order) will be displayed near the bottom of the screen (see next page).



You can view additional information about a program even if you have not yet subscribed to the SVOD Library channel.

To view more information about an SVOD title:

1. Highlight a title, and then press the INFO key on your remote.

The SVOD More Info screen is displayed.

Note: If you are not currently subscribed to the SVOD Library, an option to order a subscription (Order) will be displayed near the bottom of the screen.

SVOD More Info screen

(Subscription authorized)



2. Press the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys on your remote to display the complete description. Press the up or down arrows to view additional information about a different numbered title in the title list.

Note: When you press the up or down arrows to view additional information about a different title, the poster art associated with that title (if available) also appears in the upper-right corner of the SVOD More Info screen.

3. Press Exit to return to the SVOD Library screen.



To view a preview from an SVOD Library channel:

On the SVOD Library Channel screen, or the More Info screen for a specific title, you can press the PLAY key to play a preview for the selected title (if a preview is available).

To purchase an SVOD channel subscription:

You can purchase an SVOD channel subscription through the iSubscribe feature.

If you are not currently subscribed to the SVOD Library, an option to order a subscription (Order) will be displayed near the bottom of the screen.



1. Press the B key to initiate the iSubscribe purchase process.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Subscription Required dialog.

2. In some cases, you may need to telephone your cable operator at the telephone number displayed in the Subscribe Now dialog (see dialog, above right). Otherwise, press the A key (Find Out More!) to continue with the purchase process.



Passport Guide DVR will initiate the iSubscribe purchase process.

For more information, refer to “Purchasing services from a multiple offer iSubscribe screen” on page 436.



Supercategory L ibrary channels

Your cable service provider may offer SVOD Supercategory Library channels, which present content under more general headings such as movies, sports, or series:

Scrolling title supercategory

list

Selected Supercategory

Poster art in ¼ screen associated with the highlighted supercategory (if available and not blocked by Parental Control)

Information about selected supercategory

Supercategory Library screens feature a scrolling category list in the left pane, with the number of titles available in each Supercategory appearing to the right of each listing. You may scroll the list vertically by using the up or down arrow keys on your remote. Descriptive text associated with the highlighted supercategory appears in the right pane.

Note: You can purchase an SVOD channel subscription through the iSubscribe feature or by calling your cable operator.

To view titles associated with a supercategory:

From an SVOD Supercategory Library channel, highlight the supercategory you wish to expand and press SELECT on your remote. An SVOD library screen featuring titles associated with the selected supercategory is displayed.



SVOD b lackout

The Subscription Video On Demand Blackout (SVOD Blackout) feature enables the MSO to restrict viewer access to specific SVOD services during scheduled time periods. This feature may help an MSO to meet its contractual obligations with content providers.

If a viewer tunes to a blacked-out SVOD service, Passport Guide DVR displays a Blackout Barker that explains that the service is temporarily unavailable.

Similarly, if the viewer is navigating an SVOD menu, and the black-out period for a currently-viewed service begins, Passport Guide DVR will also display the Blackout Barker (see example; please note that message text will vary slightly to report status details).

Channel number

Text message varies slightly to convey status details and suggest a check-back time (includes day, date and

month, if necessary).

• Example: Perhaps the NFL makes certain On Demand content available to viewers, but would like to encourage viewers to watch live games on Monday evenings. Blocking access to the On Demand content could redirect viewers to watching the live game.

• The MSO can select specific time periods during which to block specific SVOD services. The viewer has no input to this process.

• The only action available to the viewer is exiting the Blocked SVOD Services barker. (See “Exiting a blocked SVOD service barker” on page 500.)

• If the currently-viewed channel transitions to blacked-out status while a video is being streamed, the viewer will be allowed to continue to view the program until it is stopped (when the STOP key is pressed, for example).

• When the service-blocked time period ends, Passport Guide DVR removes the barker and displays the top-most menu in the service.

Exi t ing a b locked SVOD serv ice barker

If Passport Guide DVR displays a Blocked SVOD Service Barker, press the C key or use standard channel navigation to exit.



Whole Home VOD (WHVOD) and ShowRunner VOD

Passport Guide DVR enables you to watch VOD titles on any set-top box in your household. Although the technology that supports this capability is sophisticated, to the user the feature is quite transparent.

This feature enables you to watch VOD titles from a bedroom, or any other room in your home, in which you have installed a Passport Guide non-DVR set-top box as a client on a home video network. (For more information about non-DVR set-top boxes and home video networks, see “Using Passport on Non-DVR Set-top Boxes” on page 517.)

Whole Home VOD back of f ice conf igurat ion

Support for Whole Home VOD requires that the MSO establishes an appropriate back-office configuration. The back-office configuration can control such items as:

• The number of Passport Guide non-DVR set-top boxes you can install on your home video network

• The number of titles Passport Guide DVR is allowed to display at one time.

• The appearance of the My Rentals screen. For example, channel numbers might be excluded from the listing; or the maximum number of titles listed, or the types of titles listed, may vary.

L imitat ions and exc lus ions

Whole Home VOD imposes very few limitations on your use of Passport Guide DVR.

• The My Rentals category excludes SVOD titles

• The My Rentals category includes MOD programs that were purchased from any and all set-top boxes within the home

• The My Purchases category on the ShowRunner channel includes purchases for that channel that came from any and all set-top boxes within the home.



Hid ing VOD purchases in a Whole Home environment

Your cable service provider may enable you to omit specific VOD purchases from the Purchased category list in a Whole Home environment.

This feature can help you to keep part of your viewing history private, if you so choose. For example, you may wish to keep younger family members from learning that an adult title was purchased by another family member.

Similarly, you may be able to omit SVOD views from the Recently Viewed category.

The procedure and user interface for hiding titles in a Whole Home environment are identical to those on a DVR Server set-top box. For more information on hiding Showrunner purchases on a DVR Server set-top box, see “Hiding VOD purchases and SVOD views” on page 483.

Press the STOP key

“Hide this Purchase” dialog to display the

If you choose to hide a program, the following things happen:

• The selected title is removed from the active service’s Recently Viewed category (SVOD) or Purchased category (VOD).

• When displayed in any other category (or on a More Info screen/Feature Channel), the title appears as though it has not been purchased.

• The PAID icon that appears to the left of purchased titles is hidden. Similarly, the VIEWED icon is suppressed in SVOD services.

• When a hidden VOD purchase is highlighted in a VOD Library screen, information about the selected title appears in the right pane, and a Buy key icon appears near the bottom of your screen. In other words, the hidden VOD purchase appears exactly like other VOD titles available for purchase.

Note: Depending on the back office configuration, the capability to hide program titles as described above may not be available to all viewers.



To hide VOD purchases and SVOD views in a Whole Home environment:

1. Ensure that the VOD/SVOD purchase cancellation window has expired. (For more information, see “To cancel a VOD purchase from a VOD Library screen” on page 480.)

2. Highlight the purchased title in a VOD or SVOD library channel, or launch the purchased VOD feature channel. Then press the INFO key.

The VOD/SVOD More Info screen is displayed.

3. Press the STOP key.

The Hide the Purchase (VOD) or Hide Show (SVOD) confirmation dialog is displayed.

4. Press the A key to accept.

Passport Guide DVR closes the dialog and will hide the VOD purchase from the noted locations in the user interface.



Play ing a h idden VOD purchased program in a Whole Home env i ronment

On a VOD or SVOD library channel, highlight the hidden title, and then press SELECT.

(If you purchased a title through a VOD feature channel, launch the channel, then press SELECT.)

The Just Purchased/Introductory screen is displayed (see example below).

On this screen, you can play a title from the beginning (Begin) or from the last viewed frame, resume playback, or return to the previous screen (Back). For more information on controlling playback, see “Controlling VOD and SVOD playback” on page 486.

Note: Once you play a hidden title, it will no longer be hidden. To re-hide it, you must again follow the steps outlined in the previous section (see “To hide VOD purchases and SVOD views in a Whole Home environment” on page 483).


14


The On Demand Venue Application

This chapter describes the On Demand Venue library channel. It contains the following sections:

• “About the On Demand Venue library channel” on page 506

• “Venue Bread Crumbs” on page 508

• “Searching the ShowRunner On Demand programming library” on page 509


Chapte r 14—The On Demand Venue App l i ca t i on

About the On Demand Venue l ibrary channel

Passport Guide DVR features an On Demand Venue application library channel, which enables easy access to On Demand channels that have been grouped into categories based on their content.

The On Demand Venue application enables viewers to easily locate services by browsing through these categories, and then selecting and launching the desired channel.

Channel categories appear in a horizontal scrolling list near the top of the screen. You can scroll this list horizontally by pressing the left or right arrow key on your remote.

The currently-highlighted category appears in the upper-left of the screen, and a list of associated On Demand services appears in the left pane. You can use the up or down arrows on your remote to scroll vertically through the services list. Information about the highlighted service is displayed in the right pane.

Scrolling category list

Scrolling Services List

Highlighted On Demand

service

Note: If an MSO configures a Venue to display only a single category, the horizontal scrolling list of categories near the top of the screen will be replaced by a “breadcrumb trail.” For more information on breadcrumb trails, see “Venue Bread Crumbs” on page 508.

For example, say you wanted to watch the 24/7 Sports channel. You could access the On Demand Venue application channel, and scroll through the horizontal category list near the top of the screen to highlight the Premium category (since this category includes the 24/7 Sports channel). You could then scroll down through a list of Premium channels, highlight the listing for 24/7 Sports, and then press SELECT to launch the 24/7 Sports channel.

A Venue channel can also be linked to other Venue channels to create a multilevel menu system. In such cases, you could highlight a subordinate Venue, then press SELECT to display its offerings. (If desired, you could then press the C key on a subordinate Venue channel to return to its parent channel.)

Venue Channels can be closely coupled to ShowRunner VOD application services, enabling you to easily locate On Demand content.



Consolidated lists of VOD services may be organized into categories such as My Rentals, Services, Free On Demand, and Feature Channels. These categories will appear on the scrolling category list near the top of the Venue screen.

Depending on the details of the associated back-office configuration, a “My Rentals” screen might appear slightly different. For example, channel numbers might be excluded from listings; or the number of titles listed, or the type of titles listed, may vary slightly.

To launch an On Demand channel or service from an On Demand Venue application channel:

1. Launch an On Demand Venue channel using any of the standard Passport Guide DVR channel selection methods.

2. Press the left or right arrow keys on your remote to scroll the horizontal category list.

3. Press the up or down arrow keys to highlight the channel or service you wish to launch.

4. Press SELECT to launch the channel or service.



Venue Bread Crumbs

The Venue Bread Crumbs feature simplifies venue navigation for venues that feature only one category of programs or services.

A typical venue facilitates viewer access to programs and services that have been organized into categories.

• The viewer navigates these categories horizontally by pressing the left or right arrows.

• The viewer can scroll links to specific services vertically by pressing the up or down arrows.

However, since an MSO can link venues to subordinate venues, if an MSO configures a venue to have only one category, there is no longer any need for left or right scrolling.

Instead, Passport Guide DVR uses this area of the screen to display a “bread crumb” trail of navigation from parent through child subordinate levels to the currently-displayed sub-venue.

parent venue > highest subordinate venue > 2nd highest (..) subordinate venue > displayed subordinate venue The following screen shows the breadcrumb trail example:

Digital Cable On Demand>Movies on Demand

Bread crumb trail

Parent venue Current venue

subordinate level



Searching the ShowRunner On Demand programming l ibrary

You can search an On Demand Venue Library channel in the same way you search the rest of the Program Guide: by executing a Title Search or a Keyword Search.

Press the GUIDE key twice to display the Find Shows pop-up menu. After you select Title Search or Keyword Search, Passport Guide DVR allows you to specify whether you would like to focus the search on All Listings, TV Listings, or On Demand programs.

• For more information on how to search the On Demand listings by title, see “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By title” on page 93.

• For more information on how to search the On Demand listings by keyword, see “Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search: By keyword” on page 105.

Note: If Parental Control is enabled, Adult- and Adult NR-rated programs will be omitted from the results of title and keyword searches of On Demand listings.


15


Reviewing Your Bill with Bill View

This chapter describes the Bill View feature. It contains the following sections:

• “About Bill View” on page 512

• “Entering and exiting the Bill View channel” on page 512

• “Viewing your bill” on page 513

• “Bill Reminder” on page 515


Chapte r 15—Rev iew ing Your B i l l w i th B i l l V i ew

About B i l l V iew

Bill View is a simple yet powerful tool that enables you to display your current cable services bill on screen using your remote control:

Note: If you subscribe to other services (for example, telephone, Internet) through your cable service provider, an itemized list of these services may also be displayed on your Bill View screen.

Enter ing and ex i t ing the B i l l V iew channel

You can enter and exit the Bill View channel using any of the standard Passport Guide DVR channel selection methods, including:

• Entering a channel number while viewing full-screen broadcast video

• Selecting a channel while browsing the Program Guide

• Selecting a channel while browsing the Channel Banner or QuickInfo™ banner

• Your cable operator may choose to enable access to Bill View by using the QuickMenu. (For more information, see “Using Passport QuickMenu™” on page 147.)


Chapte r 15—Rev iew ing Your B i l l w i th B i l l V iew

Viewing your b i l l

To use Bill View to view your current bill:

1. Launch the Bill View channel using any of the standard Passport Guide DVR channel selection methods listed above.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Bill View channel Introduction screen:

2. Press SELECT on your remote.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Purchase PIN entry screen:

3. Key in your Purchase PIN.

Passport Guide DVR displays the Bill View cover screen while it accesses your account:



Note: If the “Locking Status” preference for Purchasing is enabled, the standard PIN Entry dialog will be displayed when you press SELECT. If you enter a valid PIN, the Cover screen (pictured above) will be displayed. For more information see “Establishing a Purchase PIN” on page 305.

One of the following events occurs:

— If your account information is successfully accessed, Passport Guide DVR displays the Bill View screen:

Press the PAGE UP or DOWN keys on your remote to scroll vertically through your bill.

To exit Bill View, use any of the standard Passport Guide DVR channel selection methods described above.

Note: Bill View displays the most current billing information available. The screen is dynamically updated as more information becomes available. However, Bill View might not have access to all of your most recent account information. Contact your cable service provider for the most up-to-date information about your account.

— If Bill View cannot access your information, an error screen is displayed:

If this problem persists, contact your cable service provider.


Chapte r 15—Rev iew ing Your B i l l w i th B i l l V iew

Bi l l Reminder

Passport Guide DVR features the option to display a series of staged reminders for viewers who are late to pay their monthly cable bill.

This feature can be configured by the cable head-end system administrator. The head-end can also specify screen duration and frequency of display.

There are three levels of reminders for increasingly late-to-pay customers.

The first message will cover the lower one-third of the screen and remind the viewer to pay his cable bill.

The second message will cover the lower half of the screen. It may use more urgent language to remind the viewer to pay his cable bill.



The third message will cover the entire screen and remind the viewer to pay his cable bill.

Bi l l Reminder banner durat ion and f requency

The default duration of display for the Bill Reminder banner is five (5) seconds.

The default frequency of display for the Bill Reminder banner is set to five (5) minute intervals.

However, these values may be re-configured by the MSO head-end.

Bi l l Reminder banner d isp lay pr ior i ty

The display of the Bill Reminder banner takes priority and may be displayed over the following components of the user interface:

• Channel Banner

• Quick Info

• Quick Settings

• Quick Menu (Service Portal)

• Messaging Reader

• all dialogs

However, the Bill Reminder does not take priority over the:

• Program Guide

• General Settings, or

• DVR screens

In other words, the Bill Reminder will not be displayed while these components of the user interface are displayed.


16


Using Passport on Non-DVR Set-top Boxes

This chapter explores the functions and features of each type of non-DVR set-top box. It includes the following sections: • “About Passport non-DVR set-top boxes” on page 518 • “Two types of non-DVR set-top box: Standalone and client” on page 519 • “Using Passport Guide DVR on a standalone non-DVR set-top box” on

page 520 • “Using Passport Guide DVR on a non-DVR client set-top box connected to a

Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network” on page 521

• “Feature comparison chart” on page 525 • “General information on capabilities of non-DVR set-top boxes” on

page 526 • “Non-DVR set-top boxes cannot control Live TV (Standalones and Clients)”

on page 526 • “QuickInfo™ on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones

and Clients)” on page 527 • “Quick Settings on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box

(Standalones and Clients)” on page 528 • “General Settings on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box

(Standalones and Clients)” on page 530 • “Parental Control on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box

(Standalones and Clients)” on page 531 • “Establishing or changing a Parental Control PIN for a Passport Guide DVR

non-DVR set-top box (standalones and Clients)” on page 532 • “Assigning names to Passport Guide DVR Clients and Passport Guide DVR

Servers” on page 533 • “Viewing information about other network Clients” on page 536 • “Recorded Shows screen on a non-DVR Client set-top box” on page 536 • “Playing back recorded shows on a non-DVR set-top box (Clients only)” on

page 537 • “Recorded Shows Options menu on a non-DVR set-top box (Clients only)”

on page 538 • “Resolving conflicts” on page 541


Chapte r 16—Us ing Passpor t on Non-DVR Se t- top Boxes

About Passport non-DVR set- top boxes

Most of the features and functions discussed in this Customer Service Guide explain how to use Passport Guide DVR on a set-top box that features an internal hard disk. These set-top boxes are called DVR Server set-top boxes.

The hard disk makes it possible for viewers to use these set-top boxes to record shows, view recorded shows, and operate trick play modes such as pausing, rewinding, or fast-forwarding video playback, etc.

However, you can also operate Passport Guide DVR on a set-top box that does not feature a hard disk (that is, a “non-DVR set-top box”).

Many of the same Passport Guide DVR features are available on non-DVR set-top boxes. However, non-DVR set-top boxes may or may not be connected to a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network, and will therefore function in two general ways: as a Standalone device, or as a home video network Client.

Note: Not all non-DVR set-top boxes can support Passport Guide DVR. Please contact Rovi Corporation for compatibility information.



Two types of non-DVR set- top box: Standalone and C l ient

There are two types of non-DVR set-top boxes, as follows:

Standalone devices: These are non-DVR set-top boxes that are not connected to a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network.

This type of non-DVR set-top box is not connected to a Multiroom DVR application home video network. Although many Passport Guide DVR features are available, you cannot operate trick modes on programs that have not been recorded; nor can you record programs, or view recorded programs.

This type of set-top box is often referred to as a “standalone” unit or device, meaning a set-top box that is not connected to a home video network. Since it does not have access to a DVR hard disk, it lacks some of the capabilities of the Client set-top box.

For more information on using this type of set-top box, see “Using Passport Guide DVR on a standalone non-DVR set-top box” on page 520.

Clients: These are non-DVR set-top boxes that are connected to a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network.

This type of non-DVR set-top box is connected to a Multiroom DVR application home video network that also includes exactly one Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box. This enables you to operate trick modes (pausing and rewinding video), record non-PPV programs, or view recorded programs. This type of set-top box is often referred to as a “Client,” or “home video network client.”

Passport Guide DVR Clients in a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network are unable to record PPV programming. If a client viewer attempts to record a PPV program, Passport Guide DVR will display the following message: “Pay-Per-View events cannot be recorded on this set-top box.”

For more information on using this type of set-top box, see “Using Passport Guide DVR on a non-DVR client set-top box connected to a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network” on page 521.



Using Passport Guide DVR on a standalone non-DVR set-top box

Passport Guide DVR can operate on a non-DVR set-top box that is not connected to a home video network. Such a configuration is called a “Standalone” device or unit, and offers many of the same features of Passport Guide DVR running on a DVR set-top box.

Of course, since standalone units do not feature an internal hard disk, and cannot access a Passport Guide DVR set-top box over a network, they are unable to record programs to a DVR hard disk, or play programs that were recorded to a DVR hard disk, or do many of the other things associated with DVR recording and playback.

Your standalone non-DVR set-top box enables you to enjoy the following Passport Guide DVR features:

• Watch live TV

• Enjoy most of the same features of Live TV that you would enjoy on a Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box, including:

— Automatically display the Channel Banner when you change channels

— Display the Program Guide

— Display information about programs

— Conduct title or keyword searches, etc.

• Display and adjust General Settings (that will affect only the non-DVR set-top box on which you set them)

• Display and use the Quick Settings menu

• Display and use the QuickMenu (if this feature is available in your area)

• Display and browse QuickInfo for information about other programs

L imitat ions

With a standalone set-top box, you cannot do the following:

• Cannot record programs

• Cannot play back recorded programs

• Cannot perform any “trick play” DVR options (for example, pause, rewind, or fast-forward the video playback)

In short, a standalone set-top box does not allow you to access any features or functions associated with the use of a DVR.

Note: When running Passport Guide DVR for Motorola on a non DVR set-top box, the Use Always status and the definition of the Custom filtering in the Program Guide will not be retained if the set-top box is rebooted.



Using Passport Guide DVR on a non-DVR client set-top box connected to a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network

A Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network comprises one (and only one) Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box, and up to three non-DVR “client” set-top boxes.

To record a program, you typically need access to a set-top box that features a digital video recorder (DVR). However, Passport Guide DVR enables you to install a non-DVR set-top box in any room in your home and watch live TV shows, as well as Recorded Shows that have been saved on the hard disk on a Passport Guide DVR set-top box.

The Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box and the Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box must both be connected to your home video network. (The Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box might typically be located in your den or living room).

From a non-DVR set-top box, you can access many Passport Guide DVR features. Though the technology is transparent, certain commands and selections executed on a non-DVR set-top box are transmitted across the home video network to control the DVR-equipped unit.

This enables the viewer to watch the movie in his bedroom, for example, even though the saved movie actually resides on the DVR-equipped set-top box in the living room.

On a non-DVR client, you can access the Recorded Shows list and Program Guide across your home video network on a Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box, and use them in much the same way you would on a DVR Server set-top box.

You can also access Quick Settings and QuickMenu, which are actually resident on the local non-DVR Client set-top box, though they work exactly as they do on a Passport Guide DVR set-top box. Please see the Table of Contents and other chapters in this guide for information on using these features and functions.

This chapter outlines features that either:

• Are not available on a non-DVR set-top box client, or that

• Function differently than they do on a Passport Guide DVR set-top box



You can install a total of four set-top boxes in a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network: one Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box, and up to three Client set-top boxes distributed in various rooms in your home.

A Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network can support only one DVR set-top box on the network. Furthermore, you cannot use a second Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box to substitute for a Passport Guide DVR Client set-top box.

You can watch programs that have been recorded on your Passport Guide DVR Server hard disk on up to three Passport Guide DVR Client set-top boxes at any time.

Please note that the Motorola MoCA network supports no more than three client set-top boxes. Nevertheless, if the cable operator chooses to deploy more than three client set-top boxes at the same location, the number of sessions may be constrained by limited bandwidth. In such cases, if a viewer attempts to view a Recorded Show on a fourth Passport Guide DVR Client set-top box, Passport Guide DVR will display an error message indicating that recorded programs are currently being viewed on the maximum allowed number of Passport Guide DVR Client set-top boxes.

(For more information on Passport Guide DVR Client error messages, “Resolving conflicts” on page 541.)



Your non-DVR set-top box connected to a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom DVR application home video network enables you to enjoy everything listed above for a standalone box, as well as the following additional features:

• Play recorded programs that are stored on the Passport Guide DVR Server (the main, DVR-equipped unit, which is commonly located in a living room or entertainment room)

• On a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network, you can play a total of four HD programs simultaneously: one to be viewed on a TV connected to the Passport Guide DVR Server, and three on TVs connected to different Passport Guide DVR Client set-top boxes.

• On a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network, you can also play the same HD recording on four set-top boxes (DVR Server and three clients) simultaneously

• Stop playback of a recorded program in one room on the network, and resume playback in another room. (Note, however, that if two users are playing the same recorded program on two different set-top boxes, and both stop the playback, playback will resume for both users from the latest stop point.)

• Schedule programs to be recorded on a Passport Guide DVR Server from a client

• Control recorded programs (Recorded Shows) using the FAST FORWARD, REWIND, PAUSE, etc. keys on your remote control

• Display the Recorded Shows list of programs that were recorded and stored on the Passport Guide DVR Server

• Group recorded programs with identical titles in the Recorded Shows list (for example, episodes of the same series) into folders (and ungroup them to show all listings as well)

• Assign a name to the Passport Guide DVR Client set-top box (For more information, see “Playing back recorded shows on a non-DVR set-top box (Clients only)” on page 537 in this chapter and “Assigning names to optional client set-top boxes” on page 245 in the General Settings chapter.)

• Display a DVR Network Information panel that indicates which of the set-top boxes on the network are currently streaming a recording

• Display and use the Scheduled Recordings list

• Display and use the Series Manager

• Display the Lost & Found (in read-only mode; you can restore a program from the Lost & Found only on the DVR server)

• Erase a program that resides on the DVR Server set-top box from the non-DVR client (unless the program is currently playing somewhere on the DVR network)



L imitat ions

The Passport Guide DVR Client set-top box does not feature an internal hard disk and is incapable of performing some of the DVR functions that the Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box offers. The following list identifies some of those limitations.

On a non-DVR set-top box:

• You cannot use DVR control functions on live TV programs (for example, FAST FORWARD, REWIND, or PAUSE keys).

• You cannot swap between two channels.

• You cannot save data from the Live Off Disk (LOD) buffer to a long-term recording.

• The Recorded Shows Information “gas gauge” that indicates the percentage of hard disk space available for recording is not displayed.

• You cannot modify the Series Priority of programs recorded on the DVR Server.

• You cannot restore a recording from the Lost & Found to the DVR Server. If you try to do so, you will receive the message: “This operation is not supported on a non-DVR.” (As shown below.)

Note: When running Passport Guide DVR for Motorola on a non-DVR set-top box within a Multi-Room DVR environment as a client box, the settings for Custom filtering the Program Guide, including the Use Always status, will be inherited from the host DVR set-top box.



Feature compar ison chart

The table below compares Passport Guide DVR feature availability among the following types of Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top boxes:

• Standalone Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top boxes

• Passport Guide DVR on non-DVR set-top boxes connected to a Passport Guide DVR Home Video Network

• Passport Guide DVR on a DVR Server set-top box

Feature Standalone (non-DVR STB)

Network C l ient (non-DVR STB)

DVR Server (DVR STB)

Watch Live TV Yes Yes Yes

Display Channel Banner when you change channels

Yes Yes Yes

Display program information Yes Yes Yes

Conduct title searches and keyword searches

Yes Yes Yes

Modify General Settings Yes Yes Yes

Use Quick Settings menu (if available)

Yes Yes Yes

Use QuickInfo for program information

Yes Yes Yes

Play Recorded Shows No Yes Yes

Record Shows No Yes Yes

Schedule program recordings No Yes Yes

Erase recorded programs No Yes Yes

Use control features (pause, rewind, fast forward, etc.) on a recorded show

No Yes Yes

Group or ungroup recorded show titles

No Yes Yes

Assign name to client STB No Yes Yes

Display Scheduled Recordings No Yes Yes

Display the Series Manager No Yes Yes

Use control features (pause, rewind, fast forward, etc.) on a Live TV show

No No Yes

Swap between two channels No No Yes

Save data from Live Off Disk (LOD) buffer to long-term saved recordings

No No Yes

Restore a recording from the Lost & Found

No No Yes

Modify Series Priority of recorded programs

No No Yes



General information on capabilities of non-DVR set-top boxes

This section highlights the most important differences in capabilities among standalone units, network clients, and DVR server set-top boxes.

Non-DVR set- top boxes cannot contro l L ive TV (Standalones and C l ients)

If you press any of the DVR control keys (PLAY, PAUSE, REWIND, or FAST FORWARD) while you are watching a Live TV program on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (regardless of whether it is network connected), Passport Guide DVR displays a message informing you that the set-top box is unable to control DVR control keys on Live TV.

The message will be replaced by a greyed-out Live TV progress bar after a few seconds.



QuickInfo™ on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients)

You can use QuickInfo on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box to display information about program titles, ratings, descriptions, content advisories, start times, and end times.

You can also use it to display the current program in a scaled video window (see figure below) while you browse information about programs that are currently airing on other channels.

You can also use QuickInfo to set up a recording.

The following screen shows QuickInfo as viewed on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box.

Channel logo

Channel call lettersChannel number

Browse other programs Current time Program title Start and end times

Program rating Scroll program Program description information



Quick Settings on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients)

This section describes the Quick Settings functions on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box.

Quick Settings are accessible to the viewer of a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box, including but not limited to the following:

• Make this Channel a Favorite

The favorite channels that you specify for a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box are specific to that set-top box.

Even if the set-top box is a client in a home video network, settings that you specify for a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box will not affect the Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box, or any other Passport Guide DVR set-top box that may be connected to your Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network.

• Activate a Sleep Timer

You can set a Sleep Timer on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box. This feature may be especially convenient on a set-top box that is installed in a bedroom, for example.

• Activate Parental Control

Please note that the Parental Control settings you specify for a Passport Guide DVR Client set-top box are specific to that Passport Guide DVR Client.

Settings you make on a Client set-top box will not affect the Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box, or any other client that you may have installed in your Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network.

Whenever the viewer attempts to enable or disable the Parental Control settings on any Passport Guide DVR set-top box, Passport Guide DVR will request a Parental Control PIN.

The Parental Control PIN you establish for a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box is specific to only that Passport Guide DVR set-top box. You can use the same Parental Control PIN that you established for your Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box, or a different PIN number for each Passport Guide DVR Client in your network.



For more information on establishing a Parental Control PIN for a specific Passport Guide DVR set-top box, see “Establishing or changing a Parental Control PIN for a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (standalones and Clients)” on page 532.

Note: Parental Control settings you make on your Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box do not affect any Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top boxes installed on your Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network.

You must separately establish the Parental Control settings you want on each and every Passport Guide DVR set-top box installed in your Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network.



General Settings on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients)

This section explains how to use the General Settings on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box.

The General Settings enable you to control a wide variety of Passport Guide DVR settings and options. From a non-DVR set-top box, you can access essentially all of the same General Settings featured on your Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box.

However, it is important to note that when you set General Settings on a Passport Guide DVR set-top box, the new settings affect only the Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (the “client”)--and not the Passport Guide DVR Server or any other Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top boxes that may be installed on your Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network.

Please note the following information on General Settings on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box:

• Parental Control: The Parental Control settings you make on any Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box affect only that particular Passport Guide DVR set-top box.

Similarly, the Parental Control settings you make on a Passport Guide DVR Server affect only the Passport Guide DVR Server.

You can establish different Parental Control settings for each Passport Guide DVR set-top box on your network. For more information about Parental Control on your Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box, see “Parental Control on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients)” on page 531.

• PIN Number: You can establish separate Parental Control PIN numbers for each Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box on your network, or you can use the same PIN number you use on the Passport Guide Server. In either case, the first time you attempt to use a Parental Control PIN, you will need to complete the initial use of PIN procedure.

• Accessories/Set-top Box Name: You can assign a name to each Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box in your Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network. For more information, see “Parental Control on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients)” on page 531.



Parental Control on a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients)

Note: Parental Control settings that you make on a Passport Guide DVR Client non-DVR set-top box affect only that specific, local Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box. Set Parental Control separately on each Passport Guide DVR set-top box installed in your Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network.

The Parental Control settings you make on a Passport Guide DVR Client non-DVR set-top box affect only the local client set-top box. They do not affect the Passport Guide DVR Server or any other Passport Guide DVR Client set-top boxes that may be installed in your Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network.

Important: Please do not assume that because you may have enabled Parental Control locks on the Passport Guide DVR Server that they are also enabled on the Passport Guide DVR Client in your child’s bedroom.

Note: You must enable or disable Parental Control locks separately on each Passport Guide DVR Client in your home video network.



Establishing or changing a Parental Control PIN for a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box (Standalones and Clients)

The Parental Control PIN you assign to a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box is valid for only that specific set-top box.

On a Passport Guide DVR/Whole Home DVR home video network, you can assign the same Parental Control PIN to each Passport Guide DVR client in the network, or you can assign unique PINs to each client.

For information on how to establish a Parental Control PIN, see “To exit the General Settings menu, press the EXIT key.” on page 302.

For information on how to change a Parental Control PIN, see “Changing the PIN” on page 251.



Assigning names to Passport Guide DVR Clients and Passport Guide DVR Servers

Passport Guide DVR allows you to assign a name to each of the Passport Guide DVR set-top boxes in your home video network.

You can assign these names from a pre-defined list that is accessible under the Accessories Set-top Box Name preference.

For example, you may wish to place a client set-top box in your kitchen or bedroom so that you can watch recorded shows from those locations in your home.

Follow the steps below to assign a name to a local Client set-top box (such as one located in your kitchen or bedroom). This preference enables you to assign a name to only the set-top box through which you are using Passport Guide DVR at the moment. In other words, if you want to assign the name “Kitchen” to a client set-top box that you have installed in your kitchen, you must go into the kitchen to assign the name to that client set-top box.

Note: Since client set-top boxes do not include an internal hard disk, you will be unable to perform certain Passport Guide DVR functions on the Client set-top box. (For example, you cannot utilize DVR trick play modes (for example, pause, rewind, fast-forward, etc.) on live TV. For more information on using Client set-top boxes, please see “Using Passport on Non-DVR Set-top Boxes” on page 517.

To assign a name to the set-top box through which you are viewing Passport Guide DVR:




2. Press the up or down arrow (or PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key) to highlight the Accessories category.




If the Accessories category is not expanded, press SELECT. The Accessories category will expand to display various preference items (for example, AC Outlet Use, RF Output, Set-top Clock and Settop Box Name).

3. Press the down arrow to highlight Settop Box Name.

The right side of the screen displays the name of the local Passport Guide DVR set-top box (for example, DVR Receiver).

4. To assign a name to the local set-top box, press SELECT or the right arrow to display the Settop Box Name column.



5. Press the up or down arrow to select a name for the local set-top box (that is, the set-top box through which you are viewing Passport Guide DVR). Available names include: • Digital Receiver • DVR Receiver • Living Room • Kitchen • Dining Room • Family Room • Master Bedroom • Bedroom (1 through 5) • Nursery • Great Room • Den • Office • Library • Game Room • Media Room

• Rec Room • Laundry Room • Bathroom • Basement • Garage • Workshop • Patio Room

6. Press SELECT to accept the selected name.





Viewing in format ion about other network c l ients

You can also use the View Network Info option on the Passport Guide DVR Server or Client to display information about each of the Passport Guide DVR Client set-top boxes on the network. For more information about viewing network information for each Passport Guide DVR Client, see “Using the Scheduled Recordings screen” on page 384.

(Menu as seen from a Passport Client set-top box)

Recorded Shows screen on a non-DVR Client set-top box

You can display the Recorded Shows screen on a Passport Guide DVR Client non-DVR set-top box.

The Recorded Shows screen provides access to all programs that have been recorded to the hard disk in the Passport Guide DVR Server (or to those that are currently being recorded).



Playing back recorded shows on a non-DVR set-top box (Clients only)

A Passport Guide DVR non-DVR set-top box, if attached to a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network, enables you to play back programs that were recorded on a Passport Guide DVR Server set-top box connected to the network.

With a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network and a Passport Guide DVR non-DVR (client) set-top box, you can watch Recorded Shows in any room in your home.

You cannot save programs on the non-DVR set-top box because it does not feature an internal hard disk. However, you can watch programs on a non-DVR set-top box (client) that have been recorded on a Passport Guide DVR Server. (The Passport Guide DVR Server does not need to be powered on.) • While watching a Recorded Show, you can use the DVR remote control

keys to play, pause, rewind, fast forward, or stop the video. • If a recorded program is subject to Parental Control locking parameters

and Parental Control is enabled, you will be unable to view the program (unless you first disable Parental Control on the Client).

• If, for example, you are playing back a recorded program (which resides on the DVR Server) through a networked client in your bedroom, Passport Guide DVR will not allow the program to be erased from the DVR Server (either manually or automatically) until program playback has concluded.

However, if a viewer interacting with a Client set-top box attempts to stop the recording of a program on a connected DVR Server, a message will be displayed indicating that playback may be in progress on another TV and asking the viewer to confirm the request to stop the recording.



Recorded Shows Opt ions menu on a non-DVR set- top box (C l ients on ly)

On a Passport Guide DVR Client set-top box, the Recorded Shows Options menu provides several options for recorded programs. These options are context-sensitive. Not all options are available at all times.

Op t ion Descr ipt ion

Erase Deletes a recorded program from the hard disk of a connected DVR Server (as long as the recorded program is not presently playing elsewhere on the DVR network).

Play Starts playback from the beginning. If you select Play for an active recording, the Passport Guide DVR Client displays the recording in progress (full display).

Play again from beginning

Starts playback of a recorded program from the beginning of the recording. This option is displayed only if the program has been at least partially viewed and is not currently recording.

Play all Plays all recorded programs in the selected folder sequentially, beginning with the first program listed.

Play all new Plays sequentially all new recorded programs (that is, programs that have never been played before) in the selected folder, beginning with the first new program.

Resume playback Starts playback at the point at which the program was last stopped. (For example, if you watched 15 minutes of the recording yesterday, playback will resume at the 15-minute mark.) This option is displayed only if a program has been partially viewed.

To play a recorded show that resides on a Passport Guide DVR Server for viewing on a TV connected to a non-DVR client set-top box:

1. Press the DVR LIST key on your remote control.

The Passport Guide DVR Client non-DVR set-top box may display a wait screen indicating that the Recorded Shows list on the Passport Guide DVR Server is being accessed.

After a moment, the Passport Guide DVR Client displays a list of previously recorded programs (Recorded Shows).



2. Press the up or down arrow to highlight the program that you want to view.


— Press the PLAY key.

— Press SELECT. Press the up or down arrow to select Play, Play From Beginning, or Resume Playback. (Note: These options are context-sensitive and may not all be displayed.) Then press SELECT again.

The program will begin to play.

Notes:

— The Recorded Shows screen displays a time range that indicates how much of a program was recorded. You can play back only the part of a program that was recorded. For example, if the Recorded Shows screen lists a program, but indicates that only two minutes have been recorded (for example, 9:58pm - 10:00pm), only two minutes of video will be available for playback.

— In the Recorded Shows screen, Start and End times appear in yellow if they differ from the actual start and end times of the broadcast. For example, if the recording started late, the start time will appear in yellow. The end time will also appear in yellow only if the recording ended early.

— If you press the STOP key during playback, a dialog displays the following options: Stop and erase; Stop and save; Resume playback.



— When playback of a Recorded Show ends, the Passport Guide DVR Client displays a dialog asking whether you wish to play it again from the beginning, or erase it.

— If communication to the Passport Guide DVR Server hard disk is lost, the Passport Guide DVR Client will display the dialog below. For more information, see “Resolving conflicts” on page 541.

— Only the most-recent bookmark applied to a recorded program is valid. For example, assume Viewer A is watching a recorded program on the Passport Guide DVR Server, and bookmarks the recording at 42:00 minutes by stopping playback. Viewer B later chooses to watch the same recorded program on a Passport Guide DVR Client, but bookmarks it at 15:00 minutes. When either viewer resumes program playback on the Passport Guide DVR Server or the Passport Guide DVR Client, playback will resume at the 15:00 minute bookmark--that is, the most recently placed bookmark.

To display the Recorded Shows Options menu on a non-DVR client:


The Passport Guide DVR Client non-DVR set-top box displays Recorded Shows screen.

2. On the Recorded Shows screen, highlight a program and then press SELECT.

The Passport Guide DVR Client displays the Recorded Shows Options menu. Options are listed in the table on page 540.

3. Highlight an option and then:

— Press SELECT to execute the option, or

— Press the C key to exit the dialog without executing an option.



Reso lv ing conf l i c ts

You may on occasion see an error message while you are watching programs on a non-DVR set-top box.

• If you have not yet purchased and configured a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application home video network, the Passport Guide DVR non-DVR Client set-top box will be unable to verify authorization for a Passport Guide DVR Multiroom application system, and will display a conflict screen similar to the one below. The text of this screen can be configured by your cable operator. Please contact your cable operator for more information.

This screen is an example. Actual message text may be configured by your cable operator.

• If three Passport Guide DVR Clients are already playing back recorded shows from the Passport Guide DVR Server and you attempt to do the same, the Passport Guide DVR Client you are viewing will display the following error message. To resolve the problem, you must wait until one of the other Passport Guide DVR Clients finishes or stops playback.

• If you attempt to use the DVR control functions (RECORD, PLAY, PAUSE, FAST FORWARD, etc.) while watching live TV on a non-DVR set-top box, Passport Guide DVR will display the following message, indicating that the control function is unavailable.



• If the power cable for your Passport Guide DVR Server is not connected to an AC outlet, and you press the DVR LIST key, the Passport Guide DVR Client will display the following error message. To resolve the problem, connect the Passport Guide DVR Server power cable to an AC outlet.

• Passport displays an error message if you connect a Passport Client non-DVR set-top box to the network, but it is unable to find a Passport DVR Server on the network.


Index

A A key 24A key (Sort) 66AC outlet use 155, 238Accessories 155, 530Activate a Sleep Timer 528Activate Parental Control 528Activating

Parental Control 132, 290, 297 secondary audio (SAP) 142, 213 sleep timer 132, 143

Actor search 101, 105, 121 Additional Recording Options dialog 360 Address 536 Ads, Banner 130 Adult language 267 Adult Movie 281 Adult Series 281 Adult titles

displaying 282, 284 hiding 153, 280

Adult-oriented programs 282, 284 Advertisements 130 Air times 82, 343, 396 Airtime 82 All channels 67 All listings 89, 93, 101, 105 Alphabetically 82 Always 281, 283 Always Off 238 Always On 238 Analog Audio 154 Analog channel audio 231 Analog Output 154, 234 Analog Service 218 Applications 413, 414 Arrow keys 23 Aspect ratio 225 Assigning names to set-top boxes 531 Audio 154

adjusting volume 38 level 173 muting 38 secondary 213

Audio Settings 154, 225, 229Audio volume level 229, 428Audio/Video 154Audio/Video Settings 225Auto Favorites 49, 160

Auto Relock 299 Automatic cropping 402 Automatically erased as needed 377 Automatic, closed captioning 219 Auto-tune to HD 152, 175, 346, 349 AUX key 23 Available hard disk space 332 A,B,C sort 68

B B key 24 Back Office Configuration 501 Back to TV 88 Background Color 220 Background Opacity 220 Background options 220 Background tuner 20, 334 Banner ads 130 Banner duration 152, 153, 173 Banner elements

Info Banner 335 Mini Info Banner 335

Banner, Channel 15 Banner, Info 15 Basement 535 Basic procedures 31 Bathroom 535 Bedroom (1 through 5) 535 Bill Reminder 515 Bill View 512 Blacked-out SVOD service 500 Blackout Barker screen 500 Blackout, SVOD 500 Blocked channels

in Video Mosaic 456Bread crumbs, venue 508Buffer storage 334

C C key 24 Cable services bill 512 Cache 334 Call History 153, 184, 186, 189 Call letters 40 Caller ID 46, 153, 183, 186 Caller ID Banner 46, 183, 186

duration 187Caller ID History 189

Passpor t® Gu ide DVR 3 .7 fo r Moto ro la Cus tomer Se rv i ce Gu ide 543

Index

Caller ID Status 153 Cancel PPV purchases 329, 330 Cancel Recording 386 Cancel Series Recording 391 Cancel This Series 357 Cancel This Show 357 Canceling a recording 355 Cancelled recording icon 356 Captions, Closed see Closed Captions 144 Card games 414 Cast member search 121 Cast & Credits 120, 121 CBL key 23 CH key 24 Change PIN 153, 154, 305, 311 Channel Banner 15, 40, 42, 173

duration 152, 173 Channel Banner, Mini 492 Channel Banner, On Demand 490 Channel Buffer Bar 336 Channel Buffer End Time 336 Channel Buffer Start Time 336 Channel Buttons List 448 Channel call letters 40 Channel Down 34 Channel groups, custom 79 Channel key 24 Channel List 56, 63, 83 Channel logo 40, 44 Channel number 33, 40 Channel Up 34 Channels 343, 396

deleting skipped 167 favorite 34, 132, 138, 152, 158 last channel 34 locking 255 Mosaic 447 power-on 152, 170 PPV 323 recording 132, 140 selecting 33 skipped 35, 49 skipping 165 unlocking 258

Channel, default 172 Character map 111 Check mark 165, 166 Check mark sort icon 62, 67 Check mark, sorted 51 Chronological order 406 Cities 421 Clear All 169 Clear recording now 408, 409 Clear show now 408, 409 Clearing space on hard disk 379 Client 521, 531 Client set-top boxes 245 Clients 519, 532 Client, network 501, 518 Clock options 155, 173, 241 Closed Captions 49, 144, 154, 217

activating from Quick Settings 144 analog service 219 configuring and activating from General

Settings 217 deactivating from Quick Settings 145 digital service 219

text & background options 220 Color bar 377 Conflict resolution 401 Conflicts 362 Content advisories 18, 40, 44, 267, 336, 527

unlocking 270Content Advisory Ratings (table) 267Control, Parental

see Parental ControlControl, remote 22Create a manual recording 357Cropping 401Cropping icon 50, 384, 403Cropping, automatic 402Cropping, manual 402Currencies, non-US 304Current Skipped 165, 166, 168Custom Channel Lists 63Custom Sort Options 66Custom sorting the Program Guide 16Custom 1,2,3 62, 63

D D 41, 260, 267, 336Day+/- key 25, 56Default channel 172Delayed video 340Deleting a folder 371Deleting favorite channels 158Deleting programs 372Deleting viewed programs 372Den 535Descriptive Video 154, 215Digital Audio 154, 155Digital channel audio 233Digital Output 154, 234Digital Receiver 535Digital Service 218, 219Digital video recorder 19Dimming characters 111Dining Room 535Directors 101, 105Disabling

Parental Control 135 Purchase PIN 305

Disk space 377Disk usage 115Display 80, 132, 241Display Closed Captions 144Display language 154, 221Displaying

adult titles 282, 284 Channel Banner, duration 152, 173 General Settings menu 156 Program Guide 55 program information a few days ahead 56 Quick Settings menu 133, 149, 415, 420

Dolby Digital 233, 234, 235 Dollar-sign icon 313, 330 DTV CC 219 Dual tuners 20, 333 Duration of listings in Lost & Found 411 Duration, Channel Banner 152, 173 DVD player 424 DVR 19 DVR LIST key 19, 22, 24, 332

Passpor t® Gu ide DVR 3 .7 f o r Mo to ro la Cus tomer Se rv i ce Gu ide 544

Index

DVR Receiver 534, 535DVR Server 521, 537DVR Server set-top boxes 518Dynamic range 154, 155, 235

E EBIF 181 Enabling

Parental Control 134Purchase PIN 305

End Time 40, 44, 343 English 154, 213, 221, 223 Enhanced TV Binary Interchange Format 181 EPG, see Program Guide Episodes to Keep 343, 397 Episodes to Record 343, 396 Erase 380 Erase All 380 Erase All Viewed 372, 380 Erase program icons 50 Erased recordings 409 Erased show, recovering 411 Erasing a program 383 Erasing saved programs 383 Error messages 541 Español 221 Estimated free space 377 Events Summary 326, 328 Exit key 24 Exiting

General Settings menu 157 Program Guide 55 Quick Settings menu 420, 422, 425, 427,

429, 465Exiting General Settings 157Exiting the Program Guide 55Extend end time 345Extending a recording 344Extending VOD rental 471

F Failed recordings 409Family Room 535Fast Forward 24, 338, 488

key 25, 56 speed 338

FAV key 25, 33, 34, 138, 158 Favorite channel icon 49 Favorite channels 65, 138, 152, 158, 528

clearing 163 configuring a channel as 132 deleting 161 selecting 34 selecting a channel as 138

Favorites 62, 78 Favorites, Auto 160 Features, accessing via portals 464 Finding erased or failed recordings 409 Fingerprint application 430 Fixed 229 Folder of episodes 332 Folders, deleting 371 Follow Parental Control 281 Forced Power-On channel 172 Foreground tuner 20, 334

Format options 225Frame-by-frame 333Free preview 304, 334French 154, 213, 223Front panel LED 241Future programs, recording 348

G Game Room 535 Games 414 Garage 535 General Settings 18 General Settings menu 151, 152, 156

displaying 156 exiting 157 help, getting 157 on a client 530

Getting Started 500 Go To Date 60, 70 Grace period 470, 471 Great Room 535 Green color bar 377 Grey characters 111 Grouping episodes 332 Grouping titles 369, 387, 406 Grouping Titles in Lost & Found 406 GUIDE key 23, 55, 59 Guide links 465 Guide, Program 54 G/TV-G 260

H Hard disk 19, 175, 346, 348, 379 Hard disk space 115, 332, 377 HD 62, 175, 346, 348, 379 HD channels, auto-tuning 152 HD Only 396 HD programs matching a theme 78 HDTV 20

channels 175 icon 50 output format 154, 225

HDTV channels 54 Head-End Configurable Features 473 Help 157 Help Text 465 Help, General Settings menu 157 Hidden programs, playing 484, 504 Hide 80 Hide Adult Titles 153, 280, 282, 284, 287 Hide Locked Channels 65 Hide Music Channels 65 Hide On Demand Channels 65 Hide Skipped Channels 65 Hiding titles 280 High-definition 20, 21, 175, 346, 348, 379 History, Caller ID 189 Home Video Network 155, 521, 533

I Icon

closed captions 49 erase program 50 Favorite channel 49

Passpor t® Gu ide DVR 3 .7 f o r Moto ro la Cus tomer Se rv i ce Gu ide 545

Index

HDTV 50 keyword header 50 locked 49 magnifying glass 50 manual recording 49 no record 50 purchased program 49 recording 49 recurring manual recording 49 Reminder Timer 50 SAP 49 scheduled recording 49 series header 50 series recording 49 stereo sound 49

Icons 49 Icons, playback 488 Icons, VOD 485 Idioma 154, 213, 221 Illumination 241 Info about Recorded Show 381 Info Banner 15, 40, 43, 335 INFO key 157 Information, program 120 Instant Replay 340 Instant replay 487 Instant Replay key 25 Integrated search by title 93 Interactive video advertisement 448 Interlaced video 225 IPG, see Program Guide iSubscribe 432

Multiple Offer 436

J Jump ahead one day 25Just In 472

K Keep Longer 381 Key

A 24 Arrow 23 AUX 23 B 24 C 24 CBL 23 Channel 24 Day+/- 25, 56 DVR List 24 Exit 24 Fast Forward 25, 56 FAV 34 Fav 25 Guide 23, 59 Instant replay 25 Last 24 List 24 Live 25 Menu 23 Mute 24 Pause 25 Play 25 Power 23 Record 25

Rewind 25Select 24Settings 23Stop 25Swap 25TV 23Volume 24

Keyboard character map 111 Keyboard map 111 Keyboard Spelling Assist 111 Keyword Header icon 50 Keyword search 101, 509 Keyword search results, sorting 113 Keyword search (PGIS) 105 Keyword Series 115 Keyword Series Request 121 Kitchen 535 Klondike Solitaire 414

L L 41, 260, 267, 336Landing category 473Language

enabling SAP 213menu text 154subtitles 154, 223

Language/Idioma/Langue 154, 213, 221 Last Channel 472 Last Channel, selecting 34 LAST key 24, 33, 34 Last Tuned Channel 463 Laundry Room 535 LED 241 Less Important 394 Letterbox 227 Level, audio 173 Library 535 Library Channel, SVOD 497 Library of titles 495 Line number 183 Links to Program Guide locations 465 List 16 List All Channels 65 List Channels 60, 61, 66, 76, 77, 82, 113 List Favorite Channels 65, 80 LIST key 24 List Music Channels 65, 80 List of Themes 75 List On Demand Channels 65 List Pay-Per-View Channels 65 List upcoming episodes 358 List upcoming shows 129, 408, 409 Listing duration 411 Listings, search 89, 93, 101, 105 LIVE key 25, 340 Live Off Disk buffer 332 Live sporting events, recording 344 Live View 332, 520 Living Room 535 Local set-top box 531 Lock icon 49 Locked Channels 153, 253 Locked Content 153, 267 Locked Ratings 153 Locked Recorded Show 254 Locked Time period


Index

canceling 275unlocking 277

Lockingby content advisory 267channels 255purchasing status 306, 308ratings 260status 153, 154, 293time periods 153

Locking Status 305LOD buffer 333, 334, 336, 340Lost & Found 332, 405, 409Lost & Found panel 406, 411

deleting a program 408

M MAC address 536 Magnifying glass icon 50 Make this Channel a Favorite 528 Manual cropping 402 Manual recording 350 Manual recording icon 49 Manually erased shows, recovering 411 Master Bedroom 535 Media Room 535 Medium 235 Menu key 23 Menu language 154 Menu, Quick 17, 23 Message Notice 50, 153, 192, 193, 194 Messages 153, 192 Micro-site 183 Mini Channel Banner 492 Mini Info Banner

banner elements 335 changing position 341

Mono 197, 231, 232, 233, 235 More Important 394 More Info 121 More INFO menu 453 Mosaic channels 447 Moving the Mini Info Banner 341 Multiple Offer iSubscribe 436 Multiroom DVR Application 245 Music Channels 65 Mute Banner 38 MUTE key 24, 38 Muting the volume 38 My Preferences 152, 158

audio level 173 banner duration 173 favorite channels 158 power-on channel 170

N NA (No rating) 260 Name, set-top box 155, 533 Naming client set-top boxes 245 Narrow 235 NC-17 261, 280 NC17 281 Network

home video 521limit 522video 533

Network client 518 Never 281 New Title icon 485 No Offer dialog 446 No record icon 50 Non-DVR set-top box 501, 518 Non-DVR set-top boxes, Feature Comparison

Chart 525 Notch Skip 333, 339 NR (Adult) 261, 280, 281 NR (General) 260 Nursery 535

O Off (Auto Relock) 295, 299 Off (Relock Manually) 295, 301 Office 535 On Demand Channel Banner 490 On Demand channels 65, 507 On Demand listings 89, 93, 101, 105 On Demand QuickInfo Banner 491 On Demand Venue 506 On Demand Venue Library channel 509 On with Settop 238 Operator-created portals 172 Options, clock 155, 173 Outlet, AC 155 Output Format 154, 225 Output, RF 155 Overtime 344

P Packages, service 432 Paid icon 485 Parental Control 18, 134, 153, 196, 212, 247,

456, 530, 537 activating 132, 290 activating from Quick Settings 291 disabling 135 enabling 134 introducing 248 locking channels 255 locking time periods 153 on a client 528, 531 PIN 153, 249, 251, 295, 316, 528 preferences 213 turning off 295 turning off temporarily from General

Settings 299 turning off temporarily from Quick

Settings 297 turning off until manually re-activated 301 turning off until powering off 296 turning on from General Settings 293 unlocking channels 258 unlocking ratings 264, 270

Parental Control PIN 248, 259, 265, 297, 299, 532

Parental Control/Locking Status 295 Passport Guide DVR 522 Passport Guide DVR Client 531 Passport Guide DVR Client Names 533 Passport Guide DVR Client, playing recorded

programs 537 Passport Guide DVR icons 49


Index

Passport Guide DVR Integrated Search 93, 105 Passport Guide DVR Server 521, 536, 537 Passport Guide Multiroom DVR Application 521 Passport Multiroom DVR 531 Passport Weather 419 Patio Room 535 Pause 338, 340 Pause key 25 Pay-Per-View 470 Pay-Per-View channel 23 Pay-Per-View programs 19 Pay-Per-View Purchasing 19 Pending PPV purchases 325 Percentage of disk space 377 PGIS 93 PGIS by keyword 105 PG/TV-PG 260 PG-13 260 PIN

changing 154, 249, 251 entry 305 number 528, 530 Parental Control 249, 251, 290, 295 Purchase 305

PIN, Parental Control 532 Play 380, 488, 538 Play All 380 Play All New 380 Play From Beginning 380 Play key 25 Playback Head (within banners) 336 Playback icons 488 Playing

recorded programs 364, 537, 538 recorded programs on a client 537 secondary audio (SAP) 132

Playing back VOD 486 Playing unviewed programs 375 Plot Summary 120 Poker 5 Card Draw 414 Portals 172, 464 Portuguese 154, 223 Power button 23 Power key 32 Power-Off Timer 153, 197, 202 Power-On Channel 152, 170 Power-On timer 153, 170, 197, 199 PPV 19, 54, 470

channels 323 preferences 212 programs 303 purchasing programs 313 status 325

PPV Purchases 19, 212 canceling from General Settings 327 canceling from Program Guide 329 pending 325

Premium services 432 Preserve 227 Preview 304, 485, 494, 497 Previews 497 Primary 219 Prime Time 70 Priority 394

recording 401 storage 382

Program descriptions 44, 527

Program Guide 36, 54, 126, 129 cancel purchase 329 displaying 55 exiting 55 introducing 54 keyword, searching by 101 purchasing PPV programs 313 sorting 16, 57 theme, display by 72 time, display by 59 title, searching by 76

Program information 120 displaying a few days ahead 56 panel 448

Program priority 401 Program ratings 44, 527 Program title 40, 44 Programs

selecting from Program Guide 124 Programs available 87, 245 Programs, recording future 348 Programs, upcoming 83 Progressive scanning 225 Pulse Code Modulated 233, 234 Purchase PIN 305

changing 311 Purchased 472 Purchased program icon 49 Purchasing 154, 305

category 305, 308 locking status 306, 308 PPV channels, from 323 PPV programs 313 PPV purchases 325 preferences 212 Purchase PIN 305

Purchasing PPV 19 Purchasing services via iSubscribe 433, 436 Purchasing VOD programs 477

Q Quick Settings 17, 291

closed captions 144 Quick Settings menu 131, 132

displaying 133, 149, 415, 420 exiting 420, 422, 425, 427, 429, 465 introducing 131

Quick Tips 152, 178 QuickInfo 44, 318, 348

on a client 527 QuickInfo Banner, On Demand 491 QuickMenu 17, 23, 147, 148, 414

R R 261Radio Frequency 240Rating 44Rating Adult 281Rating icon 336Rating NC17 281Rating NR (Adult) 281Rating X 281Ratings 260, 267, 281

unlocking 264, 270Rebooting the set-top box 21


Index

REC icon 50, 354, 355 REC key 25, 364 Rec Room 535 Recently Viewed 472 Record entire series 357 Record icon 349, 354, 355 Record in Standard Definition 175, 346, 348,

349, 357 Record key 25, 364 Record Options 358, 380, 386 Record this live event 357 Record This Show 343, 357 Recorded programs 364 Recorded programs on a client 521 Recorded Shows 87, 371, 381 Recorded Shows Information 115, 377, 378 Recorded Shows Options dialog 380, 538 Recorded Shows panel 87, 366, 368, 536 Recorded Shows, viewing on a client 521 Recorded Show, displaying Info 381 Recording

channels 132, 140 current channel 140 current program from Program Guide 346 icon 49 manual 350 modifying options 357 programs 342 series 353, 357 two programs simultaneously 20

Recording future programs 348 Recording in Progress 384 Recording in Progress icon 336 Recording Options dialog 357

additional options 360 Recording programs 19 Recordings available to view 87 Recording, failed 409 Recovering a manually erased show 411 Recovering lost programs 405 Recovering manually erased shows 411 Recurring manual recording icon 49 Red color bar 377 Relock Manually 301 Remind me about this show 357 Reminder Timer 126, 127, 153, 197, 204

canceling a 208 icon 50 modifying 207

Reminder, Bill 515 Remote control 22, 423, 426 Remote location 210 Remote Recording 210 Remote Wizard Application 423 Rental window 470, 471 Restart 21 Restrict TV viewing 248 Restricting programs 18 Resume Playback 380, 538 Reverse chronological order 406 Rewind 338, 340

key 25, 56 speed 338

RF Output 155, 240

S S 41, 260, 267, 336 SAP 132, 142, 213

icon 49 Save 396 Save until manually erased 377, 381, 408, 409 Save until space is needed 381, 408, 409 Scaled video streams 448, 453 Scaled video window 44, 527 Scanning technique 225 Schedule conflicts 362 Scheduled recording icon 49 Scheduled recordings 384 Scheduled Recordings options 386 Screen location, MAC address 430 Scrolling 24, 73 SD 20, 346, 348, 379 SD channel 175 SD Only 396 Search by keyword 101 Search by keyword (PGIS) 105 Search by title 89, 410 Search for actor 121 Search for keywords 509 Search for titles 509 Searching for upcoming showings 409 Searching the Program Guide by Title 76 Secondary 219 Secondary audio programming (SAP) 132, 142,

213 turning off 142

SELECT key 24 Selecting

channels 33 favorite channels 34, 132, 138 program in Program Guide 124 recording options 357

Series Header icon 50 Series Manager display 389 Series Manager Options 353, 391 Series Recording icon 49, 354 Series Recording Options 346, 348, 358, 391,

396 Series Recording Priority 391 Series Recording Priority panel 394 Series Recordings 353 Series Repeat Options 391, 399 Server 521, 536, 537 Service packages 432 Service portal 172 Services 464 Set up 67 Setting

volume on TV and set-top box 39 SETTINGS key 23, 133, 149, 415, 420 Settings, General 18 Set-top box 21

clock options 155, 173 turning on 32

Set-top Box Name 155, 530, 533, 534 Set-top Clock 155, 173

options 241 Sexual Situations 267 Sexually Explicit Content 280 Shortcuts to functions 148 Show All Listings 370, 388


Index

Show Channel Always 241 Show Channel When Tuning 241 Show Time Always 241 ShowRunner and Whole Home VOD 501 ShowRunner On Demand Programming

Library 509 Sidebar 225, 227 Single offer iSubscribe 433 Skip backward 339 Skip forward 339 Skipped Channels 35, 49, 65, 152, 165

clearing 169removing 167

Sleep timer 143, 153, 197, 231, 528 activating 132, 143 deactivating 143

Slow motion 332, 333, 340 symbol 338

Software applications 181 Solitaire 414 Sort Channels 60, 68 Sort check mark icon 62, 67 Sort Options 79 Sort Options menu 60 Sort Programs 76, 77, 82 Sorted check mark 51 Sorting Keyword search results 113 Sorting the Program Guide 16, 57 Sorting Title Search results 99 Sorting titles 369 Spanish 154, 213, 221, 223 Spelling Assist 111 Standalone Channel Buttons List 448 Standalone devices 518, 519 Standalone Non-DVR Set-top Box 520 Standalones 532 Standard Definition 20, 175, 346, 348, 349,

379 Start Time 40, 44, 343 Start-up channel 152, 170 States, local weather 421 Status icons 366 Status of PPV purchases 325 Stereo 231, 232

on 197, 231, 233, 235 sound icon 49

STOP key 25, 338, 344 Stop Recording 380 Stop this recording 355 Stopping

recording 344, 357, 376, 386 secondary audio 142

Storage priority screen 382 Streams, video 448 Stretch 225, 227 Strong Sexual Content 281 Subscription Video On Demand 468 Subscription Video On Demand Blackout

(SVOD) 500 Subtitles 154

language 223 Suggestive Dialog 267 Supercategory Library channels 499 Supercategory Library channels, SVOD 499 Surround sound 197, 231, 232, 233, 235 SVOD 468 SVOD Blackout 500

SVOD Channel Subscriptions 497 SVOD icons 485 SVOD Library Channels 468, 495, 497 SVOD Library Screens 500 SVOD playback 486 SVOD Supercategory Library channels 468,

499 Swap 332 SWAP key 25, 334 Swapping tuners 20, 334 Symbols, see Icons

T Telephone calls 46, 183 Telephone icon 51 Television output formats 225 Text Color 220 Text Opacity 220 Text Options 220 Text Size 220 Text Style 220 Theme Sort Options 82 Theme view 76, 82

List channels 77 Themes 72 Themes, list of 75 Theme, displaying Program Guide by 72 Thirty second skip 339 Tick marks 336, 339 Time Grid 54, 59 Time increment tick marks 336 Time periods

locking 153, 272 Timeline 336 Timer 153, 197

Power-Off 153, 202 Power-On 153, 199 Reminder 126, 127, 204 Sleep 132, 143, 153, 197, 231, 528

Time-shifted TV 332, 340 Time, current 44 Time, displaying Program Guide by 59 Time, start and end 44 Tips, Quick 152, 178 Title 82 Title assignment, multiple program

recording 352 Title Blocked 280 Title line 94 Title Search 89, 93 Title search 509 Title search results, sorting 99 Title search (PGIS) 93 Titles of programs 40 Titles, grouping 369 Titles, sorting 369 Title, program 44 Title, searching Program Guide by 76 Tuners 20, 333 Turning off automatically 202 Turning off Parental Control 295 Turning on

set-top box 32 TV 32

TV key 23 TV listings 89, 93, 101, 105


Index

TV-MA 260TV-Y 260TV-Y7 260TV, turning on 32TV-14 260Twenty One or Bust 414Two tuners 20

U Unit Address 536Unit address, displaying 430Unlocking

channels 258 locked time period temporarily 277 ratings 264, 270

Unsubscribed channels 446 Until manually erased 343, 389 Until space is needed 343 Untitled Recording 352 Unviewed programs, playing all 375 Upcoming episodes 129, 358 Upcoming programs 83 Upcoming showings, searching for 409 Upcoming shows 129 Use Now 67 User interface 473 User interface display 221 Using set-top box to control volume 39

V V 41, 260, 267, 336 Variable 229, 233 Venue bread crumbs 508 Venue Channel 506 Video Mosaic channels 447, 451 Video network 521, 522, 533 Video On Demand 468, 470 Video Output Format 154, 225 Video streams 448 Video window, scaled 44, 527 Video, Descriptive 154, 215 View Network Info 536 View This Channel Now option 357 Viewed icon 485 Viewed programs, deleting 372 Viewing cable bill 513 Violence 267 VOD 468, 470

Feature Channels 468, 492 Library Channels 468, 472

VOD icons 485 VOD Offers 469 VOD playback 486 VOD programs, purchasing 478 VOD Purchases

canceling 480 restricting 471

Voicemail 183, 185Voicemail Banner 48Volume

adjusting 38 banner 38 key 24 level 154, 230, 234 set-top box output 173

using set-top box to control, procedure for setting on TV and set-top box 39

W Watching recorded programs on a client 521 Weather report 419 Weather, Passport 419 Whole Home VOD 501 Whole Home VOD Back Office 501 WHVOD 501 Wide 233, 235 Workshop 535

X X rating 281

Y Yellow color bar 377

Z Zip Code 419Zoom 227

Numerics 1,2,3 sort 681080i Wide 225, 22724-hour rental window 47030-second skip 25, 339480i Standard 225, 227480p Standard 225, 227480p Wide 225, 227720p Wide 225, 227


Index


passport guide dvr 3.7 for motorola customer service guideturning parental control off: auto or...

Documents